:j3*t;: TKANSACTIONS OF THE NEW ZEALAND INSTITUTE 1909 ./.->/ V VOL. XLII (New Issue) EDITED AND PUBLISHED UNDER THE AUTHORITY OF THE BOARD OF GOVERNORS OF THE INSTITUTE Issued 1st June, 1910 WELLINGTON, N.Z. JOHN MACKAV, GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE W. WESLEY AND SONS, LONDON CONTENTS. TRx\NSACTIONS. I. — Miscellaneous. Art. I. Oceanic Comparatives. By Rev. C. E. Fox . . VII. On someMrmour presented to Titore, a Nga Pnhi Chief, by H.M William IV in 1835. By A. Hamilton . . XL Early History of Rangitikei, and Notes on the Ngati Apa Tribe, By T. W. Downes XIT. The Waterloo of the Waikato, fought in 18.30, and its Effects on the After-enacted Land Laws of that Part of the North Island. By W. Welch, F.R.G.S. XLI. Some Theorems relating to Sub-Polar Triangles. By E. G. Hogg, M.A. LI. Captain Dumont D'UrviUe's Visit to Whangarei, Waitemata, and the Thames in 1827. By S. Percy Smith, F.R.G.S. . . LII. Maori Forest Lore : Being some Account of Native Forest Lore and Woodcraft, as also of many Myths, Rites, Customs, and Superstitions connected with the Flora and Fauna of the Tuhoe or Ure-wera District. Part III. By Eisdon Best LIII. Classitication of Verse. By Johannes C. Andersen LXIII. I\Iaori Numeration : Being a Reply to Mr. Eisdon Best's Paper on " Maori Numeration " in Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. xxxix. By Hare Hongi PAGES 1-8 74-114 114-118 327-332 412-433 433-481 481-533 625-640 II. — Zoology. II. List of Recent Shells found Fossil in New Zealand. By Heiuy Suter . . . . . . . . . . . . S-I3 V. Some Additions to the Peiiidce, Neuroptera-Flanipennia, and Trirhoptera of New Zealand. By E. J. Hare . , . . 29-33 IX. Notes on New Zealand Lepidoptera. By E. Meyrick, B.A., F.R.S. 63-66 X. Lepidoptera from the Kermadec Islands. By E. Meyrick, B.A., F.R.S. .. .. .. .. .. .. 67-73 XVI. On an Isopod inhabiting Ants' Nests m New Zealand. By Charles Chilton, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S. . . . . . . 190-102 ■ XXVI. Bionomic Observations on certain New Zealand iJiptera. By David Miller . . . . . . . . 226-235 XXVIL A New Species of A'mpis. By David MiUer .. .. 235-236 XXXiH. Some New Zealand and Tasmanian Arachnidce. By H. R. Hogg. M.A., F.Z.S. . . . . . . . . . . 273-283 XXXV. Additions to the Terrestrial Isopoda of New Zealantl. Bv Chnrlra Chilton, M. A., D.Sc, F.L.S. .. .. .. .. 286-291 XXXVl. On the Colcopttra of the Kermadec Islands. By Major T. Broun, J'\E.S. . . . . . . . . . . 291-.306 XXXVl 1. Additions to the Coleopterouii Faiuia of the Chatham Islands. By .Major T. Broun, F.E.S. . . . . . . . . 306-310 32404 IV Contents, Akt. XLV. The Discovery of Moa-remains on Stewart Island. By Pro fessor W. B. Bcnham, D.Sc, F.R.S. . . . . XLVII. A List of the Known Fishes of Kermadec and Norfolk Islands, and a Comparison with those of Lord Howe Island. By Edgar R. Waite, F.L.S. XLVIII. Notes on New Zealand Fishes. By Edgar R. Waite, F.L.S. XLIX. The Pipiwharauroa, or Bronze Cuckoo {Chalcococcyx lucidus) and an Account of its Habits. By Robert Fulton, M.D. LV. Notes on a Collection of Sea-anemones. By F. G. A. Stuckey M.A., and C. L. Walton LVI. Description of a New Species of xMoth. By A. I'hilpott PAGES 354-356 370-383 384-391 392-408 541-543 544 III. — Botany. in. Botanical Notes made on a Journey across the Tararuas. By B. C. Aston, F.I.C., F.C.S. .. .. .. .. 13-25 IV. Unrecorded Habitats for New Zealand Plants. By B. C. Aston, F.I.C., F.C.S. .. .. .. ■ .. .. 2(i-28 XIII. The Vegetation of the Kermadec Islands. By R. B. Oliver .. 118-175 XVIII. Description of a New Native Gtrass {Poa). By D. Petrie, M.A. . . 196 XIX. Oh Poa hreviglumis. Hook. f. By D. Petrie, M.A. . . . . 197-199 XX. On the Naturalisation of Calluna vulgaris, Salisb., in the Taupo District. By D. Petrie, M.A. . . . . . . . . 199 XXI. Contributions to a Fuller Knowledge of the Flora of New Zea- land : No. 3. By T. F. Cheeseman, F.L.8., F.Z.S. . . 200-213 XXII. Notice of the Occurrence of Leiicof>o;/oii. Richei, R. Br., on the Mainland of New Zealand. By T. F. Cheeseman, F.L.S. , F.Z.S. .. .. .". .. .. .. 214-215 XXIIL Some Recent Additions to the Flora of New Zealand. By T. F. Cheeseman, F.L.S., F.Z.S. . . . . . . . . 21(>-218 XXXVIII. Some Hitherto-unrecorded Plant-habitats (V). By L. Cockayne, Ph.D. .. .. .. .. .. .. 311-319 XXXIX. List of Lichenes and Bryophytes collected in Stewart Island dming the Botanical Survey of 1908. By L. Cockayne, Ph.D. .. .. .. .. .. .. 320-324 XL. On a Non-floweruig New Zealand Species of Hubus. By L. Cockayne, Ph.D. . . . . . . . . . . 325-326 XLIV. Botanical Evidence against the Recent Glaciation of New Zea- land. By G. M. Thomson, F.L.S. . . . . . . 348-353 XLVI. A Comparative Study of the Anatomy of Six New Zealand Species of Lijcopodium. By J. E. Holloway, M.Sc. . . 356-370 LVII. Observations on some New Zealand Halophytes. By MLss B. D. Cross, M.A. . . . . . . . . . . 545-574 IV. — Geology. VI. Notes on some Rocks from Parapara, Bluff Hill, and Waikawa. By J. Allan Thomson, B.A., B.Sc, F.G.S. .. .. 33-39 VIII. The Present Position of New Zealand Palteontology ; with a List of Papers on tJie Pala-outology of New Zealand, in- cluding the Titles of those Stratigraphical Papers contain- ing Important Lists of Fossils. By A. Hamilton . . . . 46-63 XXIX. Petrological Notes on Rocks from the Kermadec Islands ; with some Geological Evidence for. the Existence of a Subtropical Pacific Continent. By R. Speight, M.A., B.Sc, F.G.S. . . 241-254 Contents. v Art, XXX. Notes on the Geology of the West Coast Sounds. By R. Speight, tages M.A., B.Sc., F.d.S. . . . . . . . . . . 255-267 XXXIV. On the Aeration of the Auckland Lava-beds. By James Stewart, M.Inst.C.E. .. .. .. .. ■ .. .. 284-285 XLII. Note on the Geology of Mangaia. By P. Marshall, D.Sc. . . .333 XLIII. The Glaciation of New Zealand. By P. Marshall, D.Se. . . 334-348 LIV. The Physiography of Wellington Harbour. By J. M. Bell . . 534-540 LVIII. On the Glacial Tih in Hautapu Vallej', Rangitikei, Wellington. By Professor James Park, F.G.S. . . . . . . 575-580 LIX. Further Notes on the Glaciation of the North Island of New Zealand. By Professor James Park, F.G.S. . . . . 580-584 LX. Some Evidences of Glaciation on the Shores of Cook Strait and Golden Bay. By Professor James Park, F.G.S. . . . . 585-588 LXI. The Great Ice Age of New Zealand. By Professor James Park, F.G.S. . . . . .... . . . . 589-612 LXII. A Geological Reconnaisance of Northernmost New Zealand. By J. M. BeU and E. de C. Clarke . . . . . . 6] 3-024 V. — Chemistry and Physics. XIV. The Mokoia Aerohte ; with a few Introductory Remarks on New Zealand Meteoric Phenomena. By G. R. Man-iner, F.R.M.S. 176-185 XV. On the Radio-activity of the Artesian- water System of Christ- church, New ZcalantI, and the Evidence of its Effect on Fish-life. By C. Coleiidge Farr, D.Sc, and D. C. H. Florance, M.A., M.Sc. . . . . . . . . I85-1UO XVII. The Cam-lever Balance. By J. Clement Curt . . . . 192-196 XXIV. The Absorption of Moisture fiom the Atmosphere l)y Wools. By A. M. Wright, F.C.S. . . . . . . . . 218-224 XXV. The Formaldehyde Method for the Estimation of Nitrogen in Organic Substances. By A. M. Wright, F.C.S. . . . . 224-225 XXVIII. On the Influence of Ripples on the Gas Content of the Artesian Waters of Christchurch. By C. Coleridge Farr, D.Sc, and D. C. H. Florance, M.A., M.Sc. . . . . . . 237-240 XXXI. An Apparent Relation between some of the Physical Properties of Solids. By S. Page, B.Sc. . . . . ' . . . . 267-269 XXXII. A Possible Relation between Atmospheric Carbon -dioxide and Leaf-development. By S. Page, B.Sc . . . . . . 270-273 L. The Remarkable Rainfall and Meteorology of Waihi. By H. B. Devereux, F.R.Met.Soc. . . " . . . . ' . . 408-411 VI Contents. Plate. I-VII. VIII. IX-XI. XII-XXIII. XXIV-XXV. XXVI-XXVII. XXVIII-XXIX. XXX. XXXI-XXXIV. XXXV-XXXVI. XXXVII-XXXVIII. XXXIX. XL. XLI-XLII. XLIII-XLIV. XLV-LI. LII-LVII. LIST OF PLATES. Botany of the Tararuas. — Aston Armoui- presented to Titore. — Hamilton Early History of Rangitikei. — Downes Vegetation of the Kermadec Islands. — Oliver The Mokoia Aerolite. — Marrinee Branched Nikau-palm. — Oheeseman . . New Zealand JHptern. — Miller Em pis Otakouensis. — Miller New Zealand Species of Lycoiiodiiim. — Hollo way Fishes of Kermadec and Norfolk Islands. — Waite New Zealand Fishes. — AVaite Rainfall and Meteorology of Waihi. — Devereux Portrait of Natai. — Smith . . Physiography of Wellington Harbour. — Bell . . Sea-anemones. — Stuckey and Walton Glaciation of the North Island. — Park Geology of Northernmost New Zealand. — Bell and Clarke To illustrate Article Follow Page III 1(3 VII 40 XI 9() XIII 128 XIV 17fi XXI 208 XXVI 234 XXVII 236 XLVI 368 XLVII 384 XLVIII 384 L 410 LI 416 LIV 536 LV 542 LIX 580 LXII 624 (^ TRANSACTIONS v OF THE NEW ZEALAND INSTITUTE, 19 0 9. Art. I. — Oceanic Comparatives. By Eev. C. E. Fox. Communicated by A. Hamilton. [Bead before ike Wellington Philosophical Society, aih May, 1909.] Probably most students of Oceanic languages begin by merely comparing words of similar form and meaning in different languages. Later on, the testimony of words to the beliefs of the people, to their common origin, to the position and character of their home before they became scattered, becomes of great interest. But meanwhile cei'tain principles of comparison emerge from the number of comparisons made, and gradually the com- parisons become in consequence sounder. Some comparisons made at first without hesitation are seen to be wrong ones, while many comparisons formerly unthought-of can now be safely made. The following paper de- scribes briefly a few principles of comparison in dealing with Oceanic words. They are principles which seem to be true when tested, but they were ob- tained by collecting a great many examples of comparatives, and then considering these examples to see if they had anything in common. They appeared to conform to certain rules. These rules were then tested by applying them to many fresh comparatives, with excellent results. In the hope that they may be of service to others, or, at least, may be suggestive, it seemed worth while to write them down. One side of the subject, however, is not discussed — the question of phonetic changes ; it deserves separate treatment, and is too large to be discussed here. But the principle may be at once laid down that no com- parison should be made of words whose forms are different unless the differ- ence can be explained according to well-known phonetic laws. One might suppose this caution hardly needed, but it is, in fact, generally ignored. One need only quote a sentence from " Maori and Polynesian " : " The Aryan ra (to rest, to be delighted, to love) .... is not far off in oiigin from the root la (to yearn for or desire), which appears in Sanskrit lash (to desire). ... It seems much the same as the Maori rel:a (plea- sant), and, in the other sense of ' calm,' as the Maori ivhakaruru (sheltered from the wind)." Such comparisons may easily be a source of confusion. 1— Trans. ^> 2 Transactions. Another principle to be insisted on is that all the letters of a word must be taken into consideration. If the Mota vula (moon) is compared with the Malay hulan, the n must be accounted for ; if namu (mosqmto) is compared svvith namoJc, the k must be accounted for. In these two cases the n and A: suffixes, common in Malay nouns, are of great interest to the philologist. It is common to ignore single letters, especially at the end of a word. Much of great interest and value is thus passed by. It is perhaps best to set aside onomatopoeic words, interesting as they are. The author of " Maori and Polynesian " compares the Maori mumu (to hum) with the Latin murmurare (to murmm-), while " koJco (the tui) may be set beside the Sanskrit l-akh (to laugh), English ' quack ' and ^ cackle.' "* Probably such words appear in all languages. There is a Malay word for " dog," asu, and this is found in Melanesia, but not in Polynesia ; so it has been supposed that the Maori au (to bark) represents the Malay asu (a dog) — in fact, that nothing but the bark is left in New Zealand. It is a comparison one is loth to forego when one remembers the classic case of the Cheshire cat ; but one must allow that " au au " is very like the sound a dog makes everywhere. It seems reasonable to suppose that the fuller form of a word is the root. We are familiar enough with shortened forms — cab, from cabriolet ; bus, from omnibus ; car, from carriage ; phone, from telephone. It is, no doubt, a common process in all languages. Now, if we take any word of two or three letters (not a particle) in any Ocean language, it appears to be the case that a fuller form of the word can always be found in some other lan- guage. Of course, the fuller form may have been lost everywhere, but no such case has come under the writer's observation. These fuller forms consist of two consonants and two vowels, or, at least, of two syllables. Thus, though hua is " moon" in one language of Indonesia, hula is found in others ; though niu is '' cocoanut " in many Oceanic languages, niru is found in one (Vella Lavella). It also appears to be the case that no root-forms occur of more than two syllables. There are many longer words in the vocabularies, but they are either roots plus a prefix or suffix or they are compound words. Thus, in the Mota word nonom (think) the m is the common Oceanic verbal suffix ; in the Mota malumhim (soft), ma is the common adjectival prefix, while lumlum is the reduplicated root {lumu). The Florida tidalo (a god) is a compomid word, ti appearing also in tinoni (a living man), whatever the meaning may be of dalo — the same word, doubtless, as the San Cristoval ataro (a god) ; Mota tataro (a prayer) — from the first word with which all prayers or charms began ; Tahitian tarotaro (a short prayer to the gods). The Florida word appears to be indirect evidence that the primitive religion of the people was ancestor-worship. The Mota geara (a fence) is really two words — ge and ara — a form of the latter being commonly used for " fence " in Oceanic languages. * I cannot refrain from giving instances of the ciirious reasoning and inaccurate statements in the chapter of this book entitled " The Maori as seen in his Language " : " Malay, as the tongue of a Mongoloid people, is assumed to be agghitinative, . . . . But there is nothing agglutinative about [Maori] .... Now, the only inflectional languages are either Aryan or Semitic." Tnerefore Maori is either Aryan or Semitic ! So much for the reasoning. Later on he speaks of the " coincidence of Maori ruma (an apartment), used all through the Pacific in the sense of house, with the English ' room.' " Now, there is no such Maori word at all, and, though ruma does occur in Melanesia, neither the word itself nor any form of it is known to occur in Polynesia. Fox. — Oceanic Comparatives. 3 The following principle seems, then, to hold good : that all Oceanic roots consist of two syllables. The first point to determine about a word is this root. But the full form is often missing, and the next point is to find out how these root-forms are modified. In the first place, the first consonant may be dropped. The Florida aho (the sun) is a modified form of raho or laho. This modification is a common one. Still more common is the dropping of the second consonant, especially in Polynesia. The full form of the Maori kau (to swim or wade) is karu, the word really mean- ing " to move the legs and arms." In many cases both consonants are dropped, as in the Rarotongan at (fire), the root of which is Jcapi ; or the Maori ao (dawn), from raho. Sometimes the second vowel is dropped, as in the Mota kor (dried), from koro ; but the first vowel remains, and is rarely altered ; it is, in fact, the most stable part of the word. On the other hand, the second vowel is liable to frequent change. The commonest modification of all is the dropping of the second syllable. Thus, the Maori ra (sun) is from raho ; po (night) from pongi ; pa (a fence or stockade) from para. It frequently happens that when only the first syllable remains this is strengthened by reduplication. Thus Mota koko (enclose) is from koro ; Mota rara (scorch), from raho ; Mota roro (deep), from roto ; Mota lolo (inner parts), from roto ; Mota roroi (news), from rongo ; Maori rara (a branch), from rana ; Fiji haha (side of a hill), from hara. Such reduplications are very common. Perhaps there are cases of the dropping of the first syllable of the root ; but until they are shown to exist, such comparisons as that of the Mota gana (to eat) with the Malay makan (to eat) must be viewed with suspicion. Manga, which also appears as maka, means originally " a cleft or rent," in some languages " a mouth " ; in Mota " to keep opening and shutting, as the gills of a fish." This is, no doubt, the Mota representative of the Malay makan (to eat), the n being the common verbal suffix. There is yet another fairly common modification of the root — by meta- thesis. Thus, the Florida labu (strike) is the Malay palu ; the Mota toro (deep), the Maori roto ; the Mota ma-vinvin (thin), from nihi ; Maori ngaro (fly), from rango ; Maori rahu (scratch), from karu ; Aneityum mulmul (soft), from lumu ; Tongan pelupelu (bent), from lupe ; Maori tumu (cape), from mutu. It may be asked which is the root and which the transposed form. The answer is that the transposed form is usually local, and is shown to be later by the fact that modifications of it are absent or rare ; whereas the real root is found all over the Pacific, and broken-down forms of it are very common. Of course, many forms of the same root may, and generally do, exist in one language. An instance may be given from Mota. The root koro means " to encircle, enclose " ; hence, " to contract, shrink," &c. It is found in many Oceanic languages, as koro, kolo, koko, &c. Probably it is the source of the following words in Mota : kolo (contract), koloi (a hole), kolkoloi (a small contracted thing), kor (to shrink with heat or dryness, dried breadfruit), koko (keep close, contract, carry water in the hands), kokor (enclose, keep carefully), kokos (enclose, as fish in a net ; fowls, by the people catching them), kokot (enclose, contract), kokota (narrow, con- tracted), kokorou (fold the arms or wings), gogo (shrink or shrivel), gogo- rag (gather together with the hands), goro (a preposition, with many mean- ings of enclosing or shutting-in), goro-vag (throw the arms round), goro (to cut round, and so generally to cut), gorogoro (harvest), goro (to embrace). 1*— Trans. 4 Transactions. ^. ^golo (fade or wither). There are other more doubtful examples of it, such as oloolo (a sacrifice), where probably (as in Efate gorokoro) the idea was that of protection, coming into the enclosure of the god sought and being shut out from the power of other gods. Some examples of the application of these rules may now be given. 'Three roots will perhaps be sufficient to illustrate the subject. Taking the Maori word roto, it is evident that we have the root itself. We may expect, however, to find it modified in various ways, and may look ior it in such forms as loto, oto, lo, ro, roro, lolo, tow. The meaning of roto is " inside, within, the midst, places inland, a lake " {ha-rotoroto, a pond). From this meaning of " within " (which is the root meaning) the word comes to mean in Samoa (in the form loto) " the heart, desire, or will ; the under- standing ; the interior of a house ; a deep pool in the lagoon " — loloto (deep, depth), lotoi (to be in the middle). The Tahitian roto and Hawaiian Joko have much the same meanings. In Tonga loto means " the mind " ; JoJoto " deep, the deep, ocean." In Mangareva we get a further meaning, for here roto is " deep, depth, the inward parts," and " to obscure or darken " ; while rotoroto is " the shallow sea," a curious meaning, to be explained presently. We may follow this full form of the root to Melanesia, where in Saa Malaita roroto is " a dark cloud " ; in San Cristoval rodo is " dark," rodomana " the abode of the dead, the dark land " ; and in Florida rorodo is " blind." The form oto does not appear in Maori, but from the meanings presently to be given of the Maori roro it appears more than probable that oto has been modified into uto, which means in Tonga " the brains (the inner parts), the spongy substance of an old cocoanut " ; the Mangareva uto (marrow, yolk of eggs) ; Mangaia uto (little kernel growing in a cocoanut) ; Fiji uto (heart, pith of trees, marrow of bones) ; Mota utoi (pith of trees) ; Malay utak ; New Celebes utok. Uta (inland country), " forest " in many lan- guages, is doubtless the same word. A final o is often represented in Malay by a, and in Malay otak means " brains " (A; is a noun suffix in Malay). We now come to ro, which appears in Maori, meaning " in, into " ; and lo, which in Santa Cruz means " night or darkness." Taking next the reduplicated form of this, we find the Maori roro, meaning " brains or marrow." The Samoan lolo and Tahitian roro have similar meanings. The Hawaiian lolo means " the brain, marrow of bones, insane." Tongan lolo (oil, oily fat) and Mangareva roro (soft) are perhaps meanings derived from " the brain." In Santa Cruz lolo is " fat or oil " ; in Mota loloi means " inside, the inner part, the affections," and is used in very many compound words to express states of feeling ; roro means " deep, to sink down, be deep," also " to be sunk down," and so " shallow " ; the water is said to roro in the well, hence the well is roro (shallow), an explanation of the Manga- revan word. R frequently becomes n, and there can be little doubt that nonom (to think) and nonon (to smear) — the m and n being verbal suffixes — are .both from roto. In Efate, New Hebrides, roro means " to think." rorona " thought " ; and Dr. McDonald mentions that these words are sometimes pronounced trotro and trotrona. Taking now the final modification, the transposition of the letters, the Mota toro means " deep " ; toron, " to desire or long for " ; Florida dolo, " to love " ; San Cristoval doodoo, " black " ; doa, " blind." In Oba, New Hebrides, lologi is " inside," and rorogi " deep " ; in Male- kula, roror is " deep," and ror " the afternoon " {gi and r are the noun suffixes in these two languages). The meaning " afternoon " is from the Fox. — Oceanic Comparatives. 5 going-clown (roro) of the sun ; the sun is said to roro in Mota when it sets. Many more examples of this root might be given, but enough has been written to show how it follows the rules given above. The root which means " light and heat " is a difficult one to follow, because the two consonants it contains are interchangeable. It seems best to give mho as the root, though this form appears to have been lost, because the modified forms of raho (aho, ao, ra, rara) are the most widespread. If we take raho as the root, with the meaning of '" light and heat, the day, the sky, clouds," &c., we may expect to find several forms of the full root, because r and h are interchangeable letters, and r may become I, while h becomes s or t, and in the case of such a root it is difficult to say which is the transposed form ; however, we may be guided by the number of modified forms which appear. Laso, the Kayan word for " heat," is a full form of the root, and so too, apparently, are salo (a cloud) in Saa Malaita, perhaps also sato (the sun) in Saa. and warowaro (the moon), in Saa w representing h, as it commonly does. The three last may be considered transposed forms of the root, and thus be classed with the New Guinea (Kerepunu) haro (the smi) and the Maori Haronga (a mythical sky-power who begot the svm and moon). The modified forms we might expect to find by dropping the first con- sonant are aho, aso, alo, aro, and ato. The first four are found. Aho means " the sun " in Florida, and Ysabel (Solomon Islands), and Oba (New He- brides). In Tongan it means " day " ; while ahoaho means '" bright or shin- ing," as the moon on a clear night. The Maori aho means '' radiant hght," and aho-ron is " the moon." Aso in Rotuma and Guadalcanar is " the sun " ; in Samoa, " the day " ; in Efate, " burning." Alo is "' the sun " in New Celebes {mata-alo) and in Santa Maria. Aro is '" the sun " in Hula and Bula'a (New Guinea), " the ^\cy " in San Cristoval ; while the Mala- gasy maso-adro (the sun) is almost identical. We get two forms by dropping the last vowel — the Mota sar (to shine, give heat) and the Aneityum Jah (light) and lav (to shine). Dropping the second syllable gives ra and la. Ra (the smi) in Maori is said to be the son of Haronga and the sister of Marama (the moon), a very exact accomit of the words, except that marama, from the root rama, is quite distinct from raho, and occurs along with it in many forms in many Oceanic languages. Ra in Maori also means " the day " and " the east." In Samoan la means " the sun, daylight ; to be intensely hot." The words, with these meanings, are common in Polynesia. Reduplicating the first syllable, we get rara and lala. In Maori rara means " to spread out on a stage to dry," and hence the stage itself. In Tahiti the word means " to scorch over a fire " ; rarararauri, " smiburnt " {uri = black) ; Fiji rara, " to warm one's-self by a fire " ; Mota rara^ " to dry or warm by the fire " ; rarang, " to dazzle by reflection " ; rara- ngiu, " hard dry ground " ; ma-rang, " barren ground, lazy." In New Guinea the Motu raraia is " to dry in the sun " ; Wedau arara, " to shine " ; arai, " to burn " ; Celebes rarang, " to dry." The Florida ma-rara means " light " ; Mota ma-rarara, " transparent, translucent " ; Malay arang means " charcoal." Samoan ma-lala is " charcoal " ; Tongan lala, " to broil " ; ma-lala, " charcoal " ; Kayan lala, " to wither " ; Wedau, New Guinea, lalai, " light " ; Mahaga, Ysabel, lalaha, " light " ; New Celebes lalav, " scorch " ; Mota lalav, " scorch, burn " ; lawa, " blaze or flame ; to be red, brilliant in colour." 6 Transactions. By dropping botli consonants we get ao, the Maori " day, dawn, become light, cloud " ; Tahitian " day, bright clouds, the bright land of heaven." In Mangareva we get a. meaning " sun," where remarkably little remains of raho I Unusual forms, such as elo (" sun " in the New Hebrides), loa {" sun " in Mota, " cloud " in San Cristoval), have not been referred to. Perhaps it may be allowed to make two conjectures in conclusion. Metro means in Mota " famine " : may this be ma-aro, and mean " a time of sun without rain, when the ground becomes hard and dry " (Hawaiian mala, " to dry up as water, to wither as a tree " ; Mangaia ynaro, " hard and dry " ; Mangareva maro, " hard ") ? Mr. Elsdon Best gives the Maori tciu maro as " a year in which there are no crops." The word tataro in Mota means " a prayer." Dr. Codrington writes thus of it : " The tataro of the Banks Islands, which may be called ' a prayer,' is strictly an invocation of the dead, and is, no doubt, so called because the form begins with the word tataro, which certainly is the 'ataw of San Cristoval — that is, ' a ghost of power.' The Banks-Islanders are clear that tataro is properly made only to the dead, yet the spirits {vui, Qat and Marawa) are addressed in the same way." Ataro means " a god " in San Cristoval {tidalo in Florida, tidatho Ysabel, tida^o Guadalcanar). " The soul " in Malaita is alxalo. In Samoan tatalo is " to pray " (Tahitian, taro- taro ; Hawaiian, I'aJol-alo ; Tongan, talo-monu, " solicit by actions the favour of the gods," talotalo, " cast lots "). Apparently the meaning of taro was " a spirit or ghost." A man's spirit was perhaps thought to pass to the^ sky ; he was no longer a ta-nun, a living man, but a ta-mate, a dead man, or a ta-taro, an inhabitant of the heavens ; so in Florida he was no longer ti-noni, but ti-dalo. In the same way the soul was called aMlo, just as ata in Samoan means " a spirit " or " the light " ; Tahitian ata, " a cloud, a shadow, a certain prayer " ; Tongan ata, " the air, free, the morning light, a shadow, reflection " ; Maori ata, " early morning, the soul, a re- flected image " ; Motu (Ncav Guinea) vata, " a ghost " ; Mota atai, " soul." If tataro meant originally " the spirits of the dead," it might easily be made to include other inhabitants of the heavens ; or, if it meant " the gods," then, when ancestor-worship grew up, the term would come to include the ancestors of the tribe. The root hara or fora seems to mean " crosswise, lying across." Other full forms of the root are pala, hala, vala, fala. From these we should expect to get ara or ola ; pal, par, &c. ; ba, pa, &c. ; papa, baba, &c. ; and transposed forms such as rapa and lapa. As a matter of fact, all these forms are found. The way in which the meaning becomes modified is quite intelligible : from " crosswise " Ave get such ideas as — an angle, a ladder, tongs, a fence, a barricade, the shoulder, layers or strata in rocks, and hence flat slabs and anything flat, or, with a slightly different advance of meaning, the sloping side of a mountain, or an axe where the blade is not only flat, but is set sideways, crosswise, imlike the adze. With these preliminary remarks, as to the meaning, we may follow the changes of form. In Wedau, New Guinea, bara is " bent " ; barabarana, " a bend or angle " ; barabara, " a shelf, a wall-plate." In San Cristoval " a fence " is bara ; in Saa Malaita it is para ; while para^a is " the side." The Fiji baravi means " the sea-coast, the side of an island or mountain " ; Maori para-hi, " a steep slope or acclivity." The Mota parapara is " an axe," a recent use of the word, according to Dr. Codrington. The Formosa parai Fox. — Oceanic Comparatives. 7 means " to fence " ; the Malay parai " to go in zigzags, as a ship tacking." An island in the Banks Group is called Ure-parapara, " the island of steep slopes " : the sea has entered the crater, the steep sides of which give the island its name. The Malay parang is " a chopper or chopping-knife," or to cut with one ; and this is the Maori para, " to fell trees or cut down bush." In Mota, para also means " to go off at an angle " ; sus para is "to crouch aside." Pala means in Mota " to set stick across stick, to set across, wattle " ; pala ta vava, " to strangle a man by pressing a stick across his throat " ; i-pala, " tongs " ; palapala, " scissors " (a recent word). In Florida pala- pala is " a ladder." In Malay palang is " a cross-bar or transverse beam." In Santa Cruz pala-po is " lightning " {po meaning " downwards " and also '■ red "). In Tonga palaa means " a piece of a reed fence " ; while in Samoa paWau is " a wooden fence." In Mahaga Bugotu babala is " crosswise " ; gai babala, " across." Vala means in Mota " the fence of small stones round an oven." In Madagascar vala is " a wooden fence or partition." The Efate (New Hebrides) vala means " a ship's yards," because set crosswise ; while falafala is " a ladder," which is made by fastening cross-sticks to a tree. Vala in Florida means " the shoulder " ; varat in Mota " the purlin of a house." Leaving now the full root, of which many more examples might be given, we come to ara and ala. In Mota ara means " to keep off," while ge-ara is " a fence." The Saa Malaita ala means " the shoulder." The Maori arai means " a veil, screen, or curtain ; to block up " ; Mangaian arai, " to ward off " ; Tahitian ami, " to interpose, obstruct " ; Hawaiian alai, " to obstruct, to block up a door or passage by sitting in it, to form a circle round a person for defence, to defend." The Torres pi ala is " a fence round a garden." By dropping the final vowel we get par and pal. Par means in Mota ^' to slice, cut," as in Par mal, the name given to a class of secret societies the members of which were wont to par sTinal or youni cocoanut and drink the milk in common, after which they were accounted brethren. Pal in New Britain means " a room " (just as niu in Mota means either " par- tition " or " room ") ; in Duke of York Island, " an outhouse " ; in Ralu- ana (New Guinea), " a house." Dropping the second syllable we get pa and ha, exceedingly common and important forms. A few examples must suffice. In Fiji hai means " to fence round a town or garden," while ha is " a fish-fence." In Maori pa means " to block up, obstruct ; a fort or stockade, a weir for catching eels, a barricade ; to protect " : Samoan, pa, " a wall " : Tahitian, pa, " a fence or hedge " : Hawaiian, pa, " hedge or fence in ; the wall of a town " : Paumotu, pa, " a rampart or bulwark." The reduplication of this gives us papa and haha. In Malagasy haha is " a wall or fence in fortification " ; Formosa, habas, " an earthen dam " ; Tahitian, papani, " to block up " ; Mota, paparis, " wall of a house " ; Maori, papa, " to close up or fasten ; the layers or strata of rocks." It is from this last that the idea of a slab may perhaps be derived, and so papa or haha commonly means " a slab, board, anything flat." In Wedau, New Guinea, haha means " slab, side of big canoe " ; habai, " to build up with slabs " ; hahana, " canoe built with timbers " ; Maori, papa, " any- thing broad or flat— a slab, board, door, or shutter " ; Samoan, papa, *' board, floor - mat " ; Tahitian, papa, " a board, seat, the shoulder - blade " ; Mangareva, papa, " foundation " ; Motu, New Guinea, papapapa, 8 Transactions. " flat rock " ; Celebes, papang, " a board " ; Malay, papan, " a plank or board " ; San Cristoval, paparagan, " surf-board " ; Malaita, haba, *' surf- board." Papa means also " the eartli " in Maori, and no doubt the Maoris conceived of the eai*th as flat, as our own forefathers did ; this word, how- ever, may be from a root meaning " soil." Taking last the transposed forms rapa and lapa, we get the Maori rapa- rafa, meaning " the flat part of the foot " ; Hawaiian lapa, " a ridge of land between two ravines, steep side of a ravine, having a flat or square side " ; Samoan lapa, " flat " ; Mangareva raparapa, " flat " ; Paumotu rapa, " flat blade of paddle " ; Motu, New Guinea, ilapa, " a sword " ; Mota irav, " a board, slab of wood in canoe or house " ; lapwai, " the flat of a blade, tail of eel." These roots are merely given as examples of the working-out of certain principles of comparison. Other roots might be easily given from which a still larger number of words are derived. But the following of such principles as those given above should make comparisons at once easier to obtain and more likely to be correct. Confusion is especially likely to arise when the first syllable only re- mains, or where it has been reduplicated. For example, the Maori ta has many meanings, because it is derived from a number of difierent roots. Papa may be derived from patu (a stone or rock), para (across), para (sedi- ment, dirt, &c.) ; rara from rana, raho, &c. ; roro from roto, rongo, &c. If comparisons are to be sound, they should always have regard to the root-form and its meaning. The study of the Oceanic languages should throw more light on the general problem of language than the study of the Aryan family or the Semitic, because the problems to be solved are less complicated, owing to the fact that the peoples have been living isolated for so long, and have been unaffected by civilisation. When the Oceanic family has been care- fully studied, comparisons may be made with Aryan and Semitic languages. Apparently there were true Aryan and Semitic words in the original Oceanic language. Art. IJ.—List of Becent Shells found Fossil in New Zealand. By Henry Suter. Communicated by Dr. Chilton. [Read before the Philosophical Institute of Canterbury, Zrd November, 1909.] During my recent study of the New Zealand Mollusca I made a list of species which have been recorded as fossil, and it may be of interest to Lave it published. P. stands for Pliocene, M. for Miocene, 0. for the Oamaru Series. The latter formation was considered by Zittel to belong to the Oli- gocene or Upper Eocene, by Hutton to the Oligocene, wliilst Professor SuTER. — List of Recent Shells found Fossil in New Zealand. S J. Park classed it under the Miocene. Tate, Harris, and Von Ihering, however, consider it to belong to the Eocene. 1. Acanthochites zelandicus, Q. & G. P. 2. Chiton p?llisserpentis, Q. & G. P. 3. Acmcea dcedala, Suter. P. 4. Scissurella rubiginosa, Hutton. P. 5. mantelli. Woodward. P. 6. Haliotis austral is, Gm. P. 7. iris, Martyn. M. 8. Emarginula striatula, Q. & G. P., M. 9. Suhemarginula intermedia, Reeve. P. 10. parmophoidea, Q. & G. P. 11. Fissuridea ynoniUfera, Hutton. P. 12. Trochus chathamensis, Hutton. P. 13. tiaratus, Q. & G. P. 14. viridis, Gm. P. 15. Monodonta cethiops, Gm. P. 16. corrosa, A. Adams. P. 17. lugubris, Gm. P. 18. Cantharidus pupillus, Hutton. P. 19. purpuratus, Martyn. P. [ 20. sanguineus. Gray. P. 21. ten hrosus, A. Adams. P., M., 0. 22. Monilea egena, Gould. P. 23. CaUiostoma pellucidum, Valenciennes. P., M. 24. punctulatmn, Martyn, P., M. 25. selectum, Chemnitz. P. 26. spectabile, A. Adams. M., 0. 27. Lissospira corulum, Hutton. P. 28. Turbo smaragdus, Martyn, P, 29. granosus, Martyn, P,, M. 30. Leptothyra fluctuata, Hutton. P. 31. Astrcea heliotropium, Martyn. P. 32. Ethalia zelandica, Hombr. & Jacq. P., M. 33. Rissoa {s. str.) impressa, Hutton. P. 34. [Cingula) zosterophila, Webster. P. 35. Rissoina {s. str.) rugulosa, Hutton. P. 36. (Zebina) emarginata, Hutton. P. 37. {Eatoniella) olivacea, Hutton. P, 38. Cerithidea bicarinata, Grav. P. 39. Seila terebelloides. Martens. P. 40. Serpulus sipho, Lamarck. P,, M, 41. Stephopoma nucleogranosum, Verco. P. 42. CcBcutn digitulum, Hedlev, P. 43. Turritella rosea, Q. & G.' P., M., 0. 44. pagoda, Reeve. P., M. 45. CarlottcB, Watson. P., M. 46. symmetrica, Hutton. P., M., 0. { = kanieriensis, Harris.) 47. Struthiolaria papulosa, Martyn. P., M., 0, 48. vermis, Martyn. P., M. 49. vermis tricarinata, Lesson. P. 10 Transactions. 50. Xenophora corrugata, Reeve. P., M. {= neozelanica, Suter.) 51. Calyftrcea scutum, Lesson. P., M. 52. alta, Hiitton. P., M. 53. maculata, Q. & G. P., M., 0. ( = calyptrceformis of authors, noii Lamarck.) 54. Crefidula crepidula, L. P., M., 0. 55. costata, Sowerbv. P., M. 56. Natica zelamUca, Q. & G. P.. M., 0. 57. australis, Hutton. P. 58. PoUnices ampMalus, Watson. P. 59. AmpuUina undulata, Hutton. P. 60. Trichotropis clathrata, Sowerby. P. 61. Trivia australis, Lamarck. P. 62. Cymatixmi spengleri, Chemnitz. P., M., 0. 63. Phalium achatinum pyrum, Lamarck. P. 64. Epitonium zelebori, Dunker. P., M. 65. Turbonilla zealandica, Hutton. P. 66. Odostomia {s. str.) bembix, Suter. P. 67. {PyrguUna) rugata, Hutton. P., M. 68. Eulima tnadioeUi, Hutton. P. 69. Megalatractus maximus, Tryon. P. 70. Fusinus spiralis, A. Adams. P., M. 71. Latirus huttoni, Suter. P. 72. Vexillum rubiginosum, Hutton. P. 73. planatum, Hutton. P. 74. biconicum, Murdoch and Suter. P. 75. marginatum, Hutton. P. 76. Siphonalia nodosa, Martyn. P., M., 0. 77. caudata, Q. & G. M. 78. dilatata, Q. & G. P., M. 79. mandarina, Duclos. P., M., 0. 80. Euthria linea, Martyn. P., M. 81. linea traversi, Hutton. P. 82. littorinoides. Reeve. P. 83. striata, Hutton. P. 84. Cominella maculata, Martyn. P., M. 85. maculosa, Martyn. P. 86. nassoides. Reeve. P., M. 87. zealandice, Reeve. P. 88. lurida, PliiUppi. P. 89. virgata, H. and A. Adams. P. 90. huttoni, Kobelt. P., M. 91. costata, Q. & G. var. P. 92. Murex octogomis, Q. & G.. P. 93. octogonus umbilicatus. T. Woods. P. 94. octogonus espinosus, Hutton. P. 95. zelandicus, Q. & G. P., M. 96. angasi, Crosse. P. 97. Trophon a)id)iguus, Philippi. P. 98. rugosus, Q. & G. P. 99. cheesemani, Hutton. P. 100. corticatus. Hutton. P. SuTER. — List oj Recent Shells found Fossil in Neiv Zealand. 11 101. Trophon flehejus, Hutton. P. 102. honneti^ Cossmami. P. 103. Thais succincta, Martyn, P. 104. Admete trailli, Hutton. P. 105. Mitrella choava, Reeve. P. 106. Alcira transitans, Murdoch. P. 107. varians, Hutton. P. 108. Fulguraria arabica, Martyn. P., M., 0. 109. . arabica clongata, Swainson. P., M., 110. gracilis, Swainson. P., M. 111. Ancilla australis, Sowerby. P., M., 0. 112. australis pyramidalis, Ree^•e. P. 113. depressa, Sowerby. P., M. 114. mucronata, Sowerby. P. 115. Marginella albescens, Hutton. M. 116. Drillia novcB-zelandice, Reeve. P. 117. Icevis, Hutton. P. 118. trailli, Hutton. M. 119. Mitromorpha striata, Hutton. P., M 120. Bathijtoma albula, Hutton. P., M. 121. cheesemani, Hutton. P. 122. nodilirata, Murdoch and Suter. 123. Mangilia dictyota, Hutton. P. 124. protensa, Hutton. P. 125. sinclairi, E. A. Smith. 126. Daphnella cancellata, Hutton. 127. Terebra tristis, Deshayes. P. 128. Pupa alba, Hutton. P. 129. Tornatina pachys, Watson. 130. Volvulella reflexa, Hutton. 131. Cylichnella striata, Hutton. 132. Amphibola crenata, Martyn. 133. Endodonta coma, Gray. P. 134. Dentaliuni nanum, Hutton. 135. opacum, Sowerby. P., M. ( = conicum, Hutton.) 136. Dentaliuni ecostatum, T. W. Kirk. P., M. 137. Nucula nitidula, A. Adams. P., M. 138. Leda bellula, A. Adams. P. 139. fastidiosa, A. Adams. 140. Malletia australis, Q. & G. 141. Poroleda lanceolata, Hutton. 142. Anomia huttoni, Suter, n. sp. P., M., 0. { = alectus, Hutton, non Gray.) 143. Anomia undata, Hutton. P., M., 0. { = cytcBum, Hutton, non Gray.) 144. Anomia walteri. Hector. P. 145. Placimanomia zelandica, Gray. P., M- { = ione, Gray.) 146. Area decussata, Sowerby. P., M., 0. 147. Glyeymeris laticostata, Q. & G. P., M., 0. 148. velutina, Suter. P., M. 149. Mytilus canaliculus, Martyn 0. P. P. P. M. P., M. P. P. P., M. P., M. P. P., M. 3^2 Transactions. 150. Mytilus magellanicus, Lamarck. P., M., 0. 151. Modiolus australis, Gray. P., M. 152. Modiolaria impacta, Hermann. P. 153. Pecten medius, Lamarck. P., 0. 154. radiatus, Hutton. P., M. 155. zelandicB, Gray. P., M. 156. convexus, Q. & G. P., M, 157. Lima lima, L. P. 158. angulata, Sowerby. P. 159. hullata. Born. P., M., 0. 160. Ostrea angasi, Sowerby. P., M., 0. 161. hyotis, L. P. 162. corrugata, Hutton. P., M. 163. Atrina zelandica, Gray. P., M., 0. 164. Crassatellites ohesus, A. Adams. M. 165. Cardita calyculata, L. P. 166. Venericardia australis, Lamarck, P., M, 167. difficilis, Deshayes. P., M. 168. zelandica, Deshayes. P. 169. Loripes concinna, Hutton. P., M, 170. Divaricella cumingi, Adams and Angas. P., M., 0. 171. Diplodonta zelandica. Gray. P., M. 172. glohularis, Lamarck. P, 173. Erycina parva, Deshayes, P. 174. Diplodon menziesi aucMandicus, Gray. P. 175. Tellina eugonia, Suter. P., M. { = angulata, Hutton, non Gmelin.) 176. Tellina disculus, Deshayes. P. 177. alha, Q. & G. P., M. 178. glahrella, Deshayes. P. 179. Leptomya lintea, Hutton. P. 180. Mesodesma suhtriangulatum, Gray. P., M. 181. australe, Gm. P., M. 182. Mactra scalpellmn, Reeve. P. 183. discors. Gray. P., M. 184. elongata, Q. & G. P., M. 185. ovata. Gray. P. 186. rudis, Hutton. P. 187. Spisula ordinaria, E. A. Smith. P. 188. cequilateralis, Deshayes. P. 189. Zcnafia acinaces, Q. & G. P., M. 190. Dosinia lambata, Goukl. P., M. 191. anus, PhiUppi. P. 192. suhrosea, Gray. P., M. 193. gretji, Zittel. ' P., M. 194. Macrocallista muUistriata, Sowerby. P., M., 0. 195. Cytherea oblonga, Hanley. P., M. 196. subsulcota, Suter. P. 197. Chione stutchhiryi. Gray. P., M., 0. 198. yatei, Gray. P. 199. crassa, Q. & G. P., M. 200. vwsodesma, Q. & G. P., M. 201. Paphia intermedia, Q, & G. P., M. SuTER. — List of Recent Shells found Fossil in New Zealand. 13 202. Protocardia pulchella, Gray, P., M. 203. Psammohin lineolata. Gray. P., M., 0. 204. stangen, Gray. P., M. 205. Soletellina nitida, Gray. P., M. 206. Corhula macilenta, Hutton. P. 207. zelandica, Q. & G. P. 208. Saxicava arctica, L. P. 209. Panopea zelandica, Q. & G. P., M. 210. Pholadidea spathulata, Sowerby. P. 211. Barnea similis, Gray. P. 212. Thracia vitrea, Hutton. P., M, 213. Cochlodesma angasi, Crosse and Fischer. P. 214. Myodora antipodum, E. A. Smith. P. 215. boltoni, E. A. Smith. P. 216. novcB-zealandice, E. A. Smith. P. 217. striata, Q. & G. P. 218. suhrostrata, E. A. Smith. P., M. 219. Chamostrea albida, Lamarck. P.. M. Art. III. — Botanical Notes made on a Journey across the Tararuas* By Bernard Cracroft Aston, F.I.C, F.C.S. \^Read before the Wellington Philosophical Society, \st September, 1909.] The portion of the Tararua Range treated of in this narrative may be viewed from AVellington, stretching beyond the Upper Hutt Valley. At the southern end is seen the rounded outline of Mount Marchant (3,406 ft.), followed, more to the north, by three much lower conical-topped hills ;. then a conical mountain stands out nearer the beholder than the conical hills, and on a level with Mount Marchant. The Quoin (3,905 ft.), the * Some of the information contained in this account is drawn from experience acquired on trips other than those herein described. Chronologically enumerated, the author's acquaintance with these mountains is derived from — (1) A three-days trip to Mount Holdsworth with Professor Easterfield. D.'. L. Cockayne, and^Ii'. A. H. Cockayne. in January, 1906 ; (2) a three-days solitary ramble on Mount Dennan and in the Otaki Gorge, in December, 1906 ; (3) a three-days ascent of Mount Hector from Otaki, in January, 1907, with Messrs. D. Petrie, A. Hamilton. J. S. Tennant, W. C. Davies, and Alfred Jones ; (4) a three-days journey on ^loimt Holdsworth. in March, 1907, with Messrs. G. de S. Baylis and Turners (two) ; (.5) three days on Mount Holdsworth with Messrs. D. Petrie and J. S. Tennant, in January, 1908 : (6) the crossing of the range here described ; (7) a two-days trip up tlie Hutt Gorge with Mr. John Ohilwell, in November, 1908 ; (8) a partial ascent of Mount Dennan with Messrs. C. O'Connor and Simmonds, at Easter, 1909 ; (9) an ascent of the Quoin, via the ridge, in .June, 1909, with Mr. E. Phillips Turner. Since writing this paper the author, with Mr. W. H. Field, ^I.P., and Mr. L. Phillips, of Kaitoke. on 12th February. 1910, crossed from Kaitoke to Otaki Gorge settlement m twenty-foui- hours actual walking-time, the journey occupying, including the time taken for sleep, only thirty-six hours. The Kaitoke ridge track was followed, the route otherwise being as described above. The high levels were obscured by mist, which, however, occasionally lifted. Abundance of water was found, as before. 14 Transactions. southern termination of a high range leading to Mount Hector, is not dis- cernible in the outline of hills, being overtopped and rendered invisible by Mount Alpha (4,466 ft.). Finally, after a fairly level stretch of country, there succeed a few ragged peaks, near which is the remarkable razorback ridge (to be jDresently described) overshadowed by Mount Hector (5,014 ft.), the highest peak which can be seen. Descending on the Otaki side there are some rounded summits (4,700 ft.), and at a much lower elevation Mount Dennan (4,010 ft.). Below this is a saucer-shaped depression (" Table Top ") rising on the Otaki side to a rounded knob, the last peak silhouetted against the sky. The \\Titer cannot find any record of a collector or naturalist having crossed the range from Kaitoke to Otaki. Indeed, even Mount Hector would appear not to have been botanically explored until December, 1906 ',{see Petrie, " Account of a Visit to Mount Hector " : Trans. N.Z. Inst., 1907, p. 289), when the writer made his first collection there. Leaving Wellington by the 7 a.m. train on Boxing Day, 1907, Kaitoke is reached about 9 a.m. The day is fine — a light breeze from the north- east, blue sky with patches of cloud, and a barometer of 30-4 in,, giving presage of fair weather for the venture. The party consists of Mr. Alfred Jones (an expert bushman), W. B. Aston, and the writer. The swags include 5 lb. boiled beef, 3 lb. ham, 5 lb. ship-biscuits, a small loaf, 2 lb. oatmeal, 2 lb. sugar, | lb. butter, a little tea, chocolate, and raisins, col- lecting-boxes, drying-papers, a blanket each, and a tent. The tent is worthy of a brief description. It weighs under 4 lb. — dimensions 5| ft. by 1\ ft. — and includes a flexible wire rope used instead of a ridge-pole. One end of the rope is fixed to a tree, and the other is threaded through the apex of the tent-roof and fixed to another tree. All that now remains is to fasten the guy-ropes, made of light fishing-line, to stumps, &c., near the ground, and peg down the sides. The advantage of having a light and easily pitched tent such as this in climbing-expeditions, where everything has to be carried on one's back, can hardly be overestimated. The tent is made by Messrs. Hutcheson, Wilson, and Co., Jervois Quay, and is similar to those supplied to the Tourist Department for alpine climbers, with the exception that it has no floor. The material is that of which the fine top- sails of yachts are made, technically known as japarra — an Egyptian fabric. At least three routes are open to the explorer of the Tararuas from Kaitoke. The Mount Marchant track involves climbing the bare ridge connecting the Rimutakas with the Tararua Range, and following the spur over Mount Marchant, thence taking a large sweep to the north-east over many lesser tops on the high range by a track marked on the map " well blazed " to Mount Omega (3,669 ft.), between which and Mount Alpha (4,466 ft.) there remains a deep valley to be crossed before attaining the liigh leading range of which Mount Hector is the culminating point. The writer is informed that it is not necessary to climb to the top of Mount Marchant, but that the spur may be attained on the farther side by a passage through the bush on the north-east flank of the mountain. The second and third routes are the same with the difference that the first few miles is over a spur — four hours' walk — or through the river gorge — nine and a half hours' walk — at the traveller's discretion, to the junction of the Main Hutt with the Lesser Hutt River. The spur route is always available, and is remarkably easy travelling, through dead standing bush which was swept by the fires of last year and completely denuded of under- Aston. — Botanical Notes made on a Journey across tJie Tararuas. 15 scrub. One should take the hill at the back of Phillips's hut (650 ft.), near the mouth of the Pakuratahi Gorge, and, steering due magnetic north, two and a half hours' walk on the ridge brings one to the summit of the hill (2,000 ft.), where Mount Marchant looms largely ahead, and the lower slopes of the Quoin are seen on the left in the angle formed by the junction of the rivers. The Lesser Hutt Gorge is from this aspect visible for a consider- able distance. Descending the hill, still through burnt standing timber, another one and a half hours' walk should bring one to the base of the Quoin. The gorge route, on the other hand, takes at least nine hours' laborious- walking, the times taken on the two occasions the AVTiter traversed the route being nine hours and a half and nine hours and a quarter from Kai- toke to the junction ; and it is not accessible if the river is in flood. The- advantages of going this way are the beautiful scenery, the impossibility of mistaking the way, and the facility for studying the various forms of life met with in the forests of the banks and in the unfished waters of the rivers. Ch."ossing, to the north of the Kaitoke Station, some flat country whera agriculture is being practised, judging by the Californian thistle, black- berry, and gorse which impeded progress, the Pakuratahi Gorge is soon reached, and little time is lost in finding the track, which leads off from behind a blue cliff-face on the south side of the river. Numerous shapely^ ribbonwood-trees {Plagianthus hetulinus), which always attain their finest growth on silty alluvial soil, are observed growing on the flats. The track is excellent, and leads through a very mixed forest, of Avhich the plants noted in the appended list are observed. After a mile or so of this track the forest undergoes a distinct change- Red-beech {Fagus jusca) is now the predominant groAvth — in fact, it is- almost the only tree-growth, being supplemented only to a slight extent by miro {Podocarpus jerrugineus). The ujiderscrub consists of Coprosmcn Colensoi, Griselinia littoralis. Leucopogon fasciculatus, Coprosma grandi- folia, Pseudopanax crassifolimn, Myrsine saNcina, Panax arboreum, Co- prosma fcetidissima, Myrtus pedunculata, and Metrosideros florida, while- the forest-floor is covered with Gahnia, Gleichenia Cunningkamii (umbrella- fern), and moss. Here and there on stumps are patches of the beautiful' Earina mucronata, the blue-berried Dianella intermedia, and a variety of ferns, mostly kidney-ferns {Trichomanes reniforme). The tree-trunks are covered with climbing ratas {Metrosideros hypericifolia and M. Colensoi),. epiphytic growths, filmy ferns, polypodies, asteliads, Tmesipteris, and orchids^ {Earina mucronata and E. suaveolens). The path wanders for some distance through this light open forest, and' then descends suddenly to the junction of the Pakuratahi and Hutt Rivers. Here the steep banks are sprinkled with bright flowering shrubs and herbs. Prominent are Carmichaelia odorata, with masses of sweetly scented purple- blue flowers and graceful pendulous branches, while Veronica catarractce^ Gnaphalium Keriense, Oxalis magellanica, Pratia angulata, and Libertia ixioides brighten the steep mossy banks with their large white flowers. The forest is thicker here, and the spaces are well filled with scrub ancj small trees. Rimu and kamahi {Weinmannia) are the prevailing trees^ with a shrubbery of Fuchsia, Pittosporum, Veronica salici folia, Schefftera,. and Coprosma ; and along the banks the free-flowering Olearia nitida, toi- toi {Arundo conspicua), and wood-grass {Microlcena avenacea) are plentiful, and a few patches of snow-grass {Danthonia Cunninghamii). 16 Transactions. A walk of an hour and a half brings one from the Kaitoke Station to this charming spot, where but a couple of years ago was pitched a survey- camp, by the work of whose vanished tenants one wishing to advance into the wilds may largely profit. Crossing the Pakuratahi, we soon leave all vestige of a track behind and plunge up the Hutt River. Here and there blazes on the trees are met with, and occasionally one comes across a track cut over the blufi forming one of the walls of some impassable gorge between which the waters rush as through a mill-sluice. The river bends with monotonous frequency, which necessitates incessant crossing to take advantage of the shingle -bank or rocky ledge on the opposite side, in order to gain a few chains advance ; thus, sometimes wading up to one's middle, scrambling over slippery rocks, hanging on by bough, tussock, or pendant kiekie {Freycinetia), always striving to keep the food and blankets, strapped shoulder-high, dry, slow progress is made. Anon one of the party slips from the rock into some deep pool, and the water surges round the knapsack ; but the biscuits, contained in a tin case, are safe, and the victim slowly and laboriously draws himself out of the swift current, and drains himself on the bank. Occasionally the spirit of sport asserts itself, and a halt is called to watch some monster of a trout or eel, the solitary inhabitant of a deep pool, lazily disporting himself. The rock scenery of the gorges is truly grand. Cut into fantastic shapes by the current when in flood, here and there a mass of rock which has survived the eroding force of the river stands out in bold relief, often with some narrow defile for a background, through which the river rushes with deafening surge. Pockets and pot-holes in the rock hold a lodgment of silty soil, supporting many beautiful plants. Prominent is Carmichaelia odorata, Veronica catarractcB (well named), MicrolcBna avenacea, Pratia angu- lata, Hijdwcotyle sp., Coriaria ruscifolia, Gnaphaliuni Keriense, sometimes the rare Calceolaria repens, and similar plants requiring a moist, well- drained alluvial soil. Feathered friends are not wanting to break the stillness of the bush. Once a pair of blue mountain-duck were startled from the bank, and swam leisurely down-stream, uttering expostulatory quacks against the intruders of their fastness. The quaint little rifleman is observed in numbers, running up the sides of the trees and snapping up many a toothsome morsel with its upwardly inclined bill, whistling from time to time a cheer- ful twit. The tui's musical note is often heard, contrasting strongly with the long-tailed cuckoo's screechy pipe. Fantails flutter here and there, and occasionally a handsome pigeon laboriously wings its musical flight from tree to tree. Presently the gorge opens ou,t, and light floods the valley. We are nearing the confluence of the Hutt and the Lesser Hutt. Scrambling down a, steep face, a fine river - beach is reached at 6.30 p.m. Camp is soon pitched, and a hearty meal enjoyed. This camp is about 80U ft. altitude — not greatly different from that of Kaitoke. A visit to this camp in November, 1908, when the faint odour of the rangiora {Brachyglottis repanda) was in the air, and the spring flowers had shaken out their petals to the full, showed us many whiteheads, tomtits, riflemen, pied fantails, grey warblers, a pair of grey duck, flocks of chaf- finches, many pigeons, kaka, parrakeets, tuis, long-tailed cuckoos ; and m the still hour of the early dawn a weka visited the tent, was disturbed, and stalked up the valley, waking the echoes with its vibrant call. Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLll. Pl. 1. Bluffs aud Beeches on tlie Hutt Eivev. Confluence Camp, junction of the Main and Lesser Hutt Kivers, foot of Quoin. BOTANY OF THE TARARUAS.— Aston. Face p. 10. B. C, Aston, photo. Trans. N.Z. Inst.. Vol. XLII. Pl. II. Efl'ecte of wiud-actiou on Quoiu top, cutting vegetation [Danthonia llaouhi, Dracoph iillum longifoUum, Celmisia spectabilis, Pimclia Gnidia, Drapctes Dieffenbachii, Scnecio lagopus) into laues. r':jao4'.%^,,^----.'' Scrub on Quoin top, consisting ot Coprosma cuiieata, C. fotiiUsfiima, Oharhi lacuniisa, O. Colensoi, Axtelia nervosa, Seaecio eleagnifoJiun, Danthouia Maoulii (Snowgrass.) BOTANY OF THE TARARUAS.— Aston. B. C. Aston, photo. Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLII. Pl. Ill Mount Alpha and ridge leading from Quoin top. Fagiis Menziesii trees deeply covered with lichens and mosses to topmost bough. BOTANY OF THE TAEARUAS.— Aston. B. C. Aston, photo. Trans. N.Z. Inst.. Vol. XLIl Pl. IV. •^ist* 3807 •V ^xi'-'' Mount Hector Range from Quoin top, with Mouat Hector in the distance. mi^^^' ■•■#" •yvv . ■^j Aatelia utrvosa Ijeds 011 summit of Quoin. The darker yiatches are composed of Coprosma cimeata and the lighter of Dracophijlhun and Danthonia Raoulii (Snowgrass). BOTANY OF THE TAKAliUAS.— Aston. B. G. Aston, photo. Trans. N.Z. Inst.. Vol. XLII. Pl. V. J£ >. "a o t/: 'Y* x r^ z :^ o s H (« 3 <^ H 1 IS 1 +.» o t3 ^^3 « 5 <1 "Si 0? <1 ■b ^ H .o a^ j^ H 73 a ^ Mh o O r. J^ 3 ;^ o ^ cS *3 fl _ce ^ ^ z ^ o cS H CO a < ^n "5 ' fl CO o3 <^ P5 '3 <^ P3 ■^ -^ w H r^ a W ^ ffi 0) H N s fe OJ O ^ ""^ >^ ■i* ^ -S <1 o H 5< O "^ PQ Trans. N.Z. Inst. Vol. XL! I Pl. VII -3 ' ' A X v^ U4 01; a X e £ 01 M o J3 o .a o o o s o o H H H O H O pq Aston, — Botanical Notes made on a Journey across the Tararuas. 17 A list of plants seen from the junction of the Pakuratahi and Hutt Rivers to the camp is given below : Pittosporum eugenioides, P. tenuifolium, Hoheria populnea, Oxalis magellanica, Coriaria ruscifolia, Carmichaelia odo- rata, Weinmannia racemosa, Gunnera monoica, Myrtus obcordata, Fuchsia excorticata, Hydrocotyle elongata, Schefflera digilata, Griselinia littoralis, Co- prosma robusta, Lagenphora Forsteri, Olearia nitida, Gnaphalium Keriense, Helichrysum glomeratum, Senecio latijolius, S. lagopus, S. Kirkii, Pratia angulata, Calceolaria repens, Veronica catarractce, V. salicifolia, Ourisia, Piper excelsum, Laurelia novce-zealandice, Beilschmiedia tawa, Knightia excelsa, Fagus Menziesii, Podocarpus jerrugineus, Dacrydium cupressinum, Cory- santhes, Dendrohium Cunninghamii, Thelymitra sp., Earina autumnalis, Cordyline Banksii, Dianella intermedia, Danthonia Cunninghamii, D. semi- annularis, Deyeuxia, Hymenophyllum multifidum, Asplenium flaccidum, Adi- antum affine, Lomaria alpina, L. vulcanica, L. Patersoni, Microlcena avenacea. An early start is made next morning, with fair weather and a rising barometer. At 5 a.m. the Lesser Hutt River is crossed, and the ascent of the steep leading spur to the Quoin is begun. But few supplejacks — the bane of the bushman — impede the way. The forest is chiefly kamahi, with beech, rimu, and a little totara and rata. The forest-floor is carpeted with umbrella {Gleichenia Cunninghamii) and kidney {Trichomanes reni- forme) fern. At 1,100 ft. Senecio Kirkii appears as a plentiful underscrub ; at 1,400 ft. totara is more plentiful, and the floor is a perfect carpet of kidney-fern, with clumps of Astelia nervosa dotted through it. The kamahi {Weinmannia racemosa) is still the predominating tree; occasionally a miro {Podocarpus jerrugineus) is seen, its bright-red fruit presently to afford a rich feast for the pigeons. The epiphytic orchids Earina mucronata and E. suaveolens are still plentiful, and Gastrodia Cunninghamii, the tall black- and-white flowered terrestrial orchid, with the large tuberous roots beloved •of pigs, is met with. The ferns Lomaria discolor and L. alpina cover the ground in places. Here and there a spray of pure-white flowers shows where the beautiful little nohi {Enargia parviflora) wastes its sweetness on th ■ desert-air. The underscrub is chiefly Coprosma joetidissima, C. lucida, and Myrsine salicina. At 1,600 ft. the forest is more open. Thore is a greater preponder- ance of light scrub, Coprosma grandijolia, C. fcetidissima, and C. Colensoi. Clumps of Uncinia appear. At 1,700 ft. snow-grass is plentiful on the floor of the forest, of which the chief tree is kamahi. Leucopogon fasciculatum and Pseudopanax crassi- jolium are common. At 1,900 ft. Panax simplex becomes common. At 2,100 ft. Fagus fusca, Weinmannia, Senecio Kirkii, Coprosma Colen- soi, Panax arboreum, Myrsine salicina, filmy ferns {Hymenophyllum), and mosses are most conspicuous. At 2,200 ft. the billy is boiled, the water being obtained from a puddle in a hollow. Hanging moss or lichen is now becoming a prominent feature on the trees. In wet places Microlcena avenacea, and in dark places Todea superha (double crape-fern), were plentiful. Deep moss now covers the forest-floor. The trees are Fagus fusca and F. Menziesii, with a sprinkling of kamahi. At 2,300 ft. the arboreal growth is more stunted, and the floor is car- peted with moss, nohi, and filmy fern. An open space here shows the top of the Quoin to be due (magnetic) north ; but the ridge takes a consider- able sweep to the east and back again to the north. This is the only part 18 Transactions. of the ascent where it is possible to go wrong ; but, as one may obtain such, a clear view of the country by climbing one of the stunted beeches, losing the way is a very unlikely contingency. The forest is Fagns Menziesii and totara, wuth a little Fagus fusca. The occurrence of Phormiuni tenax testifies to the open nature of the forest. Lomaria discolor, L. capensis, snow-grass (Danthonia Cunninghamii), and Gleichenia Cunninghamii are abundant. The country here is fairly level, and, viewed from the top of a stvmted tree, shows Fagus Menziesii, with. Dracophyllum longifolium,. with some Fagus fusca and totara, to be the main forest-growth. Occa- sional kamahi, Myrsine salicina, Coprosma Colensoi, and C. foetidissima are present. The totaras are deeply mossed with lichens to the topmost bough. Thence succeeds a wind-exposed slope, with stunted Suttonia divaricata and other scrub breast-high, with Lycopodium and stunted Fagus Men- ziesii and Weinmannia. At 2,500 ft. to 2,600 ft. the beech and totara trees are very gnarled growths, with an underscrvib of Coprosma foetidissima. At 3,000 ft. (12.20 p.m.) the forest is gnarled Fagus Menziesii 40 ft. high, with an underscrub of Coprosma fcetidissima, Panax arboreum, and Suttonia divaricata. Astelia nervosa is common. The broadleaf {Griselinia h'ttoralis) here attains a height of 15-20 ft., being quite a small tree. HymenophyUum multifidum, Todea superha, and moss cover the forest-fioor. Kaka and bell-birds are seen. At 3,100 ft. stunted Fagus Menziesii 14 ft. high at edge of bush, mossed to the topmost bough, forms the dominant growth. The underscrub is Pittosporum rigidmn, Senecio eleagnifoJius, and Coprosma cuneata. 3,150 ft. We are out at last, and breathe the fresh air on the open mountain-side. On the western face there is stunted Fagus Menziesii 3 ft. high, and snow-grass, and then an alpine meadow containing Celmisia spectabiUs (in flower), Carpha alpina, Drosera stenopetala, Caladenia bifolia (in flower), moss, Forstera (in flower), Pentachondra pumila, Pimelia Gnidia (in flower). 3,350 ft. We encounter stunted scrub again on the south side of the spur, chiefly Coprosma cuneata and Dracophyllum longifolium. On the east side the Fagus Menziesii creeps up to within 100 ft. of the top, and affords a grateful shelter from the fierce sun, the beech-trees being about 20 ft. high here. Directly one moves over to the western face the trees are beaten down to a height of 3 ft., making it difficult to force a passage through. 3,600 ft. On the west side of the spur Olearia Colensoi (the mutton- bird scrub) appears in thick shrubberies, broken by snow-grass meadows. Ligusticum dissectum is in full flow^er. Entering the forest on the west side to avoid the mutton-bird scrub, we meet with Olearia alpina, a hand- some &hrub of most characteristic growth, resembling the lancewood (Pseudopanax crassi folium). The floor of the forest is carpeted with filmy ferns and Myrsine nummularia. Good progress is made, and the top of the Quoin (3,900 ft.) is reached at 4 p.m. Although it has taken eleven hours to climb to this height, allowance must be made for the fact that we are cany in g heavy swags, and are not in the best condition. The day has been very hot, and we are new to the route. Moreover, frequent rests for taking notes and observations have been resorted to. Between the summit and the bush-line on the eastern face are a few acres of mountain - meadow cojitaining many beautiful alpine plants. Among the most noticeable are Aciphylla Colensoi, Ligusticum dissectum, AsToy. — Botanical Notes made on a Journey across the Tararuas. 19 Celmisia spectabilis, Raoulia grandiflora, Senecio bellidioides, Phyllachne Colensoi, Euphrasia revoluta, Suttonia nummularia, Gaultheria antipoda, Pimelia Gnidia, Draco phyUum rosmarinifolium, Astelia nervosa, Carpha alpina, Danthonia Raoulii, Ehrharta Colensoi. In the wetter parts are clear pools of good water, surrounded by the interesting cushion-plant Oreobolus pamilio var. pectinatus, mixed with Astelia linearis, Drosera stenopetala, Pentachondra pumila, Forstera (?) Bidwillii, Caladenia hifolia, and Caltha novcB'ZealandicE. A black bird, which may be a huia, is twice seen in the •evening. A fine wild bull seems inclined to dispute possession of the summit with us, but, being left alone, towards sunset, after the manner of bis kind, he makes his way down into the valleys. Long after dark we hoar the distant lowing of his mates. This and the mournful notes of the ruru (morepork) are the only sounds which wake the stillness of our first night on the hilltops. Sunday, 29th December. — -We had witnessed the sinking of the sun into the south-western ocean the previous evening, and were this morning to see it rise from the sea in the opposite direction. An interesting phenomenon accompanied it. Before the edge of the sun appeared above the horizon, one-half of the disc appeared below the horizon-line and nothing above it, the effect being due possibly to reflection from a bank of clouds. After breakfast we start to ascend the northern arete to Mount Alpha, and notice the rare Abrotanella pusilla in flower. The spur we now descend has been burnt on the west side, but on the east side is virgin scrub, merg- ing gradually into forest. The way is fairly easy, though beds of Astelia nervosa occasionally impede us. The vegetation on this ridge is Coprosma cnneata, Olearia lacunosa, and 0. ezcorticata, growing in great profusion ; Phormium tenax (in flower), Gaultheria antipoda, Ligusticum aromaticum, and a stout species of Uncinia ; while the only naturalised plant seen was H ypoehceris radicata in the cattle-tracks. At the lowest point of the arete, oOO ft. below the Quoin-top, Cordyline indivisa, Senecio eleagnifolius, Ole- ■aria nitida, Gaultheria rupestris, Hoheria populnea, Danthonia Raoulii, Ourisia Colensoi are common. At 3,800 ft. we commence the rise to Mount Alpha, and are on the open mountain-side, with no scrub. Senecio Bidivillii (in bud) becomes common, but Ligustieum dissectum is abundant. At 4.000 ft. Gentiana patula (in bud), Celmisia spectabilis, Oreomyrrhis andicola, Dracophyllum rosmarinifolium. and Ligusticum dissectum are abundant. Pipits and fantails are seen. At 4,200 ft. a small mountain-tarn gave us a grateful drink. Celmisia hieracijolia (in flower), Ourisia ccespitosa, Veronica buxifolia (in flower), Drapctes Dieffenbachii (in flower), patches of Raoulia grandiflora, Heli- ■chrysum Leontopodium (in flower), Veronica Astoni, Bulbinella Hookeri, Aciphylla Colensoi (in flower), Epilobium sp. (?), Poa, are the most notice- able plants. On the rocks are many specimens of the vegetable sheep of the Tararuas {Raoulia rubra). At 4,450 ft. by our aneroid we top Mount Alpha, and discover several good mountain-tarns, but no firewood. There is the usual vegetation, comprising most of the species noticed, and one notable addition, Celmisia hieracifolia var. oblonga, a very diminutive variety of a handsome species, and now recorded for the first time in the ISorth Island. Descending Mount Alpha a hundred feet or so, at 4,300 ft. another tarn is passed ; then a climb over an unnamed peak of 4,450 ft. On the other side of this a remarkable instance of wind-action on vegetation is noticed. On a 20 Transactions. gentle slope trending towards the west, the ground - mass of which is angular stones, are lanes of herbaceous plants growing with a regularity which simulates artificial arrangement. The area of this would be about 3 or 4 square chains. There is a space of 6 ft. to 8 ft. between the strips of vegetation, containing angular stones with but little vegetation, save an occasional patch of Raoulia grandiflora, PhyUachne Colerisoi, and Drapetes Dieffenhachii. The vegetation of the lane " hedge " is two species of Dan- thonia (one of which is D. Raoulii), Lignsticum dissecfum, BulhineUa, Phyl- lachne, Cehnisia spectabilis, Dracophyllum, Lignsticum aromaticum, Astelia linearis (in beautiful red fruit). These lanes run in an east-and-west direc- tion. We have been traversing a long stretch of gently rising country, and, passing a tarn, arrive at a point 4,500 ft.. the lowest point betw^een the flat land and the ridge leading to Mount Hector. Patches of Luzula campestris frequently occur, and some stunted Olearia Colensoi, very fine plants of Senccio Bidwillii, snow-grass (Danthonia), and masses of Raoulia rubra on steep rubble slips, are the most noticeable botanical features. We now ascend the remarkable razorbacked ridge. On the north-east face a Danthonia (snow-grass) meadow extends for several hundred feet dowai the slope. Scattered through the snow-grass are Dracophyllwn longi- jolium, Senecio Bidwillii, BulhineUa Hookeri, Aciphylla Colensoi. On the south-west side is a steep shingle or rocky face covered in parts with Raoulia rubra, patches of Ligusticum dissectum, Celmisia hieracifolia, Danthonia Raoulii, and Helichrysum Leontopodium. The ridge is equally steep on either face, and where it changes its aspect in zigzagging the flora also changes : the Danthonia meadow now appears on the left-hand side, facing the north-east, and the rocky slope on the right hand, facing south-west, approximately, showing that the difference in vegetation is due to a climatic and not to an edaphic cause. At 4,700 ft. the " razorback " disappears, giving place to a rounded hill, covered on the south-west slope with a lane formation similar to that previously described, and containing Danthonia, Ligusticum, PhyUachne, and Celmisia spectabilis. At 4,800 ft., where the faces of the ridge again become steeper, are noticed stunted Danthonia a«d BulhineUa on the north-east face, and in- cipient lane formation on the south-west face ; and again at 4,900 ft. is a rocky face on the south-west and Danthonia on the north-east face. A plant we have noticed all the way from Mount Alpha is Veronica Astoni, usually found growing on the top of the ridge. At 5,050 ft. we at length reach the final slope of Mount Hector, and now meet for the first time the gorgeous Ranuncuhis insignis in full bloom, growing on shingle-slips. A mountain-tarn is almost hidden by the tall Danthonia. Helichrysum beUidioides with very large heads and orbicular leaves, Cctula pynthri folia ^ o.vA Ourisia ccespitosa we here collect. At 5,200 ft. by the aneroid, at 3.45 p.m., the summit is reached. Dan- thonia, Aciphylla Colensoi, Ligusticum dissectum, BulhineUa Hookeri, and Veronica Astoni occupy the north-east face, but the south-west aspect is a steep shingle - slope with patches of Raoulia rxibra. Ranunculus insignis, PhyUachne, and Ligusticum dissectum. A glorious view greets the eye from every direction. The Wairarapa Plain is spread out to the east, Kapiti Island and the Otaki beach in the west. Cape Palliser and Palliser Bay can be seen in the south, followed by the Hutt Valley — Wellington Harbour and Tupuaewainuku beyond. To the north the Tararua peaks block the view. Aston. — Botanical Notes made on a Jour) ey across the Tararuas. 21 2 2 Transactions . Commencing the descent, a sharp dip of 400 ft. brings us to a valley where a chain of tarns stretches down the slope. From this point a well- defined arete leans to Mount Dennan. A hill between Mounts Dennan and Hector has its vegetation cut into lanes running south-west and north-east. Just before reaching Mount Dennan, 4,200 ft., the main ridge is broken up into several. The small valleys thus formed aSord good protection to the snow-grass, which flourishes exceedingly. Astelia beds are also inter- mixed with snow-grass and AciphyUum Colensoi. Many of these hollows, with snow-grass leaves in abundance on the ground, would make an ex- cellent camping-ground. We reach our old camp at " Table Top " at 7.15 p.m., and, too tired to pitch tent, merely pull it over us, and sleep soundly through the starry subalpine night. There is little more to tell. The next morning, the fourth since leaving Kaitoke, we dally long on " Table Top," around the camp, collecting speci- mens and taking notes. Here the rare Liparophyllwm Gunmi is plentifully gathered in the habitat originally found by Mr. Petrie. It is late in the forenoon when a start is made for the Forks camp at the junction of the Waiotauru and Otaki Rivers. The descent through the bush to the river is only eventful in our passage through the subalpine scrub {Olearia Colensoi), and over "Dry Camp" (a ridge where all the trees have been blown down, and lie inextricably mixed) — incidents which bring home in a very human manner the feebleness of language, upon occasion, to express one's thoughts. Avoiding all tracks leading to the right, from a fear of entering the dreaded portion of the Otaki Gorge above the Forks camp, we strike the Waiotauru rather farther to the south than we intended. Here we eat our remaining provisions as the dusk rapidly deepens into night. Although only a few more miles remain, they are among the most trying of the trip. The bush track is deeper than our boot-tops in mud, the night is dark, and a stump of candle soon burns out. It is not until 11.30 p.m. that we reach the cottage of Mr. Murraj', at the Gorge Settlement, where, after being mistaken for burglars, we are hospitably sheltered for the night. Plants seen in the Valley of the Pakuratahi, Clematis indivisa, Drimys axillaris, Cardamine hirsuta, Melicytus rami- florus, Pittosporiwi tenuijolium, Stellaria parviflora, Plagianthus betulinus, Aristotelia raceniosa, Elceocarpus dentatus, Coriaria ruscifolia (tree-tutu or tupakihi), Pennantia corymhosa, Carmichaelia odorata, Rubus australis, R. schmidelioides, Carpodetiis serratus, Weinmannia racemosa (towhai), Myrtus pedunculata, Metrosideros ftorida, M. hypcrici folia, M. Colensoi, M. scandens, Epilohium junceum var. macro phyllum {E. erectmn, D.P.), E. pubens, E. rotundijoJium. E. nummularijoUum, Fuchsia excorticata, Panax arboreum, Schefflera digitata, Pseudopanax crassifolium, Coprosma grandiflora, C. lucida, 0. robusta, C. fostidissima, C. Colensoi, C. microcarpa, Olearia Cunning- hamii, Gnaphalium luteo-album, Erecktites prenanthoides, Brachyglottis re- panda. Leucopogon fasciculatus, Myrsine salicina, Olea montana, Parsonsia capsularis, Muehlenbeckia australis, Hedycarya dentata, Beilschmiedia tawa, Knightia excelsa, Loranthus Colensoi, Urtica incisa, Fagus fusca, Podocarpus ferrugineus (miro). P. dacrydioides (kahikatea), Dacrydium cupressinum (rimu), Earina autumnalis, Gahnia setifolia, G. pauciflora, Mierolcena avenacea, Lihertia ixioides, Rhipogonum scandens, Astelia nervosa, Dianella intermedia. Aston. — Botanical Notes made on a Journey across the Tararuas. 25 Freycinetia Banksii, Uncinia austraUs, H.ymenopkyllum polyanthos, H. dila- tatum, H. flabeUatum, H. scabrum, H. suhtilissimum, H. Tunbridgense, H. multi/idum, H. bivalve, Trickomancs venosum, T. reniforme, Cyathca dealbata, C. medullaris, Hemitelia Smithii, Dicksonia squarrosa, Davallia novce-zea- landice, Lindsaya trichomanoides, Pteris scaberula, P. incisa, Lomaria dis- color, L. fluviatilis, L. membranacea, L. lanceolata, L. filiformis, Asplenium fak-atum, A. bulbiferum, A. obtusatum, A. capense, A. Richardi, Nephrodiuni glabellum, Polypodium pennigerum, P. Billardieri, P. punctatum, P. aus- trale, P. serpens, Gleichenia Cunninghamii, Todea kymenophylloides, Tmesi- pteris Forsteri. List of Plants observed on the Tararuas not in Mr. Petrie's List (Trans. N.Z. List., 1907, p. 299). Floivering- plants. Ranunculus rivularis, Banks and Sol., Mount Holdsworth ,, Munroi, Hook. /., Tararuas (Buchanan). Pittosporum eugenioides, A. Cunn., Hutt Gorge. Colobanthus Billardieri, Fenzl., Mount Holdsworth. Plagianthus betulinus, A. Cunn. Aristotelia fruticosa, Hook. /., Mount Holdsworth. Coriaria angustissima, Hook. /., Mount Holdsworth. Donatia novse-zelandifie, Hook. /., Mount Holdsworth (Towns'onj. Tillsea (?) debilis, Col, Kaitoke Ridge. Drosera binata, Lahill., Kaitoke. Metrosideros Colensoi, Hook. /., Kaitoke. Myrtus obcordata, Hook. /., Kaitoke. „ Ralphii, Hook. /., Kaitoke. Eugenia maire, A. Cunn., Otaki Gorge, Mount Hector. Epilobium pallidifiorum, Sol., Upper Hutt. ,, chlorsefolium, Haussk., Mount Holdsworth, Mount Hector ,, Cockayuianum, Petrie. Mount Holdsworth. Azorella nitens(?), Petrie, Otaki Gorge. Aciphylla LyaUii(?), Hook. /., Mount Holdsworth, Mount Hector. Coprosma microcarpa. Hook. /., Mount Holdsworth, Kaitoke. ,, Cunninghamii, Hook. f. „ parvifiora, Hook. /., Mount Holdsworth. ,, rubra, Petrie, foot of Mount Holdsworth. Lagenophora Forsteri, D.C., Mount Holdsw^orth. Kaitoke. Celmisia longifolia, Cass., Mount Holdsworth. Mount Hector. ,, hieracifolia, Hook. /., var. oblonga, Mount Alpha, 4,600 ft. Gnaphalium luteo-album, Linn. Gnaphalium Traversii, Hook. /., Mount Hector. Raoulia glabra, Hook. /., Quoin. Helichrysum Loganii, T. Kirk, Mount Holdsworth, Mount Hector, 4,500 ft. ,, glomeratum, Benth. and Hook. /., Hutt Gorge, bellidioides, Willd.. var. prostratum. Craspcdia uniflora, Forst., Mount Holdsworth. Erechtites prenanthoides, D.C., abundant in bush clearings. ,, quadridentata, D.C., ridge above Kaitoke. ., arguta, D.C. Senecio Adamsii, Cheesem., Mount Holdsworth. 24 Transactions. Wahlenbergia gracilis, A. D.C., Mount Holdswortli. Olea Cunniiigbamii, Hook. /., Mount Holdsworth. ,, lanceolata, Hook. /., Mount Holdsworth. Gentiana Grisebachii, Hook. /., Mount Hector. Mvosotis Astoni, Cheesem., Mount Holdsworth, Tauherinikau Vallcv. Solanum aviculare, Forst., Kaitoke. Veronica catarractse, Forst.. var. diffusa, Mount HoldsM'orth. Euphrasia zealandica, Wettst. Plantago Raoulii, Decne., Mount Hector. Piper excelsum, Forst., Hutt Gorge. Muehlenbeckia australis, Meissn. „ complexa, Meissn. Knightia excelsa, i?. Br. Pimelia longifolia, Banks and Sol., Mount Holdsworth. Loranthus tetrapetalus, Forst., Quoin. Tupeia antarctica, Cham, and Sehl., Mount Holdsworth. Dactylanthus Taylori, Hook. /., Kaitoke. Fagus cliffortioides, Hook. /., Mount Holdsworth. Podocarpus Hallii, T. Kirk. ., spicatus, R. Br. Earina autumnalis, Hook. f. Orthoceras strictum, B. Br., Kaitoke. Pterostylis Banksii, E. Br. „ graminea, Hook. /., Kaitoke. ,, foliata, Houk. /., Kaitoke. ,, trullifolia, Hook. /., Kaitoke. ,, barbata, Lindl., Kaitoke. C'vrtostylis oblonga, Hook. /., Kaitoke. C'hiloglottis cornuta, Hook. /., Kaitoke. Gastrodia sesamoides, B. Br., Tauherinikau Valley. Phormium tenax, Forst. Juncus scheuchzerioides. Gaud. ,, planifolius, E. Br., Mount Holdsworth. ,, cfespiticius, E. Mey. Luzula campestris, D.C., var. picta. Cyperus vegetus, Willd. Eleocharis Cunninghamii, Boeck., Kaitoke. Scirpus cernuus, Vahl., Kaitoke. ,, prolifer. Eofth., Kaitoke. ,. sulcatus, Thouars., Kaitoke. Danthonia Cunninghamii, Hook. /., Hutt Gorge. ,, pilosa, E. Br., Kaitoke. Arundo conspicua, Forst., var. intermedia. Agrostis Muellerii, Benth. Deyeuxia Petrei, Hack. „ quadriseta, Benth.. Mount Holdsworth. Dichelachne crinata, Hook. /., Kaitoke. Poa seticulmis, Petrie. Filices. Hymenophyllum multifidum, Swartz. „ polyanthos, Sivartz. bivalve, Swartz. Aston. — Botanical Notes made on a Journey across the Tararuas. 25 Hymenophyllum flabellatum, Lab. subtilissimum, Kunze. dilatatum, Sivartz. Tunbridgense, Smith. scabrum, A. Rich. demissum, Swartz. rarum. B. Br. Trichomanes venosum, R. Br. „ reniforme, Forst. strictum, Menz., Mount Dennaii. Cyathea dealbata, Sivartz. ., medullaris, Stvartz. Hemitelia Smithii, Hook. Alsophila Colensoi, Hook. /., Mount Holdsworth. Dicksonia squarrosa, Swartz. Davallia novse-zealandise, Col. Lindsaya trichomanoides, Dryand. Adiantum affine, Willd. Hj'polepsis millefolium, Hook. ,, distans, Hook. Pteris incisa, Thunb. ,, scaberula, A. Rich. ., aquilin;^, Linn. Lomaria lanceolata, Spreng. „ membranacea, Col. ,, fluviatilis, Spreng. „ filiformis, A. Cunn. ,, discolor, Willd. „ capensis, Willd., var. minor. ,, Patersoni, Spreng. ,, alpina, Spreng. „ vulcanica, Blume. Asplenium falcatum, Lam. „ obtusatum, Forst. „ flaccidum, Forst. „ Hookerianum, Col. „ fluviatilis, Spreng. ,, lucidum, Forst. Aspidium Richardi, Hook. „ capense, Willd. ., aculeatum, var. vestitum. Nephrodium glabellum, A. Cunn. Polypodium pennigerum, Forst. „ Billardieri, 7?. Br. „ punctatum, Thunb. „ australe, Mett. ,, serpens, Forst. „ grammitidis, 7?. Br. Gleichenia Cunninghamii, Heward. Todea hymenopliylloides, A. Rich. „ superba. Col. Lycopodium scariosum volubile, Forst. Tmesipteris tannensis, Benth. 26 Transactions. Art. IV. — Unrecorded Habitats for New Zealand Plants. By Bernard Cracroft Aston, F.I.C, P'.C.S. [Read before the Wellington Philosophical Society, 1st September, 1909.] Ranunculus sericophyllus, HooJc. /. Bold Peak, Kinlocli, Wakatipu. Lepidium oleraceum, Forst. Snares ; Antipodes Island ; Titahi Bay ; Ohau Bay, near Wellington. Lepidium tenuicaule, T. Kirk, vav. minor. Titahi Bay, Wellington. Hymenantliera obovata, T. Kirk., var. ' Titahi Bay, Wellington. This Mr. Cheeseman considers is an intermediate form between H. crassifolia and H. obovata. Claytonia australasica, Hook. /. Enderby Island, Auckland Islands. Aristotelia Colensoi, Hook. /. Colac Bay, Southland. Carmichaelia grandiflora. Hook. f. Bold Peak, Kinloch, Lake Wakatipu. Tillfea multicaulis, Petrie. Bluff Hill, Southland. Tilljea debihs, Col. Happy Valley Beach, Wellington. Gunnera dentata, T. Kirk. Lowther, near Lumsden. Gimnera arenaria, Cheesem. Fortrose, Southland. Fuchsia excorticata, Linn. /. Head of Laurie Harbour, Auckland Island. Aciphylla Traillii, T, Kirk. Top of Rock and Pillar Range. Apium prostratum, Labill. Antipodes Island. Aciphylla, sp. Mount Holdsworth ; Quoin ; Mount Hector. Panax anomalum. var. microphyllum. Sandy mount, Otago. Pseudopanax ferox, T. Kirk. Green Island ; Taieri Gorge ; Gore ; Clifden. Coprosma microcarpa, Hook. f. Tararua Mountains, Day's Bay, Wellington. Coprosma Buchanani, T. Kirk. Fruit translucent, white, globose. Happy Valley beach, Wellington, •Coprosma virescens, Petrie. Clifden (Waiau River). Aston. — Unrecorded Habitats for New Zealand Plants. 2T Coprosma rubra, Petrie. Clifden ; Tapanui ; Mount Holdsworth. Craspedia uniflora, Forst. Mount Dumas, Campbell Island. Helichrysum bellidioides, Willd., var. prostratum. Mount Hector, 5,000 ft. Celmisia Lieracifolia, Hook. /., var. oblonga. Mount Alpha (Tararuas), 4,600 ft. Senecio Greyii, Hook. f. Little Mukumuku cliffs, Palliser Bay. Taraxacum officinale, Wigg. Indigenous form, Campbell Island. Cyathodes pumi^a, Hook. /. Blue Mountains, Otago, 3,000 ft. Cyathodes Colensoi, Hook. /. Common under bog-pines. Blue Mountains, Otago, 3,000 ft.; Quoin. (Tararuas), 3,900 ft. Samolus repens, Pers. Eweburn, Maniototo Plain. Myosotis Astoni, Cheesem. Mount Holdsworth. • Calceolaria repens, Hook. f. Maungatiriri River ; Hutt Gorge. Mazus radicans, Cheesem. Bluff, Southland. Veronica odora. Hook. f. Port Ross, Enderby Island ; Norman Inlet, Enderby Island. Euphrasia zealandica, WeHst. Mount Hector. Ourisia sessilifolia, Hook. f. Takitimos, 4,000 ft. Teucridium parviflorum. Hook. f. North Otago Heads ; Clifden. Muehlenbeckia, no v. sp. Wainui-o-mata mouth, Orongorongo, Wellington. Peperomia Endlicheri, Mig. Titahi Bay ; Evans Bay, near Wellington. Pimelia sericeo-villosa, Hook. /. Ben Lomond, Lake Wakatipu, 4,0<;)0 ft. Paratropliis Banksii, Cheesem: Wainui-o-mata mouth. Corysanthes oblonga, Hook. f. Port Ross, Auckland Island. Corysanthes rivularis. Hook. /. Norman's Inlet, Laurie Harbour, Auckland Island. Thelvmitra, nov. sp. Bluff Hill, Southland. 28 Transactions. Thelvmitra pachyphylla, Chcesem. Bluff Hill, Southland. Pterostylis foliata, Hook. /. Kaitoke. Pterostylis barbata, Lindl. Kaitoke. Adenochilus gracilis, Hook. /, Under Fagus at 1,000 ft. on Maungtaua, Otago. (This habitat was attributed to Mr, Petrie in the "' Manual") •Gastrodia sesamoides, R. Br. Tauherinikau Valley. Uncinia, sp. Port Ross, Auckland Island. Paspalum Digitaria, Poir. Sydney Street, Wellington. Microlsena avenacea, Hook. j. Auckland Island. Poa incrassata, Petrie. Flowers January, Campbell Island. Poa Tennantia, Petrie. Snares Island. Poa Astoni, Petrie. Snares Island. Poa antipoda, Petrie. Port Ross, Auckland Island. Poa aucklandica, Petrie. Summit of hill above Camp Cove boat depot, Carnley Harbour, Auckland Island. Poa oraria, Petrie. Snug Cove, Doubtful Sound. (A new tussock-grass.) Deschampsia gracillima, T. Kirk. Port Ross, Auckland Island. Deschampsia Chapmanii, Petrie. Port Ross, Auckland Island. Atropis antipoda, Petrie. Antipodes Island. Atropis stricta. Hack. Enderby Island ; Auckland Island. Deyeuxia Forsteri, var. Lyallii, Kunth. Enderby Island ; Auckland Island. Deyeuxia setifolia, Hook. f. Port Ross, Auckland Island. Asperella Isevis, Petrie. Snug Cove, Doubtful Sound. Hare. — Additions to Perlidse, d-c, of Netv Zealand. 29 Art. V. — Some Additions to the Perlid;e, Neuroptera - Planipennia, and Trichoptera of New Zealand. By E. J. Hare. Communicated by G. V. Hudson, F.E.S. [Read before the Wellington Philosophical Society. Ist September, 1909.] The descriptions that follow are made from specimens kindly sent to me by Mr. G. V. Hudson, F.E.S., of Wellington, New Zealand. PERLID.E. Four new species are described below. Of these, probably two have been included hitherto, with a Tasmanian species, under the name of Leptoperla opposita, Wlk., and I have merely put into practice the opinion of McLachlan in separating them. No more revolutionary is the founda- tion of a new genus for the Chloroperla cyrene of Newman. The number of species at present recognised in New Zealand is six. Genus Leptoperla, Newm. Leptoperla fulvescens, n. sp. 2 . Reddish - brown. Antennee rather longer than forewings ; 1st joint stoutly cylindrical, 2nd oval ; brownish-ochreous. Meso- and meta- thorax fuscous - brown ; abdomen reddish, dark fuscous at extremity. Forewings greyish-ochreous, veins fulvous ; discal area, and spaces sur- rounding veinlets of posterior half, pale, subhyaline. Hindwings sub- hyaline, iridescent, costa tinged with reddish-ochreous ; neuration with an asymmetrical tendency. Legs reddish-brown. Caudal setse reddish- ochreous, the under-surface of the proximal joints with a fringe of yellow hairs. Length of body, 13 mm. Expanse of wings, 25 mm. Hab. — Karori, Wellington. Leptoperla maculata, n. sp. Blackish-fuscous. Antennae nearly as long as forewings, fuscous ; 1st joint stoutly cyhndrical, 2nd rounded. Forewings shaded with grey, veins dark brown ; posterior veinlets surrounded by grey oval spots. Hind- wings greyish, subhyaline. Legs dark fuscous, mixed, on posterior femora and tibiae, with pale dull yellow. Caudal seta? slender, light fuscous, as long as abdomen. In the male the appendices are light brown and rather slender. Length, 10-12 mm. Expanse of wings, 22-27 mm. Hab. — New Zealand. Leptoperla confusa, n. sp. DifEers from L. maculata as follows : Smaller and rather paler. Fore- wings : 1st sector terminally furcate ; posterior veinlets arranged in dis- 30 Transactions. tinct series, tlie grey markings about the veinlets of each series being con- fluent and not in the form of distinct spots. Hindwings : Veins 7 and 9 furcate. Legs reddish-brown, almost unicolorous. Length, 8 mm. Expanse of wings, 19 mm. Hah. — New Zealand. Leptoperla hudsoni, n. sp. ^ . Fuscous. Antennae shorter than forewings, dark fuscous. Head and thorax blackish-fuscous ; abdomen rather paler. Forewings greyish- fuscous ; posterior veinlets very distinct, outlined with dark fuscous ; 1st sector terminally furcate. Hindwings greyish - fuscous. Legs reddish - brown ; tibiae paler and rather slender. Caudal setse slender, as long as- abdomen, fuscous. Length, 8 mm. Expanse of wings, 17 mm. Hab. — Karori, Wellington. *t^' The New Zealand species of Leptoperla may readily be identified by the following artificial key : — , f First sector of forewings terminally furcate ( First sector of forewings simple 2 f Posterior veinlets of forewings surrounded by grey spots ( Posterior veinlets of forewings merely ,outliiied . . o J Reddish-brown I Blackish-fuscous 2 3 L. confnsa. L. hudsoni. L. fiilvescens. L. macidata. The characters afforded by the neuration seem to separate the genus into- two natural divisions, but such a schism is inadvisable in practice in the present state of our knowledge. The Tasmanian species {L. opposita, Wlk.) has the posterior veinlets of the forewings very numerous and distinct, and not surrounded by spots ; and while the posterior femora have a distinct paler band, the knees are dark fuscous. It is also a larger insect than either L. confusa or L, macidata. Genus Heteroperla, gen. nov. Antennae strong, 1st joint large and cylindrical, 2nd practically uniform" with its successors. Labial palpi very short ; 1st and 2nd joints minute ; 3rd and 4th equal, ovate ; 5th very small and rounded. Prothorax sub- quadrate, rather broader than head. Forewings : Upper branch of 1st sector and lower branch of 2nd sector furcate, cubital furcate at J. the posterior half of the forewings Avith 7 parallel veins ; subcostal veinlets numerous. Hindwings broad, subtriangular ; 1st cubital vein furcate, others simple. Caudal setae short, incurved. Distribution : New Zealand. Type, Heteroperla cyrene {Chloroperla cyrene, Newm. ; Perla (?) cyrene, Wlk. et McL. ; Stenoperla (?) cyrene, Hutton). This genus would, no doubt, have been created long ago but for the fact that there were no specimens available which were sufficiently well preserved for detailed examination. It seems to have no affinities with any other existing genus of Perlidce, except perhaps with Stenoperla, McL., with which, however, it is only very remotely connected. Hare. — Additions to Perlidee, d-c, of New Zealand. 31 NEUKOPTERA-PLANIPENNIA. Genus Drepanepteryx, Leach. Drepanepteryx maori, n. sp. ? . Brownish-fuscous. Antennae brown. Forewings subhyaUne, an- terior half partly, and posterior half wholly, suffused with brown ; six sectors, the 4th and 5th connected, the 6th connected with cubitus ; ten gradate veinlets in inner series, thirteen in outer, each series marked by a dark- brown line angulated near costa ; a dark»brown spot on upper branch of superior cubitus before 1st gradate series ; termen not very deeply ex- cised, with two white marginal spaces. Hindwings iridescent ; costa brownish-fuscous, darker on pterostigma ; outer gradate series and an irregular dorsal spot fuscous. Legs pale brownish -ochreous. Length of body, 6 mm. Expanse of wings, 16 mm. Hab. — Wainuiomata River, Wellington. The nearest relation of this species appears to be the Australian D. hinoculus, McL. Drepanepteryx humilior, n. sp. Light brownish-fuscous. Antennte ochreous, ringed with brown. Fore- wings with apical margin only slightly excised ; subhyaline, faintly clouded with greyish - brown ; nine gradate veinlets in inner, thirteen in outer, series ; veins marked with brown ; numerous brown spots irregularly dis- tributed, with a large brown spot on upper branch of superior cubitus before 1st gradate series. Hindwings hyaline, iridescent ; subcosta shaded with fuscous, paler on pterostigma ; a fuscous line along outer gradate series, and a light - fuscous dorsal suffusion. Legs pale ochreous. Abdomen ochreous beneath. Length of body, 5 mm. Expanse of wings, 13 mm. Hab. — Wainuiomata River, Wellington. Quite distinct from the Queensland D. humilis, McL., which, in all probability, has never occurred in New Zealand, and should therefore be excluded from New Zealand lists. TRICHOPTERA. Genus Helicopsyche, Hagen. Helicopsyche zealandica, Hudson, n. sp. Fuscous-brown. Antennae slightly shorter than forewings, clothed with pubescence ; 1st joint with longish hairs. Maxillary palpi stout, terminal joint curved, ascending ; densely hairy. Wings with dense clothing of hairs : forewings with costa and dorsum nearly parallel ; lower branch of sector and upper branch of superior cubitus closely approximated ; greyish, with light-fuscous hairs mixed with gclden, somewhat darker on longitudinal veins ; termen and fringe mixed with black : hindwings rather narrow, with light-fuscous hairs ; dorsal fringe very long, greyish-fuscous. Legs light brownish-fuscous, posterior tibiae darker ; spurs 2, 4, 4, the inner longer than the outer, and the median pair of posterior tibiae close to ter- minal pair ; tarsal joints pale-tipped. Length of body, 5 mm. Expanse of wings, 1-2 mm. Hab. — Wellington. The species is structurally described here for the first time, I have adopted the name suggested by Mr. Hudson. 32 Transactions. Genus Philorheithous, gen. nov. [Greek, perOpov = stream.] 1st joint of antennae longer than breadth of vertex, densely hairy. Maxillary palpi with basal joint very short, 2-5 subequal. Labial palpi with 1st joint short, the 3rd longer than the 2nd. Forewings rather narrow, dilated before apex ; subcosta and radius connected near base ; a series of transverse veins connecting th,e longitudinal veins successively from radius to upper branch of superior cubitus closes a large discal area ; a chitinous nodule on dorsum near base serves as frenulum. Hindwings obtusely elongate-triangular, with a closed discal area similar to that of forewings. Tibial spurs 2, 4, 4. Distribution : New Zealand. The type (P. agilis, Huds.) is described by Hudson (" New Zealand Neuroptera," p. 64) as follows : — " ? CKjilis, n. sp. " The expansion of the wings is about 1^ inches. The antennae are rather stout, and about the same length as the forewings. Spurs 2, 4, 4. The forewings have the costa slightly arched at the base, and much, arched before the apex ; the termen is sharply excavated near the middle. The general colour of the forewings is pale brown, paler in the middle with a large almost white patch towards the tornus, partially bordered by a number of dark chocolate-brown markings. The hindwings are yellowish- brown, darker towards the apex. The body is dark brown." In the same place is a description of the larva and of the remarkable habits of the imago. Hah. — Wainuiomata River, Wellington. Genus Hydropsyche, Pict. Hydropsyche auricoma, n. sp. Brownish-fuscous. Antennae brownish-fuscous, segments tipped with pale ochreous. Head, prothorax, and mesothorax densely clothed with pale-golden hairs. Forewings greyish-yellow, with darker reticulations ; four series of brownish-fuscous marks tending to form transverse bands. Hindwings greyish, slightly iridescent. Legs pale ochreous. Abdomen brownish-ochreous, darker above. Length of body, 5 mm. Expanse of wings, 15 mm. Hah. — Wellinoton. o^ Genus Hydrobiosis, McL. Hydrobiosis occulta, n. sp. 3 . Dark brown. Antennae rather longer than forewings, dark brown,, almost unicolorous ; the basal joint, with the face and prothorax, clothed with golden-brown hairs. Forewings dark brown with dense golden-brown pubescence. Hindwings with pubescence scantier and dark brown. Legs light ochreous-brown. Abdomen without ventral teeth. Penis yellow ; inferior appendices directed upwards and curved so as to meet over extremity of abdomen. Length, 6 mm. Expanse of wings, 14 mm. , Hare. — Additions to Perlidae, dc, of New Zealand. 33 2 . DifEers from J as follows : Antennae not longer than forewings ; pubescence of forewings almost wholly dark brown. Length, 6 mm. Expanse of wings, 17 mm. Hah. — AVainuiomata River, Wellington. Hydrobiosis ingenua, n. sp. Brownish-fuscous. Antennae as long as forewings, brown. Maxillary- palpi pilose, fuscous. Ocelli dark brown, distinct. Head, prothorax, and mesothorax densely clothed with brown hairs. Forewings brownish - fuscous, hairs lighter ; a pale - golden band before termen and a tuft of black hairs on superior cubitus at ^. Hindwings greyish - fuscous, strongly iridescent. Legs greyish-ochreous, tibise and tarsi marked with fuscous, spurs brownish-ochreous. Length of body, 6 mm. Expanse of wings, 14 mm. Hab. — Wainuiomata River, Welhngton. Art. VI. — Notes on some Rocks from Parapara, Bluff Hill, and Waikawa. By J. Allan Thomson, B.A., B.Sc, F.G.S., A.O.S.M. Communicated by G. M. Thomson, F.L.S. [Read before the Otago Institute, lith September, 1909.] Introduction. The description of a few isolated rocks can seldom advance geological know- ledge very greatly, and this paper must be regarded mainly as an attempt to draw attention to some interesting regions of the Dominion, The day has gone by when descriptions of new types of igneous rocks can attract more than local interest, and petrologists are more and more tending to use description only as a handle for the discussion of theoretical questions. The two outstanding subjects of discussion are, — (1.) The nature of igneous magmas, the history of their consolidation and their relations to neighbouring rocks, involving the theories of differentiation, admixture of igneous magmas, and assimilation of the walls of the magma-basins. (2.) The mode of formation of the crystalline schists. New Zealand is a country so rich in rock-tj^es, and so well provided with natural sections, that it is not vain to suppose that much material may be foimd which may throw important light on these philosophical questions. Two such districts are outlined in the sequel. 2— Trans. 34 Transactions. Part I. — Parapara, Nelson. The authors of Bulletin No. 3 of the Geological Survey describe certain basic facies of the Waitapu granite as occurring only at the contact with the carbonate rocks, and are led to the conclusion that it was owing to the in- troduction of the carbonate bases into the acid magma that these basic facies arose. This theory of assimilation or absorption has its home in France, and its most notable protagonists in Levy* and Lacroix.f It receives support from Finnish geologists, but is strongly opposed by the differentiation school of Rosenbusch and Brogger, with whom English petro- logists are in large part inclined to agree. In America, however, the French have a strong following. J One of the difficulties in settling the question is the rugged and inacces- sible nature of the country in Ariege described by Lacroix, while another lies in the complication of phenomena in regions of crystalline schists such as Adams describes. It suggested itself to me that the Parapara district would furnish an excellent case on which to test the rival theories, and Dr. Bell, Director of the Geological Survey, kindly furnished me with six specimens for preliminary study. These will now be described in detail. The members of the igneous complex are represented by an acid and a basic type. The acid rock has the structure of an augen-gneiss and the mineral composition of a binary granite. The feldspars, which form the augen, are mostly untwinned and partially sericitised, and are referred to orthoclase, but there are also present microcline, and albite in microcline- microperthite. Graphic intergrowths of quartz and orthoclase are fairly abundant. Both dark and white mica are arranged in parallel flakes along the planes of foliation, the former in course of alteration to chlorite and rutile. Apatite is not abundant, but magnetite is more plentiful, and it is evident that the original iron-ore was titaniferous, since the magnetite shows minute outgrowths of a highly refringent platy mineral determined as anatase. There is, in addition, a brown mineral of which only one large prismatic crystal appears in the section, with a pleochroism from brown to yellow. The orientation is not favourable for study in convergent light, and the mineral is doubtfully referred to cero-epidote on account of its low obliquity of extinction. Although it is paler in colour than is usual in com- mon orthite, it is too pleochroic for monazite. The basic rock shows, in section, abundant common hornblende enveloping colourless patches, which are evidently pseudomorphs after feldspar. They consist chiefly of muscovite and epidote, but a little basic plagioclase has here and there escaped alteration. Magnetite is probably an original constituent, but much of the iron is now present as pyrite. Secondary alterations in the large hornblende plates are of two kinds : there is a decomposition to clinochlore and sphene, to be ascribed to shallow- seated alteration, and also a local separation of minute needles of rutile and * Levy, MM. " Le granite de Flamandville, &c.," Bull. Carte geol. Fr., tome v. No. 36, 1893-4. " Sur revolution des magmas de certains granites a amphibole," Comptes Rcndus. cxxi, p. 228, 1895. " Sur quelques partioularites de gisement du porpliyi-e bleu de I'Esterel," Bull. Soc. geol. Fr., 3rd ser., xxiv, p. 123, 1896. t Lacroix, A. " Les granites des Pyrenees et leur phenomenes de contact." Bull. Carte geol. Fr., tome x, No. 64. 1898-99. % Cf. Adams, F. D., on the Structure and Relations of the Laurentian System in Eastern Canada. Q.J.C4,S., Ixiv, pp. 127-47. 1908. Thomson. — Rocks from Parapara, Bluff Hill, and Waikawa. 35 linearly arranged granules of magnetite, giving rise to a rude schiller-like striation oblique to the prismatic cleavages. This latter alteration is very common in the hornblende of rocks that have suffered shearing, and seems to lie due to an attempt on the part of magmatically formed brown horn- blende, rich in iron and titanium, to adapt itself to the altered conditions according to the volume law. From the presence of these striations and the strongly green colour of the hornblende, it appears original, and not a uralitic pseudomorph of pyroxene, and the rock is therefore an altered hornblende dolerite or gabbro. The other four rocks come from the contact aureole of the granite, one being an amphibolite intercalated among the stratified rocks. It is almost completely recrystallized, and in description it is desirable to make use of the terms introduced by Becke.* These are based on the belief that in crystalline schists the formation of the different minerals has proceeded simultaneously, since each may be found enclosed in the others, in opposition to the sequence of growth amongst minerals of igneous rocks. Owing, how- ever, to the different powers of crystal-growth exhibited by the minerals, they differ widely in their development of crystal-faces, so that some appear moulded on others. The resulting structure is called " krystalloblastisch," or, anglice, " crystalloblastic," and the apparent order of separation is termed " the crystalloblastic order." Well-shaped (euhedral) crystals are termed " idioblastic," those with in-egular boundaries (anhedral) " xenoblastic," a'nd other structural terms used in the descriptions of igneous rocks are similarly adapted with the suffix " blastic." In this amphibolite there are evidences of former igneous structure in the presence of original phenocrysts of feldspar. The rock is therefore " porphyro-blastic." The minerals, especially the sphene, are frequently honeycombed with inclusions, and the crystalloblastic order appears to differ from that established by Becke, in that feldspar is idioblastic to sphene and hornblende ; but this apparent difference may be due to the incomplete recrystallization of the feldspar. These three minerals are the most abundant constituents of the rock, but epiclote, apatite, and pyrite are also present, and secondary sericite is forming in the feldspar, which is near andesine in composition. The mineralogical composition of the rock shows that it is an ortho-amphibolite, the large crystals of plagioclase that it was porphyritic, but to arrive at the nature of the original rock an analysis would be necessary. The three stratified ]'ocks are interesting as containing contact minerals, a class which must be common but has not yet been widely observed in New Zealand. One rock is a biotite-hornfels, containing biotite, quartz, plagioclase, feldspar, chlorite, and magnetite. The quartz forms a fine mosaic of polygonal grains, between the interstices of which are inserted abundant flakes of biotite, locally decomposed to chlorite. The other two rocks are marbles with contact minerals. In one — the " complex-carbonate rock " of the Survey — there is little besides the large polygonal carbonate grains. White mica and sphene can be recognised, but small needles of a highly refringent and bi-refringent mineral lying in the carbonate defy determination in section, although they can scarcely be other than rutile. The other must have been an impure dolomitic rock, for, besides calcite, a colourless augite occurs very abundantly both in separate grains and in small aggregates. Octagonal cross-sections may occasionally * Becke, F. Ueber JSIiueralbestand und Struktur der krystallinischen Sohiefer." Comptes Reiidus ix Sess. Cong. Geol. Inter. Vienna, 1904, pp. 553-70. 2*— Trans. 36 Transactions. be seen, but most of tlie crystals are rounded or irregular]jin shape, and are interrupted in crystallization by inclusions, so that the form is like a sj)onge. Spliene and quartz are found in the pores of the sponge, and also independ- ently in the calcite. Finally there is a little pyrites. This collection of rocks, interesting as it is in itself, throws little light on the question of assimilation. Certainly there are many points of resemblance with the Pyrenean granite-contacts, but the endomorphic modifications of the granite are too poorly represented to draw a parallel. A complete investigation would involve the detailed mapping of these basic facies with the rocks at their contact. Even then, the phenomena would admit of either interpretation, unless a thorough chemical examination of both classes of rocks conclusively proved the absorption of the earthy bases. Probably the truth will be found to lie between the extreme positions, a partial assimi- lation accompanying laccolitic differentiation. This paper will serve its purpose if it draws attention to this interesting question. Part II.— Bluff Hill. The rocks here described are the result of a few hours' collection along the shore south and west from Bluff Harbour. Immediately joining the harbour is a series of apparently bedded rocks, which are in some cases so dense as to resemble hornstones, but in other cases suggest sheared porphyritic igneous rocks. A section of one of the denser varieties proves the rock to be a fine-grained banded hornblende schist. Some of the bands are richer in hornblende, others in epidote and iron-ores, while a mosaic of polygonal quartz grains is common to both. Apatite is not rare, and rutile is very abundant in minute prismatic crystals with pyramidal terminations pro- jecting out of quadrate magnetite crystals. A similar mineral occurs in more rounded crystals in the quartz, and is difficult to determine with cer- tainty as rutile or sphene, but there are a few xmdoubted larger crystals of the latter. The hornblende, a common green variety, occurs in prismatic crystals mostly parallel to one another, more rarely oblique to the schistosity. Sometimes the crystals are so slim and needle-like as to simulate sillimanite needles. Cross-sections show that in addition to the prismatic faces the B pinacoids (010) are present, a feature rarely observed in hornblende schists. The epidote does not show clear crystalline form, but occurs in granular aggregates elongated in the same direction as the hornblende. The crystal- loblastic order appears to be apatite, magnetite, rutile, sphene, hornblende, epidote, and finally quartz. A vein of coarser grain separates the hornblendic and epidotic bands, and contains, besides hornblende, epidote, and quartz, a few large twinned basic feldspars. The absence of albite in the rock is surprising if it is derived from an igneous or pyroclastic rock. Untwinned feldspar is always difficult to recognise in the presence of quartz, but an examination of as many of the colourless grains as possible in convergent light gave only uniaxial figures. From the absence or relative paucity of feldspar the rock has more affinities with a para-hornblende-schist than with an ortho-hornblende-schist. It presents many points of resemblance to the " green schists " among the Old Lizard Head series of Cornwall. A dyke of a dark porphyritic rock crosses the schist formation at an angle approaching 45°. In section this rock also proves to be quite schistose, but, unfortunately, the directions of schistosity of the dyke and the intruded schists were not compared in the field. The phenocrysts consist of large Thomson. — Rocks from Parapara, Bluff Hill, and Waikaiva. 37 compact hornblende crystals, often white in the centre, and smaller anhedral feldspars. In section the hornblende * presents rhomboidal shapes with ragged outlines, and is seen to be a strongly pleochroic variety of common hornblende, with occasional tremolitic cores. Not seldom some crystallo- graphically discontinuous hornblende crosses the main phenocryst, a feature often observed in uralite. The feldspars give more rounded outlines, and are turbid, and filled with calcite. They include also hornblende, magnetite, and epidote. The groundmass consists of elongated, often needle-like hornblende prisms, with associated biotite flakes, slightly elongate feldspars, probably albite, showing Carlsbad twinning, magnetite grains, and occa- sionally a green epidote. The rock is thus a porphyroblastic hornblende- schist derived from a basic igneous dyke-rock. The next three specimens to be described come from a small headland about half a mile round the coast to the south-west, just beyond the mouth of the harbour. There is here an interesting complex of coarse holocrystalline rocks. Three elements may be distinguished, a dark dioritic rock (No. 1), which appears to vein a much lighter dioritic rock (No. 2), occasionally enclosing both the latter and a coarse hornblendic rock (No. 3) as xenoliths. The dark diorite (No. 1) is often gneissose, while the walls of light diorite (No. 2) which surround it are quite massive. In section, all three rocks present a similar assemblage of minerals, but the relative amounts of iron-ores, hornblende, and feldspar vary very considerably. Hornblende forms the predominate mineral of No. 3, and is a brown-green variety with a fine schiller-structure in the centre, sur- rounded by a margin of green hornblende. Besides the hornblende, there is a limited amount of a basic feldspar and iron-ores. The hornblende shows a fair approach to idiomorphism, but the larger iron-ores, probably ilmenite, are moulded both on hornblende and feldspars. Minute octohedra of magne- tite are abimdantly included in the two last-named minerals, but are probably of secondary formation. In No. 1, iron-ores and hornblende of the same nature as above described are abundant, but feldspar predominates, and besides these minerals a little apatite and pyrite are found. A very peculiar zoning is observable in the feldspar ; there are only two zones, separated by a boundary of the most irregular nature. The cores are in some instances as basic as labra- dorite, but the exteriors are so acid that there is a marked difference of relief between the two on lowering the condenser of the microscope, and the Becke effect may be easily observed. The Carlsbad and albite twinning of the cores does not persist in the exteriors, as in the case of albitization recently de- scribed by Bailey and Grabham* in the quartz dolerites of the central valley of Scotland, but it appears probable that something of similar nature has taken place here. The structure differs from that of No. 3 in that the hornblende is dis- tinctly ophitic to the feldspar. This observation is in accord with recent theories of the dependence of structure on eutectic relations, f since in the former rock the hornblende is in excess, and in the latter the feldspar pre- dominates. But caution must be used in describing rocks as much altered as these, for, though in No. 2 the hornblende is moulded on the feldspar. * Bailey, E. B., and Grabham, G. W. " Albitization of Basic Plagioclase Feld- spars." Geol. ]Mag. Dec. V, vol. vi, p. 250. 1909. t Vogt, J. H. L. " Physikalisohe-cliemisohe Gesetze der Kristallisationfolge in Eruptiogesteine." Isoh. min. u. petr., Mitt, xxiv, p. 437. 1905. 38 Transactions. it is also included within it, a structure already noted typical of the crystalline schists. There is also evidence for a slight cataclasis in the section. A still paler variety of hornblende may occasionally be seen in this rock, occurring in almost colourless fibrous forms with beautiful poly- synthetic twins. Further study would be necessary to prove whether this is due to bleaching, to recrystallization of coloured hornblende with separation of iron-oxides, or to uralisation of previously existing pyroxenes. In No. 2 the feldspars predominate greatly over the darker minerals. They give evidence of considerable crushing in strain shadows, bent twin lamellae, and local cataclasis. Often irregularly disposed grains are included in the larger crystals. Both coarse and fine albite lamellation may be observed, while pericline twinning is rare. Probably more than one variety of feldspar is present, and, indeed, the larger crystals show gradual zoning from the centre to perijDhery, but the prevailing species appears to be andesine. Delicate colourless needles are often abundant in the feldspars, and seem to be sillimanite. Beyond these the feldspars show little sign of alteration with the exception of rare grains of epidote or zoisite, and flakes of chlorite which have probably migrated from the ferromagnesian minerals along cracks. The hornblende and iron-ores occur in small patches of individuals with such ragged contours that the structural relations to the feldspars cannot be made out. The cores of the hornblende crystals generally consist of a paler variety in optical continuity with the green exteriors, so that the former presence of pyroxene is suggested. This small collection of rocks is yet sufficient to show that there is a considerable diversity of rocks in Bluff Hill. It would be exceedingly valuable to have a detailed examination of this area made, as the phenomena observed are probably common to a large part of Stewart Island, if not also in the Sounds region, and Bluff Hill is a much more easily accessible region. The relative ages of the difierent rocks, the mode of origin of the foliation, whether arising during or after consolidation, the origin of the rock-variations and " basic secretions," whether by pure differentiation or differentiation combined with absorption as in Skye, are a few of the problems presented for solution. Probably many analogies will be found with the Lizard district of Cornwall, on which the Geological Survey of Great Britain is shortly issuing a detailed memoir. Part III. — Waikawa. The last rock is an isolated beach-pebble picked up at Waikawa, and possesses interest as being a type not hitherto, recorded in New Zealand. The other beach-pebbles consist mainly of microgranites derived from the Triassic conglomerates, but from its soft nature it is more probable that this rock has come from a neighbouring intrusion. It shows a rich mineralogical association, consisting of amphiboles, biotite, muscovite, clinozoisite, epidote, two varieties of chlorite, talc, magnetite, and pyrite, but hornblende is so abundant as to render the designation " lustre- mottled hornblende rock " applicable. The hornblende occurs chiefly in large poecilitic plates of a pale-brown variety, passing gradually to a pale-green on the exteriors. The minerals enclosed poecilitically are feldspar and secondary minerals, partly after feldspar and partly after some ferromagnesian, while there are chloritic areas with sphene, which may simply represent alterations of a hornblende. Thomson. — Rocks from Parapara, Bluff Hill, and Waikawa. 39 The feldspars are often rounded, and show good albite twinning with rarer pericline lamellse. The extinction angles are characteristic of basic labra- dorite. Of the secondary minerals the chief is tremolite, oriented in crystal- lographic continuity with its host. This structure, described by me* in the amphibolite of Glendalough, Ireland, is commonly ascribed to the uralitisa- tion of pyroxene, but may also arise, as shown at Glendalough, from the amphibolitisation of olivine. Probably both methods have operated here. Occasionally small fibres of tremolite oriented independently of the host occur in these areas. The feldspar inclusions are sometimes wholly or partly replaced by clinozoisite associated with muscovite and a feebly bi- refringent chlorite. The green margins of the hornblende plates contain similar inclusions, and, in one case, twinned clinochlore and small prisms of pale actinolite. Only one large crystal of biotite is seen in the section, and it includes hornblende. Outside the large pcecilitic plates, feldspars altering to clinozoisite and muscovite are not rare, but there is a large development of recrystallized actinolitic hornblende fibres pointing in all directions, but most often distinctly aggregated in bundles, and interspaced with most of the secondary minerals included in the large plates. There are, in addition, some areas consisting of finely divided talc, into which fibres of hornblende project. It is difficult to be sure of talc in the presence of sericitic muscovite, since there is no certain microscopic method of discriminating between these minerals, unless recourse be had to microchemical tests ; but the mineralogical association supports the general appearance. These areas do not contain clinozoisite or epidote, which are associated with muscovite in the altered feldspars, and contain hornblende, which does not occur in the latter. Assuming the presence of talc, these areas are then pilitef after olivine, and the rock is derived from a hornblende olivine dolerite such as Harkerf describes from Anglesey in association with hornblende-peridotites. * Thomson, J. A. "The Homblendic Rocks of Glendalough and Greystones." Q.J.G.S., Ixiv, p. 475. 1908. f Becke, F. " Eruptiogesteine aus der Gneissformation des niederosterreichischen Waldviertels." Isch. min. u. petr., Jlitt. v, p. 147. 1883. J Harker, A. " The Bala Igneous Rocks of Carnarvonshire," pj). 92, 97. 40 Transactions. Art. VIJ — On some Armour presented to Titore, a Nga Puhi Chief, by EM. William IV in 1835. By A. Hamilton. [Bead before the Wellington PhilosopJiical Society, Qth October, 1909.] Dr. Maui Pomare deposited in the Dominion Museum in November, 1908, some pieces of " armour " whicli was supposed to be the armour belonging to the great Nga Puhi chief Hongi. Dr. Pomare stated that Hongi's armour descended to his relative and fighting chief, Tuwhare. About the end of the twenties this chief led an expedition against the Whanganui Tribe, and, in a bloody battle which resulted, his nephew Tokiwhati, with others of the Nga Puhi, was taken prisoner. Tuwhare, who was wounded in the same fight, and died shortly afterwards at Mokau, on his way to the Bay of Islands, learned that Toki- whati was still alive, and entered into negotiations for his release. Either as a gift or ransom the treasured suit of armour was handed over to Hori Kingi te Anaua, uncle of the late Major Kemp. The armour was placed in the sacred house at Pukehika, opposite Jerusalem, till the walls of that edifice were tumbling down, and Hore Pukehika, a relative of the late Hori Kingi, and the present Native Sanitary Inspector for that district, hearing that some Europeans were planning how to carry off the relics, concealed them very carefully near the pa. This was thirty or forty years ago, and the armour lay undistm'bed till a few weeks ago. Then Hori Pukehika and Dr. Pomare sought out the place, and, after laborious searching — for the scrub and other features had changed a great deal in the interval — discovered the old armour, rusty, but quite recognisable. The armour consisted of plate armour for the back and chest, and pieces for the arms. It is much eaten with rust, but, considering that it is stated that it has been buried, is in fair preservation. It is fastened together with brass studs. On looking into the details of the story given, and comparing them with the known and recorded facts concerning Hongi's armour, it became apparent that the history of the armour was incomplete, and that there were serious discrepancies. In the first place. Earl, in 1827, speaking of the visit of Hongi to England in 1821, mentions that George IV gave him, amongst other presents of value, " a superb suit of chain armour and a splendid double-barrelled gun."* Taylor also speaks of Hongi giviug the coat of mail to one of his sons when on his death-bed in 1827. -j- There are at least two other notices, the earliest of which is in Angas's " Savage Life and Scenes," 1847 ;{ and I must give this in full, as it contains several details which are of interest. Angas writes from Paripari, Mokau, " At a small pah not far from the abode of his pakeha (Lewis), Taonui the chief has his residence. He is one of the most powerful and superstitious of the old heathen chiefs He has also in his possession the original suit of armour that was given by King George TV of England to the Bay of Islands chief (E'Hongi), when that warrior visited England. The subsequent history of this armour is some- * E;i,il. " New Zealand." p. 62. 1827. t R. Taylor. " Te Ika a Maui," pp. 310 and 315. 1855. j Angas, " Savage Life and Scenes," p. 86, vol. ii. 1847. Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLII. Pl. VIII. /l^-'--m\ 3800 ARMOUR PRESENTED TO TITORE.— Hamilton. Pace p. 40. Hamilton. — Armour presented to Titore by Willicmi IV. 41 what curious : it passed from the Nga Puhi to Titore, and from Titore to Te \\Tiero ^^^lero, at the Waikato feast, and came into Taonui's hands under the following circumstances : On the death of a favourite daughter, Te Whero ^\Tiero made a song, the substance of which was that he would take of? the scalps of all the chiefs except the Ngaweka and fling them into his daughter's grave to revenge her untimely death. The words of the song highly insulted the various individuals against whom it was directed, more especially as it was a great curse for the hair of a chief, which is sacred, to be thus treated with contempt. But the only chief who dared to resent this insult from so great a man as Te Whero Whero was Taonui, a chief of Nga Puhi and Ngati Whatua, who demanded a taua or gift as recompense for the afiront, and received the armour of E'Hongi in compensation. I made a drawing of the armour, which was old and rusty : it is steel inlaid with brass ; and, although never worn by the possessors in battle — for it Avould sadly impede their movements — it is regarded with a sort of super- stitious veneration by the Natives, who look upon it as something extra- ordinary." There is another extract which I will give, from Thompson's " Study of New Zealand," as it relates to information obtained by him in 1849.* ■■ This armour " [Hongi's] " is now scattered about the country. In 1849 I found the breastplate in the possession of a chief living near the source -of the AVaipa River ; in 1853 Waikato, the chief who accompanied Hongi to England, told me he had buried the helmet with his son's bones a few Aveeks before my visit to him at the Bay of Islands." Both of the latter extracts refer to Hongi's " armour." The first gives the details of its passing from Titore to Te WTiero "Whero at the Waikato feast, I but both extracts describe the armour sufficiently to make it clear that it was not chain armour, but plate armour. It is evident, therefore, that, if the relics deposited by Dr. Pomare were Hongi's, he must have had a suit of mail and a suit of plate armour. Earl, in his b©ok pubUshed about the year of Hongi's death, distinctly mentions *' chain armour," and in this he is supported by Taylor. Angas and Thompson speak quite as positively to its being plate armour. Then, it is stated by the Whanganuis that the armour was given as a ransom for Tokiwhati. Now, Tokiwhati was wounded and captured by the Whanganuis in the course of Tuwhare's third expedition or war party, the survivors of which reached their homes at the Bay of Islands about October, 1820. Now, we know that Hongi, who returned from England to the Bay of Islands 11th July, 1821, wore his coat of mail at the capture of Mokoia Island, at Lake Rotorua, in August or September, 1823. It is dlso recorded that Hongi had a narrow escape at this battle. He was struck by the bullets of the Arawa from one of their few guns, and one bullet fired by the hand of Te Awa-awa struck his steel cap and knocked him over into the hold of the canoe. Mr. Percy Smith thinks that Hongi probably used the armour at Mauinaina, November, 1821, and at Te Totara. It is therefore quite clear that the ransom of Tokiwhati could not have been the armour of Hongi. The whole question at this time seemed to turn on deciding who was correct. Earl and Taylor or Angas and Thompson. * Thompson's " Sttidy of New Zealand," p. 256. •j- This is the great feast held at Remuera, J Ith May, 1844. 42 Transactions. I made inquiries as to Hongi's armour fiom Mr. Stowell (Hare Hongi), a descendant of Hongi-nui, and by great good fortune was able to obtain from him some documents which settle the question. The first document is from Titore to King William IV : " Letter from Titore, Chief of Nga Puhi, to King WiUiam IV." Undated, probably 1834. " King William, — Here am I, the friend of Captain Sadler. The ship is full, and is now about to sail. I have heard that you, aforetime, were the captain of a ship. Do you therefore examine the spars, whether they are good or whether they are bad. Should you and the French quarrel, here are some trees for your battleships. I am now beginning to think about a ship for myself : a Native canoe is my vessel, and I have nothing else. The Native canoes upset when they are filled with potatoes and other matters for your people. I have put on board the ' Buffalo ' a mere founamu and two garments : these are all the things which New-Zealanders possess. If I had anything better, I would give it to Captain Sadler for you. " This is all mine to you — mine, Titore, to William, King of England." [" True copy of translation. — Henry M. Stowell, 3 Sterling Street, Berhampore. 7/12/08."] The following is the reply : — " The Earl of Aberdeen, one of His Majesty's Principal Secretaries of State, to His Highness Titore. " Friend and Brother, — " I have received the commands of my most gracious sovereign. King William the Fourth, to thank you for your letter, brought to him by the hands of Captain Sadler, commander of His Majesty's ship the ' Buffalo,' and for the assistance which you rendered to him in obtaining the articles for which that ship was expressly sent to your country. " King William will not forget this proof of your friendship, and he trusts that such mutual good offices will continue to be interchanged between His Majesty's subjects and the chiefs and people of New Zealand as may cement the friendsliip already so happily existing between the two countries, and advance the commercial interests and wealth of both. " The King, my master, further commands me to thank you for your present, and in return he desires you will accept a suit of armour, such as was worn in former times by his warriors, but which are now only used by his own Body Guard. " This letter, as well as His Majesty's Royal present, will be conveyed to you through James Busby, Esq., His Majesty's authorised Resident at the Bay of Islands, whose esteem and friendship you will do well to culti- vate, and who in his turn will do all in his power to promote your welfare, and that of your countrymen. " I am your Friend and Brother, " Aberdeen. " Colonial Office, London, 31st January, 1835." The armour is undoubtedly the suit presented to Titore as a recognition of his services to the captain of the " Buffalo." Although not Hongi's armour, it is still Nga Puhi, as will be seen from the following whakapapa showing the relationship between Hongi and Titore. I am indebted for this genealogy to Mr. Stowell (Hare Hongi). Hamilton. — Armour presented to Titore by WilUmn IV. 43 CM o Q < o o W [/T z o EH O la o o >< 08 3 -"3 . 5 - o . EH 3 O s o - •o a d 10 s 3 oj H cS . to 3 ^ c a< so 3 w H o w a o C5 o o bo a o c5 O IS « o 3 CO O 3 o 3 — — 03- cS :e — M € o3 S-4 3: « ^ be buried in that district (Mokoia) at the present time. Subsequently I received from my friend Wiremu Hipango. of Wai- totara, a correct account of part of the history of the armour. Hf says, " It was myself and Hori Pukehika, at my request, made a search in 1892 and found it. The helmet could not be found. I heard after- wards it was buried in Pipiriki Cave.f I have heard from my own people that the armour belonged to Titore, a Nga Puhi chief, and is not the armour that Hongi had. Titore's armour was given to Te Wherowhero, and by him to Te Heuheu, the Taupo chief, and he it was who gave it to a relative of his named Aperahama Ruka, who married Wiki Tumuo, a niece of Hori Kingi. Te Anaua (uncle to Major Kemp), Ruka, and his wife brought it to Whanganui. and presented it to Hori Kingi te Anaua, and they kept it at Pukehika Pa. Another part of the story I was told : Titore was told a gun could not pierce the armour. Titore put it on, and told his son to aim straight at his head and fire. The son took his gun and made steady aim, but he was shaking so he told his father to take the armour ofi. So it was placed on a stump, and he took the fire. The bullet ran through. So his son said to his father, ' Ha ! if you had had that on, you would be a dead man.' If the helmet were to be found I believe the bullet- hole could be seen. I believe that to be the reason why Titore would not care to keep it any longer. The armour was presented to Titore in Sydney. As to Tokiwhati's present, it is another matter." A little later I made further inqixiries from Mr. Percy Smith, and he \vTote to Wiremu Hipango, and Wiremu wrote to Tawhiao, of Taumarunui, and afterwards sent Mr. Smith the following letter, which is interesting, and explains some things rather more in detail : — " To Mr. Smith. [Translation.] " Salutations in this new year. Here is the letter of Tawhiao of Taumarunui. explaining about your letter to him asking for information * Letter from F. J. Hagger, Esq. t This I believe to be incorrect. It was, I am informed on good authority, for manv years at Tanmaiimui, but has now been lost. (Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxviii, pi. xvi.) Hamilton. — Armour presented to Titore by William IV. 45 as to the Jcahu-maitai " [suit of armour] " which was found by Dr. Pomare, and who has given it to the Museum containing the curiosities at Wellington. I am very glad that it has fallen to me to explain this, because I have seen in the Dominion newspaper which says, ' This is a peace-offering by Tuwhare to Te Anaua ' {i.e., to Hori Kingi). This is mere supposition, because Tuwhare came from Nga Puhi, hence the people think he owned the armour (that was the origin), and also because they heard that Hongi visited England and brought back some armour. Thus it has been thought ever since that it was Hongi's. I confirm the story of the peacemaking between Tuwhare and Hori Kingi te Anaua in reference to Tokiwhati. It was at the Kohimarama conference that the generosity of Nga Puhi was laid before AVhanganui, which has lasted to this day. There was no armour with Tuwhare when he was fighting Whanganui ; had there been, the fact would not have been lost in the history of the old men of Whanganui ; there would have been 'sayings' about it. As, for instance, .the news of Nga Puhi's guns, which was handed down by the escapees from the Nga Puhi fights, when our people of the South said, ' Let those pu (guns) come to their pu,^ and then they sounded their pu-Jcaea (or trumpets).* When they saw the real meaning of those pu, then did \Mianganui apply the words to the koanga kaahu " [? armour], " and hence the origin of the story about Tuwhare. " But let me return to my story. This property (the armour) belonged to Te Heuheu the Great. The daughter of Te Anaua, Nga-weuweu, married Aperahama Ruke, a chief of Taupo, and the property descended to them, and was brought by them to Whanganui, and was left with Hori Kingi as a valuable property for Whanganui. " Here is another reference to this matter. Hori Kingi te Anaua had two wives, both chief tainesses, Te Ao-tarewa of Ngati Ruaka, and Te Hukinga-huia of Ngati Ruru. In consequence of neither of them having children, they prepared a wooden image as a baby. Then Te Aotaiewa composed an oriori, or lullaby, beginning ' Taku tamaiti e, i puta nui ra koe i te toi ki Hawaiki,' &c. (which maybe seen at length in Tu-wha-whakia's narrative in your paper) " [vide Jour. Polynesian Soc. vol. xiv, p. 135]. " Te Anaua and his brother Te Mawae had also a lullaby about their image, part of which refers to the armour and to Te Heuheu : ' Kaore te whakama ki te kore tamariki i a au,' &c." [I do not see the application, however. — S. P. S.] ■■ This is the continuation of the story. The armour descended to the chief, and finally to me at Whanganui. I will now explain how this property came to Titore. It was sent to Port Jackson and thence to Titore. The fame of this armour was that bullets would not pierce it. It was then put on by the old man " [? Te Anaua] " who then called on his son to shoot at him ; and when the distance had been arranged, the son took his gun and prepared to fire, but was very anxious about the result. So he said to his father, ' Take off your garment {i.e., armour), and let me try it first, or put it on a stump,' to which the old man consented. Then he fired at it, hitting it on the forehead, and the bullet went through it. Said the son, ' If I had Ustened to you, you would have been shot dead.' " If the helmet should be found, the hole in it will also be seen. One of my old men has just returned to Whanganui, and he told me that he * They, in fact, understood the niodeiu word pu (gun) for the ancient word pu (a trumpet). 46 Transactions. had seen the helmet, with the hole through it on the forehead, but he did not know from whence the armour came. Now you will understand. " Now, my urgent desire is that this property shall be permanently left in the Whare-Ruanuku (Museum). It was I that directed the searcb for it in 1895, and Hori Pukehika and I found it concealed in a place, that had been lost " [i.e., the recollection of it]. " Last year Hori Pukehika and Dr. Pomare brought it away. Pukehika has only just returned " [? from here]. "I have sent a communication to Mr, Hamilton, but not so lengthy as this. Will you send him the enclosed copy ? I have also sent to Hakiaha Tawhiao in case he should feel dark " [anxious] " on account of that property. Hence do I say that this property of Whanganui should be left in the Museum for ever. '' Enough. May you live, the only old man left of those other old who have departed to the night, Major Keepa, Mete Kingi, Hori Kingi, and many others. " Yom' fi'iend, " W. HiPANGO." Art. VIII.- — The Present Position of New Zealand Paloeontology ; with a List of Papers on the Palreontology of New Zealand, including the Titles of those Stratigraphical Papers containing Important Lists of Fossils. By A. Hamilton. [Bead before the Wellington Philosophical Society, 6th October, 1909.] Geological explorations in New Zealand have been in progress now for seventy years, and a mass of reports and papers is in existence bearing witness to the work done by solitary pioneers, and later by — The Provincial Surveys of Canterbury, 1860, under Haast ; Otago, 1861, under Hector ; and Wellington, 1862, under Crawford : The Geological Survey established under the New Zealand Institute Act of 1867 : The officers of the Mines Department from 1878 to date : and The new Geological Survey of 1905. In addition to this there was the important work done by Hochstetter, and by Haast and Hutton and others, as private individuals. The portions of this work that I wish to deal with are the collections that were made by these Surveys ; and I wish to give, if possible, some idea of the progress that has been made with the study of them, and more espe- cially what has been done in the examination and determination of the fossils.* * I do not propose to say anything about the collection of rocks and minerals, except to state that the collection of these made by the old Survey of 1867 in the Dominion Museum building exceeds 12,000 specimens ; nor do I propose to say anything about the vo^k that has been done on the moa and other extinct birds. Hamilton. — Present Position of New Zealand Palceontology. 47 The collections that are in New Zealand are not many, and may be described as under : — (1.) The collection of the older provincial Surveys and of the Geological Survey of 1867. These are in the Museum at Wellington. The number of specimens available for study is about 120,000. All these have correct locality numbers. (2.) The displayed collection in the Canterbury Museum. (3.) The displayed collection in the Auckland Museum. (4.) The displayed collection in the Otago University Museum, Dunedin. (5.) The Hochstetter collection in the Nelson Museum. (6.) A few small private collections. Outside New Zealand. (7.) Collection of Tertiary fossils in the British Museum. (8.) Specimens in the hands of experts for determination. I will now say a few words about these collections, and as some justifi- cation for doing so I may say that I have been intimately acquainted with the collectors and the collections made by the Government Surveys for thirtv-two years, and have watched their growth under the guidance of Sir James Hector, ably assisted by Mr. A. McKay, Professor Park, Mr. Cox, and others. It is with pleasure that I bear witness to the great in- terest and value of the collections. There can be little doubt that the cost of making the collections has been not far short of £50,000,* and some of them could not be secured again at any price. At the end of this paper I have placed a bibliography of the papers bearing more especially on the palaeontology of New Zealand ; and those who are acquainted with the subject will see, on looking it over, that, ex- cept in the case of the Tertiary fossils, there has been very little systematic work recorded. Even the Tertiary lists must shortly undergo a severe revision, based on the new manual of the marine Mollusca, which is now near completion. The percentages of recent and extinct forms will be greatly modified. Much also remains to be done in carefully collecting with a view to establishing characteristic zones in the marine Tertiaries. No serious systematic work has been done on the description of the Mesozoic or Palseozoic fossils. t It was the intention of the late Sir James Hector to bring out a series of publications on the palceontology of of New Zealand, and as early as 1878 the following reports were announced as specially descriptive of the palaeontology of New Zealand : — (1.) New Zealand Belemnites. (2.) New Zealand Brachiopoda. (3.) New Zealand Fossil Flora. (4.) Fossil Corals. (5.) Tertiary Mollusca. * Or perhaps one-halt" the total cost of the survey under Sh' James Hector. f A sufficient study of the fossils has been made to determine the probable age of the Lower and Upper Silurian, Lower Devonian, and Carboniferous formations in the Palaeozoic series, and of the Permian, Triassic, Liassic, and Jurassic sequence of the Mesozoic formations, and the determinations yet to be made are not likely to disprove the general accuracy of the conclusions that have been arrived at with respect to these formations. 48 Transactions. Of these, the fourth was printed and issued with plates, being a descriptive catalogue of fossil corals and Bryozoa sent to the Sydney Exhibition in 1879, written by Rev. Tenison-Woods. One (the first) was to be on the belemnites ; and the plates for this part were published in the " Transactions of the New Zealand Institute,"* with an abstract of the descriptions by Sir James Hector. A sufficient supply of extra plates was printed for the separate issue, and are still in store. The same course seems to have been taken with the palaeozoic BracM- opoda, although in this case additional plates are in existence besides those that were printed for a separate issue. Three new genera, Rastelligera, Psioidea, and Clavigera, are proposed in the abstract published.^ The plates as prepared figure thirty-three species in thirteen genera. Plates v, vi, vii, viii have not been printed, although the drawings are arranged. Besides this there are drawings, not arranged, for about four more plates. A para- graph on page 539 states that " These two papers " [on the fossil flora and on the fossil Brachiopoda] " will appear in full in the report of the Geological Survey Department now in the press " [January, 1879]. There is another paper in the form of a translation of Ettingshausen's paper on the fossil plants of New Zealand. This appears in the Transac- tions,J and a few copies were issued with separate pagination, and the extra supply of plates was printed off and stored. It is possible that another palseontological report was in contemplation, as there is an extra supply of plates printed corresponding to those of the paper on the fossil Reptilia of New Zealand. § A number of blocks were made of characteristic fossils from drawings by Buchanan — the draughtsman to the Survey — and were used in the Catalogue and Guide to the Geological Exhibits at the Indian and Colonial Exhibition in London in 1886. It is much to be regretted that apparently no manuscript by the late Sir James Hector exists to enable his work to be taken up. I have been able to identify the figures in Buchanan's drawings of the brachiopods by the nvanber on the drawings and the number on the specimens still in the case. Whether it is worth while to endeavour to retain these names remains to be seen. The three genera proposed by Sir James are entitled to stand so far as publication is concerned. A very large series of specific names are used in the introductions to the annual reports of the Geological Sur- vey ; but, as they have not been printed with any author's name, it is difficult to identify them, especially as they are not attached to any speci- men. The catalogue of the Tertiary Mollusca and Echinodermata by Captain Hutton was issued in 1873. In the general collection at the Museum the only named specimens are a few of Hutton's types of the Tertiary Mollusca, and the collection of fish-teeth examined by Davis, || and a few of the reptilian remains which can be identified by the published plates. Probably the plant-fossils named by Ettingshausen are also still named, although they have been packed * Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. x, p. 484, pis. xxii, xxiii. t Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xi, p. 537. J Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xxiii, p. 237, pis. xxiv:-xxxiii ; Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xi, p. 536. § Trans. N.Z.. Inst., vol. vi, p. 333, pis. xxvii-xxxi. il Trans. Royal Dublin See, vol. iv, ser. 2. 1888. Hamilton. — Present Position of New Zealand Palceontology. 49 away for years. The number of named New Zealand fossils in the Museum other than types is certainly well under fifty.* There is one important matter which I consider should be placed on record which is at present buried in departmental files. In 1885, at the request of Professor Tate, of Adelaide, a collection of fossils from the New Zealand Tertiaries was sent to him ; and again in 1890, at the request of the late Captain Hutton, a collection of the New Zealand fossil pectens was sent for comparison with the Tertiary fossils of the Australian regions, which the professor was then describing. He appears to have drawn up a report, but desired better and more specimens. This was attended to, and practically all the pectens in the collection were sent, the list of which covers eleven folio sheets, the collection itself filling many cases. Shortly after this, Professor Tate died ; and frequent applications were, I believe, made for the return of the specimens, without avail. I understand that at the professor's death it was found impossible for the University authorities to separate the University collection from those belong- ing to the professor and those loaned to him. We have suffered, at any rate for the present, a great loss. The loss is important, as the pectens as a rule afiord important stratigraphical information from a zonal point of view. From an interview which I had not long ago with an Adelaide gentleman, I believe it would still be possible to recover some of the specimens. To return to our list of collections : The second is that displayed in the Canterbury Museum ; and, when we remember that for some years Dr. Von Haast and Captain Hutton devoted much time and labour to it, we shall not be surprised to find here probably the best-arranged and best- named collection of fossils, mainly Tertiary, in the Dominion. The collec- tion was worked over some years ago by Mr. Suter, and is in good condition, and well arranged in a pattern of case which originated in the Museum, and is mentioned with approval by Bather in his report on anti- podean museums. There is also the finest collection of remains of the Dinornis that yet has been exhibited ; and the whole is supplemented by a large collection of fossils from other countries. It contains manv types of Hutton's species. It would be very convenient to have a published list of this collection, with types indicated. The third collection is that in the Auckland Museum. Mr. Cheeseman informs me that, with the exception of a few well-known species, they have less than fifty named fossils to represent the Palseozoic and Secondary fossils. In the Tertiaries their collections are larger, but still far from satisfactory. The fourth is the small collection exhibited in the Otago University Museum. Here for some time the New Zealand and foreign fossil species Avere exhibited in their places with the hving species ; but Professor Parker, recognising that the Museum was devoted more especially to teaching-col- lections, as distinguished from large general collections, largely reduced the number of exhibits, and substituted instead a very carefully selected series of fossils from all countries illustrating the sequence of life-forms in geological order. The number of specimens is small, but the value is great for teaching purposes, set out as it is with instructive labels at frequent * In the Rep. N.Z. lust., 1877-78, it states that "The New Zealand fossils now accumulated in the course of the Geological Survey represent collections from 450 different localities, and comprise about 6,200 trays, which have been thoroughly, classified, and 1,200 specific types withdrawn into a separate collection for publication. A large number of types have been figured, and their publication will be proceeded with as rapidly as the other work of the Department will permit." 50 Tra nsac tion s . intervals. The collection of moa-remains is notable, including several individual specimens and a complete egg, together with some excellent osteological preparations of the juvenile states, and the originals of the plates in Professor Parker's paper on the cranial osteology of the moa. The fifth is the Hochstetter collection of rocks and fossils presented to the Nelson Museum by Hochstetter, and, when the Museum was destroyed by fire a few years ago, it was much damaged. Now, however, it has been cleaned and restored. The remaining head of my list includes a number of small collections that are the property of private collectors. None of these are of any great extent, and they are mainly from the Tertiary beds. The collections outside New Zealand are not many or extensive, but in- clude the following : — In the year 1860 the Hon. W. B. D. Mantell presented a collection of Mollusca from the Miocene and Pliocene beds at Awamoa and Onekakara to the British Museum. In 1875 a large and valuable collection was taken Home by Sir James Hector from various horizons in the Tertiary of New Zealand, and ex- changed with the British Museum authorities, and in 1880 a few were trans-" f erred to the British Museum from the Museum of Practical Geology. A few were presented in 1882 by Lieut. -Colonel Wilmer from the Pliocene and Post-Pliocene, and a few* by Mr. Bullen from a raised beach near Opua, Russell, Bay of Islands. These specimens were described and three species figured in the Australasian Section of the Catalogue of the Tertiary 3Iol- lusca in the Department of Geology, British Museum, by G. F. Harris, F.G.S., in 1897, the New Zealand species being 108 gasteropods, with 42 lamellibrancLs. In 1904 Professor Park collected a large number of fossils from a new locaUty on Mount Mary on the Upper Waitaki, and these were forwarded to Professor Boehm, Freiburg, for examination. He has been obliged to hand them over to Dr. Otto Wilckens, Associate Professor of Geology, Bonn University, for description, and we are still waiting for the issue of the publication. Some collections have been made in the older rocks of the Nelson District, and are, I believe, being examined at the British Museum at the present time. In the same year Professor Park and the writer made large collections of fossils from the Triassic and Jurassic rocks at Nugget Point and Catlins district. These fossils, supplemented with collections made by Professor Park from the Trias of Nelson, are now in the hands of Professor Wilckens awaiting description. When we come to inquire into the literature that is available, we have at present to rely largely on the results of the " Novara " expedition and the determinations of Zittel for the Triassic and Jurassic rocks. Fortunately, the publications of that voyage are available in most of the libraries, and the plates are excellent. The work, however, only figures fifty species of Mollusca from all formations, together with nine quarto plates of Formninijera and Bryozoa — quite a creditable result, however, under the circumstances. Scattered through the pages of the series of the New Zealand Geo- logical Reports are a great number of generic and specific names, a very large proportion of which will be found on examination to be " nomina nuda,''^ and will disappear. Hamilton. — Present Position of New Zealand Palceontology. 51 In tlie catalogue of the New Zealand fossils exhibited at Sydney particular pains seems to have been taken to affix names to the exhibits. From the list I have extracted all that could be taken with any hope of tracing them, and arranged them under authors, placing the letter M against those species that can now be identified in the Museum collections. In Catalogue of Fossils exhibited at Sydney hy Colonial Museum,. Salter — Orthis patera. M. Hall— Murchisonia terebralis. Orthis fissicostata. M. Callopora elegantula. Astrocerium venustum. Orthis circulus. M. Streptelasma jimceum. Orthoceras junceum. Murchisonia uniangulata {var. abbreviata). Modiolopsis modiolaris, Leptsena bipartita. M. Davidson — Strophomena corrugatella. d'orbignyi. M. Orthis interlineata. M. Phillips— Avicula anisota. cancellata. Monotis radialis. Bclemnites australis. M. Dalman — Orthis basalis. Chonetes striatella. Lindstrom — Orthis crassa. M. Sowerby — Orthis unguis. Spirifera radiata. Stricklandia lyrata. Rhynchonella wilsoni. M Trigonotreta undulata. Mytilus squamosus. Astarte minima. Sowerby — continued. Astarte elegans. Trigonia costata. Avicula costata. Brongniart — Calymene blumenbachii Konig — Homalonotus knightii. Romer — Spirifera cultrijugata. Hector— Homalonotus expansus. Psioidea, nov. gen. M. Rastelligera, nov. gen. M. Belemnites otapiriensis. pallinensis. hochstetteri. Trigonia sulcata. Schlotheim — Spirifera speciosa. M. Epithyris elongata. M. Geinitz — Schizodus schlothemii. Nautilus frieslebendi. Zittel— Mytilus problematicus. M. Spirigera (Athp'is) ^^^.•eyii. Monotis salinaria. M. Aucella plicata. Hochstetter — Inoceramus haasti. Hauer — Ammonites novo-zelandicus, Belemnites aucklandicus. Brown — Pleurophorus costatus. M. In the list of papers given at the end there are some in which further assistance in the identification of species may be found ; but there is a great lack of information mitil we come to the Tertiaries. It will be seen from this short summary that the student of geology has plenty of palseontological material that might be available for him to work on under expert guidance, but that the literature relating directly to his work is small, scattered, and hardly up to the present level of re- search. This is not a new discovery — the matter has been discussed for many years. The subject is a difficult one, as it requires not only a 52 Transactions. tliorougli knowledge of the progress of modern systematic work in classi- fication, but a working knowledge of the mass of published literature on the rocks of similar age found in other countries. Unless this is taken into account, the resvilt will be a useless multiplication of genera and speciesy and a further burdening of a synonymy already of bewildering length. At the meeting of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science held at Dunedin in 1904, the subject of New Zealand paheontology was brought up, and the President, Professor David, waited on the Minister of Mines and communicated the following recommendation from Sec- tion C, which had been agreed to by the association : — " New Zealand Fossils, " On the recommendation of Section C, it was agreed, That the follow- ing resolution be forwarded to the New Zealand Government : That, whereas this association considers that the description of the large collec- tion of fossils now at the Wellington Museum is one of the most important services which the New Zealand Government could at the present time render to science, and that it is one which would be for the advancement of science throughout the world ; that, whereas the work would be of economic as well as of scientific interest, as it is only by its means that the coalfields of New Zealand can be properly correlated, and the broad relations and modes of origin of its metalliferous deposits understood ; that, whereas, according to the annual reports, there are more than thirty thousand fossil-specimens in the exhibition-cases at Wellington Museum, by far the larger part of which are unnamed and undescribed, and besides about five hundred boxes of fossils still unpacked in the same Museum ; and that, whereas these collections, made at considerable expense to New Zealand, are obviously useless in their present state — this Council recom- mends : (1.) That the description of these fossils should be commenced immediately, and that, if this recommendation is adopted by the New Zea- land Government, the undermentioned groups of fossils be sent for descrip- tion to the following workers at once : The graptolites, to T. S. Hall, M.A. ; the Foraminifera and ostracods, to F. W. Chapman ; the echinoids, to Professor Gregory ; Palaeozoic fossils other than those in the above groups, to R. Etheridge, jun. (Curator, Australian Museum, Sydney), and W. S. Dun (Palaeontologist, Geological Survey, New South Wales). (2.) That, with regard to the large and important collections of Mesozoic and Cain- ozoic fossils (other than echinoids, Foraminifera, and ostracods) in the Wellington Museum, the Council recommends that advice as to their de- scription be delegated, so far as this association is concerned, to a committee consisting of the following : Captain F. W. Hutton (retiring President), Professor Baldwin Spencer (President - elect), and A. Hamilton, Esq. (Director of the Colonial Museum, Wellington)." The Hon. the Colonial Secretary was also written to to the same effect, and did me the honour to forward the letter for my perusal, and asked for my views on the matter ; and I replied as follows : — " Feb. 9th, 1904. " To the Hon. the Colonial Secretary, Wellington. " Sir,— " I am obliged to you for the opportunity to peruse the letter ad- dressed to the Premier by the President of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science, and I am glad to have the opportunity Hamilton. — Present Position of New Zealand Palceontology. 5^ of expressing my views on the subject of the description of the fossils in the Museum, although that part of the collection has not passed imder my charge. " I think that it is imperative that steps should be taken at once to have the fossils (other than the Tertiary fossils) got together and prepared for examination and description by an expert. Without this preliminary step no arrangement could be come to with any expert, either as regards the description and figuring or the publication of results. He must know whether he is to deal with hundreds or thousands of speci- mens. This matter of getting the material together is urgent, as the only person thoroughly acquainted with the whole of the specimens is Mr. McKay. " I concur in the suggestions made generally, and I can assure you that the feeling of geologists and men of science all over the world is that this matter is urgent. The conditions under which the arrangements are made with the experts employed must be carefully framed, and will need much consideration. " I am, sir, your obedient servant, " A. Hamilton, Director." Further suggestions were asked for, and I \\Tote as follows : — " To the Hon. the Colonial Secretary. " Feb. 26, 1904. " Sir,— " In reply to your memo, of the 24th instant, re the fossils of the New Zealand Geological Survey at present in the Museum under my charge, and the proposed arrangements for their description and pubhcation, I have the honour to make the following suggestions and remarks : — " 1. Preparatory Work " (a.) That the Mines Department be asked to instruct their officials to get together in a convenient place all the specimens of fossils now in their collections up to the close of the Cainozoic period, arranged generally under the following heads : — " Hydrozoa,] Actinozoa, Echinoderms, Annelids, Crustacea, Polyzoa, Brachiopoda. Lamellibranchi ata. Gasteropoda, Cephalopoda. " (6.) That the number of specimens in each class be ascertained within reasonable limits, and that an estimate be made of the probable number of species. " (c.) That the specimens be repacked in strong cases, and plainly labelled and numbered at the side and at the end of the case. A more detailed description of the specimens to be entered against the number of the case in a record-book. It is presimaed that all specimens have already their locality number. When this preparatory work has been done,* which will take some months, the following steps should be taken : — * It is not quite finished yet. 54 Transactions. " 2, Arrangements for Description and Publication. " {a.) Certain well-known experts in tlie Australasian Colonics should be approached as to their willingness to undertake the description of one or the other of the groups of fossils, and as to the terms on which they would do so, and also as to what they consider a fair and reasonable time in which to do the work. ■' (b.) A draft agreement should be drawn up by the Government or the Department, setting forth, with the necessary blanks, what the expert con- tracts to do on his side, and what remuneration he is to receive for the work, and when and how he is to be paid. " In making the above suggestions I wish to point out that the pre- liminary sorting and packing of the fossils is the most urgent matter, and should be seen to at once. Unfortimately, the accommodation at the Museum is at present quite insufficient for such work, and emphasizes the necessity for the workshops at the back of the Museum, which I trust will be soon iiuthorised. " However, as soon as the Government Analyst takes possession of his new building, the rooms he vacates could be used with advantage for the sorting. The Mines Department will no doubt give Mr. McKay what assist- ance he requires for the purpose, and provide suitable boxes for the repacking of the specimens. Directly the number is ascertained of the fossils to be ■examined and described, the Government should appoint one or more persons to interview the selected experts in Australia to arrange the terms and con- ditions ; and I would suggest that, instead of visiting them separately, they should be invited to meet in Sydney and discuss with the New Zealand representatives a plan for the description and publication of the fossils, in order to insure as much uniformity as possible for the various New Zealand publications, and also that they should conform as far as possible to similar publications by the Australian States. " I must call your attention to the extremely unsatisfactory result of some transactions with the late Professor Tate, of Adelaide, as disclosed by the file of correspondence in the office of the Museum. It seems that a,t his request Professor Tate was intrusted with a large collection of Tertiary fossils for description. The fossils have not been returned to the Museum, and I have recently been informed that the fossils have passed into the hands of a person who has sold or otherwise disposed of them.* " Professor Tate furnished a few notes on a part of the collection which he received in 1890. It does not seem to me right that such a thing should occur, although I am not now in charge of the collection of which the lost specimens formed a part.f " I am, sir, your obedient servant, " A. Hamilton, Director." Since that time Mr. A. McKay and an assistant have been continuously employed in the transfer of the specimens of rocks and fossils to new and better boxes, and have checked every specimen as to locality, and a com- plete record has been made. It is fortunate that this has been done, as there is no one else now living who could have done it, and Mr. McKay, * This, 1 now learn, is incorrect. t Under the New Zealand Institute Act of 1903 the minerals and fossils in the Museum passed into the control of the Mirffes Department. Hamilton. — Present Position of New Zealand Palxmntology. 55 who has now retired from active work in the Mines Department, can look back with satisfaction on the present condition of the collection which represents the work of his life. The work of bringing together, reticketing, and cataloguing the fossil collections in the Dominion Museum was begun in 1904. By Sir James Hector most of the collections were subdivided to bring together the genera of the families and orders represented, and it was determined to bring together in the collection all the specimens from each locality. This proved a most arduous work, and for want of sorting-space it was found to be impossible, and the specimens of one locality had often to be repacked in several boxes containing other fossils. Finally the ticketing, &c., was finished (excepting the brachiopods and cephalopods in the cases), and for some months past a revision and gathering of the fossils from one locality into as few boxes as possible has been going on. When this work is finished the whole of any collection can be laid out, and the different species culled from the evident duplicates of the same, and, thus pruned, the collection may be placed in the hands of an expert for description. There is even now plenty of material wherewith to make a start — as, for instance, in the large and important collection from Amuri Bluff. Mr. McKay has also greatly elaborated the old lists of localities for the guidance of future collectors. Since the meeting of the Australasian Association in Dunedin in 1904 a new Geological Survey, with Dr. Mackintosh Bell as Director, has been estabUshed, and the palaeontological work done by the officers of the Survev will be found in the new series of Bulletins issued since that time. Palfeontology has naturally held a place in the training of the students who have passed through the various courses for certificates and diplomas of the School of Mines of the University of Otago, and it also forms a part of the subject of geology in the degree subjects for the University of New Zealand. The results are, so far as I can gather, that, of our students who have attended the Otago School of Mines, twelve mining students have passed the requirements of the examination in general palaeontology. In the University of New Zealand 197 students* have, up to the present time, taken geology- including New Zealand pakeontology, for the pass degree, with the following results : Passed, 197. For honours, 24 have taken geology, including palaeontology : of these, 16 passed with first- class honours, 7 with second-class, and 1 with third-class. Of these honours students, Clarke, Thomson, Andrew, and Boult have contributed papers to the " Transactions of the New Zealand Institute," which appear under their names in the list at the end of the paper, Mr. Clarke describing as new 3 species, Thomson 3 species, Andrew 1 species of MoUusca and some cetacean remains, Boult 1 species ; most of these being Tertiary species. This paper is written to point out the present unsatisfactory position of New Zealand palaeontology, and I have endeavoured to provide a base for a new departure when the opportunity occurs for a forward movement. I am convinced that so far as the Palaeozoic and Mesozoic fossils are concerned there is little of permanent value on record, except in the " Voyage of the Novara " and one or two recent papers, and it will be necessary to make a fresh start in the description and correlation of the New Zealand species in the collection. * Bachelor of Arts, 107 ; Bachelor of Science, 84 ; Bachelor of Engineering, 6. 56 Transactions. It will be found that fresh collections will have to be made in some localities to ascertain correctly the horizons and zones in which certain species occur. List of Papers on the PalcBontology of New Zealand, including the Titles of those Stratigraphical Papers containing Important Lists of Fossils* Andrew, A. On the Geology of the Clarendon Phosphate Deposits, Otago, N.Z. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxviii, 447. [PI. iv figures a new brachiopod — Magellania marshalli — and some cetacean bones.] Bather, F. A. The Mount Torlesse Annelid. Geological Magazine (n.s.), dec. v, vol. ii, pp. 532-541, December 1905. [And letter to editor, January 1906, pp. 46, 47, ib.] Benham, W. B. A Gigantic Cirripede from New Zealand. Geol. Mag. Lond. (ser. 2), 1903, pp. 110-119, 2 pis. Boehm, Georg. Ueber tertiare Brachiopoden von Oamaru. Sudinsel. N.Z. Berlin ; Zs.D. geol. Ges. 56, 1904, brieft Mitt. (146-150, mit 1 Taf.). Reisenotizen aus Neu-Seeland. Abdruck a. d. Deutsch. geolog. Gesell- schaft, Jahrg. 1900, p. 169-177. Boult, A. Occurrence of Gold in Harbour Cone. Dunedin. [Incidentally describes and figures (p. 432, pi. ix, fig. 1) Pseudamussium huttoni.} Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxviii, 425. Buchanan, J. On the Belemnite Beds at Amuri Bluff. Rep. N.Z. Geol., 1867. Oastracane. Sul deposits di Jackson's Paddock, Oamaru, nella Nuova Zelandia. Roma, 1890, 4. Clarke, E. The Fossils of the Waitemata and Papakura Series. Trans. N.Z. Inst,, xxxvii. 413 ; 1905. Graptolites of the Aorere Series. Bull. No. 3 (N.S.), N.Z. Geol. Surv., 1907, p. 34, pi. viii. €rawford, J. C. On Probable Reasons why Few Fossils are found in the Upper Palaeozoic and Possible Triassic Rocks of New Zealand. Trans. N.Z. Inst., ix, 561. Davis, James William. On some Fish-remains from the Tertiary Strata of New Zealand. (Paper afterwards withdrawn.) Jan., 1886. [Sent by Captain Hutton : Fish teeth and spines exhibited — Lamna, Carcharodon, Notidanus, Myliobatus, and Sparnodus ; Te Aute.] Q.J. Geol. Soc, vol, xlii, pt. ii, p. 4 ; 1886. * This list does not include, except in a few instances, the papers that have been written on the subject of the fossil remains of the extinct birds of New Zealand. These Jiave been given in the Transactions of the N.Z. Institute, vol. xxvi, \). 229 ; vol. xxvii, p. 229; vol. xxxvi, p. 471. Hamilton. — Presetd Position of New Zealand Palceoidology. 57 Davis, James William — continued. Report on the Fossil Fish-remains of New Zealand. Trans. Roy. Du]>. Soc, vol. iv, ser. 2 ; 1888. [See also N.Z. Geol. Rep. (as a separatum).] Note on a Species of Scymnus from the Upper Tertiary Formation of New Zealand {S. acutus). [Napier series, Esk River.] Geol. Mag., n.s., dec. iii, vol. v ; 1888. De Latour, H. A. On the Fossil Marine Diatomaceous Deposit near Oamaru. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxi, 293. Duncan, P. M. On some Fossil Alcyonaria from the Tertiary Deposits of New Zealand. Q.J. Geol. Soc, vol. xxxi, 1875, p. 675, pi. xxxvii.B. Ettingshausen, Professor Dr. Constantin Freiherrn von. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Fossilen Flora Neuseelands. Besonders abgedruckt aus dem liii Bande der Mathematisch Naturwissen- schaftlichen Classe der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, p. 1-52, taf. 1-9, vol. liii, pt. i ; 4to. Wien, 1887. Genetische Gliederung der Flora von N.Z. Sitziingsbr. Imp. Acad. Sc. of Vienna, vol. Iviii, pt. i, p. 953. 1884. On the Fossil Flora of New Zealand. Geol. Mag., 363, 1887. Contributions to the Knowledge of the Fossil Flora of New Zealand, Trans, by C. Juhl from the German (Vienna. 1887), Plants from seventeen localities. Tert., Cretaceous, and Trias. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxiii, 237, plates xxiv-xxxii, redrawn by J. Buchanan. [This was reprinted as New Zealand Palaeontology, pt. ii. Fossil Flora, pp. 1-74, and a supply of the plates from Trans., vol. xxiii, to issue with it. A few copies were issued.] Etheridge, R., jun. On some Species of Terehratulina, Waldheimia, and Terehratella from the Upper Tertiary Deposits of Mount Gambler and the Murray Cliffs, S.A. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. , 1876, vol. xvii, p. 15. [Waldheimia iaylori, Ett., pi. i, fig. 3, a, b, c, has been identified as New Zealand by Hutton, and other Australian Tertiary species will probably be found to be represented in New Zealand formations.] Field, H. C. A Fossil Egg. [In " shell-rock," Otatoka Valley, near Waitotara. 2 in. long by 11 in.] N.Z. Journ. Sci., ii, 325. Forbes, Dr. C. On the Geology of New Zealand, with Notes on its Carboniferous Deposits. Q.J. Geol. Soc, xi, 521. Forbes, E., and Rupert Jones. See Mantell. Forbes : Note on Fossiliferous Deposits in the Middle Island of New Zealand. [Jones : Foraniinifera and Diatoms.] Q.J. Geol. Soc, vol. vi, p. 329 ; 1850. Haast, Sir J. von. Geology of Canterbury and Westland, 1879. Pt. iii, Geology: *Wai^afa Formation, Fossil Contents, p. 295 ; Oamaru Formation, Fossil Contents, p. 311 ; Pareora Formation, Fossil Contents, p. 319 ; Saurian Remains in the Waipara, pp, 153-155, 58 Transactions. Haast, Sir J. von — continued. Saurian Remains from the Waipara River. Canterbm-y, in tlie Possession of J. Cockburn Hood. [Lost in tlie " Matoaka." A tooth figured, pi. xxiv, fig. G, a, b, c. Trans. N.Z. Inst., vi (Knight).] Trans. N.Z. Inst., ii, 186. Saurien in der Tertiarform. in New Zealand. Wien Verhandl. Geol., 350 ; 1869. Vorkommen von Brachiopoden im den Kusten von Neu Seeland. Wien Geol. Yerhandl, 253 ; 1874. Hamilton, A. List of Recent and Fossil Bryozoa collected in various Parts of New- Zealand. Trans. N.Z. Inst., i-xxxvi, 1908, 465-467. Notes on a Small Collection of Fossils from Wharekauri, on the Waitaki River, North Otago. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxvi, 465-467 ; 1904. Harris, George F. Catalogue of the Tertiary MoUusca in the Department of Geology, pt. i, Australasia ; 1897 ; British Museum (Nat. Hist.). [Localities 1, 5, 13, 14, and 15 are New Zealand. Describes species presented by Dr. Hector and others.] British Museum Catalogue. Tertiary Fossils. New Zealand Section. 1 897. Heaphy, Charles. The Volcanic Country of Auckland, N.Z. In an appendix to the paper, list of fossils, mostly Foraminifera, by the editor Q.J.G.S., T. Rupert Jones. Journ. Geol. Soc, 1860, vol. xvi, p. 251, pis. xii and xiii. (In Review of Karrer's paper, T. R. J.[ones] and W. K. P.[arker] in Geol. Mag., i, p. 75 ; 1864.) Hector, Sir James. Table of Fossiliferous Localities. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., No. 13, 1879- 80, iii. Index to Fossiliferous Localities in New Zealand. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 255. 1886-87. On the Fossil Brachiopoda of New Zealand (abstract). Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xi, p. 537. Fossil Reptilia of New Zealand. Trans. N.Z. Inst., vi, 333, pis. xxvii to xxxi. Index to^Fossiliferous Localities in New Zealand, distinguished by Num- bers. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 120 ; 1890-91. Index to Fossiliferous Localities according to Counties. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 146 ; 1890-91. On a New Trilobite (Homalonotus expansus). Trans. N.Z. Inst., ix, 602. Handbook of New Zealand, Sec. Geology, List of Characteristic Fossils in the various Formations : 1879 (Sydney), pp. 17, 30 ; 1880 (Mel- bourne), Appendix to Official Cat., with Geological Map, pp. 19, 32 ; 1883, pp. 24-41, with geol. map ; 1886, pp. 28-35. Indian and Colonial Exhibition, 1886, N.Z. Court : Detailed Catalogue and Guide to the Geological Exhibits. [Pp. 1-88, with geologically coloured map of North and South Islands ; 65 sections and figures, about 184 figures of- characteristic fossils. Though in many cases poorly drawn, they form the best series yet issued. Pp. 89-101 : Appendix to General Index to Reports and List of Publications of the Geological Survey of New Zealand.] Hamilton. — Present Position of Neiv Zealand Palceontology. 59' Hector, Sir James — continued. Notes on N.Z. Cetacea, Recent and Fossil. In Proc. N.Z. Inst., vol. xiii, p. 434 (abstract only), pi. xviii. [Part of lower jaw. tympanic bulla, and teeth of Kekenodon onamata, nov. gen. and sp., Waitaki Valley. Types in Dominion Museum. See also Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 1881, pp. xxviii and 68. with section ; also (p. 104) recording a nearly entire specimen, 23 ft. in length, the fragments of which are now in the Museum.] Outlines of New Zealand Geology, with Map. Second Part of Special Catalogue of Geological Exhibits sent to Indian and Colonial Exhi- bition. Also Appendix to General Index to Reports of Geological Survey. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 37. 1886. Critical Notes and Corrections of Localities in " Report on the Fossil Fish-remains of N.Z.." by J. W. Davis. N.Z. Geol. Rep., No. 22, 1894, pp. 115-120. Preliminarv Note on the Bones of a Fossil Penguin. Trans. N.Z. Inst., ii, 403."^ On the Remains of a Gigantic Penguin {Palreeudyptes ■antarcticus, Huxley) from the Tertiarv Rocks on the Coast of Nelson. Trans. N.Z. Inst., iv, 341. Further Notes on the Bones of a Fossil Penguin (Palceeudypes). Trans. N.Z. Inst., V, 438. On the Belemnites found in New Zealand. Trans. N.Z. Inst., x, 484. Hill, H. Description of a Scaphites found near Cape Turnagain. Trans. N.Z, lust., xix, 387. Hinde, G. Jennings, and Holmes, W. Murton. On the Sponge-remains in the Lower Tertiary Strata near Oamaru, Otago, N.Z. Journ. Linnean Soc. (Zoology), vol. xxiv, p. 177-262, pis. vii to XV. Hochstetter, Ferd. von. Palseontologie von Neu Seeland. By Unger, Zittel, Suess, Karrer, Stoliczka, Stache, and Jaeger. Reise der " Novara, " 2 abth. 1864. Huxley, Professor T. H. On a Fossil Bird and a Fossil Cetacean from N.Z. [Palceeudyptes antarcticus, Kakanui limestone ; Phoccenopsis mantelli, Awamoa (Pareora).] Q.J. Geol. Soc, xv, 671. Hutton, Captain F. W. Descriptions of New Tertiary Shells. [Pt. i, Wanganui and Petane. H.B. ; pt. ii, from Canterbury Museum and Hawke's Bay.] Trans. N.Z. Inst., xvii. 313-322, pi. xviii, fig. 22. Three New Tertiary Shells. [Pleurotoma hamiltoni and 3Iitra hectori. Waihao Forks, Cant. ; and Pecten hilli, Napier.] Trans. N.Z. Inst.. xxxvii, 472-473, pi. 44. New Species of Tertiary Shells from Canterbury, Wanganui, and Petane. [" The list of New Zealand Tertiary Mollusca. 1885, numbers about 460 species, of which about 250 still remain unfigured.''] Trans, N.Z. Inst., xviii, 333. Revision of the Tertiary Brachiopoda of New Zealand. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxvii, 474-481, pis. xlv, xlvi. On the Supposed Rib of the Kumi. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxi, 485. €0 . Transactions. Hutton, Captain F. W. — continued. Catalogue of the Tertiary MoUusca and Echinoderniata of New Zealand in the Collection of the Colonial Museum, WelUngton, 1873 : MoUusca, 1-37. Echinodennata, pp. iv, vii, ix, 1-43 ; index, 43-48, 38-43. [The plates mentioned in the preface were never published.] On Some Railway Cuttings in the Weka Pass, North Canterbury. [List of Fossils, Mount Brown Beds, Greta (Upper Pareora) Beds.] Trans. N.Z. Inst., XX, 257. On some Fossils recently obtained from the Cobden Limestone at Grey- mouth. Trans. N.Z. List., xx, 267. On the Correlations of the " Curiosity-shop Bed " in Canterbury, N.Z., June, 1885. Q.J. Geol. Soc, Nov., 1885. [Long list of fossils, Avith references.] On a New Plesiosaur from the Waipara River {Cwwliosaurus caudalis). From Bobby's Creek, Waipara. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxvi, 354-358, pi. xlii. [See also Haast, Geol. of Cant, and Westland, p. 169, and Hector, Trans., vol. vi, p. 341.] The Pliocene MoUusca of N.Z. Macleay Mem. Vol., p. 35, 1893, pis. vi-ix. On the Relation between the Pareora and the Ahuriri Formations. Trans. N.Z. Inst., ix, 590. The MoUusca of the Pareora and Oamaru Svstems of N.Z. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 31st March, 1886, vol. i (ser! ii, p. 205). [268 species.] Sketch of the Geology of New Zealand. Q.J. Geol. Soc, May, 1885, vol. xh, p. 266. [Formations, with lists of characteristic fossils and full references.] The Wanganui System. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xviii, 336. [Full hst of species to date, Aug., 1885.] Description of some New Tertiary Shells from Wanganui. [Mostly col- lected by S. H. Drew.] Trans. N.Z. Inst., xv, 410. 1882. Description of Three New Tertiary Shells in the Otago Museum. [ComineUa striata and Zizyphinus hodgei, Wanganui ; Venus sulcata, Napier Limestone.] Trans. N.Z. Inst., viii, 383. Cimoliosaurus caudalis, n. sp. (abstract). Q.J. Geol. Soc, vol. xlix, 1893 ; Proc, p. 151. Oxford Chalk Fomminifera. N.Z. Joi;r. Sci., ii, 565. On the Reptilian Beds of New Zealand. Trans. N.Z. Inst., ix, 581. On CrassateUitcs trailli. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxviii, 65. On Conchothyra parasitica. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxvi, 358, pi. xhii. [See also a poor figure, upside down, fig. 20, p. 58, Cat. N.Z. Court Indian and Colonial Ex., 1886. Name spelled incorrectly.] Description of some New Tertiary MoUusca from Canterbury, and 68 Species from White Rock, Mount Harris, and Waihao. Trans. N.Z. Inst., ix, 593, pi. xvi [13 sp. fig.]. On a Trilobite from Reef ton. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., ser. ii, vol. ii, p. 257. Karrer, Felix. Die Foraminiferen-Fauna des tertiaren Grunsandsteines der Orakei-Bay bei Auckland. Mit 1 Tafel, xvi (69-86), Pal. Voy. " Novara." 1864. Kidston, R., and Gwyime-Vaughan, D. T. On the Fossil Osmund acece (0. dunlopi and 0. gihbiana), New Zealand new species from Jurassic rocks uear Gore. Trans. Roy. Soc. Ed., vol. xlv, pt. 3, p. 759, 1907 ; vol. xlvi, pt. 2, p. 213, 1909 ; vol. xlvi, pt. 3, p. 651, 1909. Harhlton. — Present Position of New Zealand PalfEontology. 61 Kirk, T. W. Description of New Tertiary Fossils. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xiv, 40&. Knight, Charles. On the Teeth of the Leiodon. Trans. N.Z. Inst,, vi, 358, pis. xxiv- . xxvi ; 1874. PI. xxiv — figs. A-F, Leiodon haumuriensis, Hector ; fig. G, Mauisaurus (tooth 1) ; fig. H, tooth of Plesiosaurus traversii. PI. XXV, Leiodon. PI. xxvi, Taniwhasaurus (?). Lydekker, R. Cat. Fossil Reptilia in the British Museum, vol. ii. [P. 113, Ichthyosaurus hectori, Lydd., I., Australia ; Hector, T., vi. p. 355 : p. 118, Cimo- liosaurus tenuis, Hector, Trans. N.Z. Inst., vi, 345 ; 1874 : p. 216, Cimoliosaurus haasti, Hector, Trans. N.Z. Inst., vi, 346 : p. 220, Cimoliosaurus australis, Owen, Rep. B.A., 1861, Trans, of Sec, p. 122 ; 1862 {Leiodon, Squalodon, Zcuglodon) : p. 245, Cimoliosaurus hoodi, Owen, Geol. Mag., Dec. i, vol. vii, 53 (1870), plesiosaur : p. 247, Plesiosaurus holmesi, Hector, Trans. N.Z. Inst., vi, 344 : Plesiosaurus traversi, Hector, Trans. N.Z. Inst., vi, p. 345 : Plesiosaurus mackayi, Hector, Trans. N.Z. Inst., vi, 345 : Mauisaurus latibranchialis, Hector, Trans. N.Z. Inst., vi, 350.] McKay, A. Mataura Plant Beds. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., No. 13, 1879-80, p. 39. Fossils from West Coast of South Island. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., No. 8, 1873-74, p. 74. Fossils from Hokonui District. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv,, No. 11, 1877-78, p. 49. Fossils from Mount Potts. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., No. 11, 1877-78, p. 91. Reports relative to Collection of Fossils in South-east District of Otago : Caversham to Catlin's River. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 59 ; 1872-73. Reports relative to Collection of Fossils made in East Cape District, North Island. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 116 ; 1872-73. On the Reptilian Beds of New Zealand. Trans. N.Z. Inst., ix, 581. Curiosity-shop, Rakaia River, Canterbury : Notes to accompany a Collection of Fossils from that Locality. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 75 ; 1879-80. On the Genus Rhynchonella. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xiii, 396. On a Diatom Deposit near Pakaraka, Bay of Islands, Trans. N,Z. Inst., xxiii, 375, and xxv, 375. Marshall, P. Some New Zealand Fossil Cephalopods. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xli, 143. Montgomery, A. Some Fossil Plants in Quartzite at Pukerau, Southland. N.Z, Jour. Sci., vol. i, 1882, p, 141. Murdoch, R, Description of some New Species of Pliocene Mollusca from the Wanganui District, with Notes on other Described Species. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxii, 216, Newton, E. TuUy. On two Chimeeroid Jaws from the Lower Greensand of New Zealand, June 7, 1876. Q.J. Geol. Soc, vol. xxxii, p. 326 ; 1876 (No. 127). [Ischyodus brevirostris, Agassiz, pi. xxi, figs, 1-5 ; Callorhynchus hectori, Newton, sp, nov., figs. 6-9,] 62 Transactions. Owen, Professor. - Notice of some Saurian Fossils discovered by J. H. Hood, Esq., at Wai- para, Middle Island, N.Z. [Plesiosaurus hoodii, Owen ; P. crassi- costatus, Owen.] Geol. Mag., 68, Feb. 1870, vol. vii, pi. iii. On Reptilian Fossils discovered by Mr. Cockburn Hood in New Zealand. Brit. Assoc. Rep.. 1861. p. 122. Park, James. On the Older Fossiliferous Rocks in Nelson. Rep. Geol. Explor. N.Z., 1885, p. 178. [Deals mainly with fossils from Silurian rocks at Baton River, a list of which is given — mostly brachiopods.] On the Geology of Western Portion of Wellington Province and Part of Taranaki. ' Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 1886-87, p. 24. [Gives extensive lists of Pliocene fossils from localities around Wanganui, and Waitotara.] Marine Tertiaries of Otago and Canterbury : [Extensive Lists of Fossils.] Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxvii, 489. Description of a New Species of Pecten from the Oamaru Series [P. {Pseudamussmm) Huttoni — both valves smooth.] Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxvii, 485. Purnell, C. W. On the Wanganui Tertiaries. Trans. N.Z. Inst., vii, 453. Shakespear, Ethel M.R., D.Sc. On some New Zealand Graptolites. Geol. Mag., n.s., dec. v, vol. v. No. 4, April 1908, p. 145. Stache, Dr. Guido. Die Foraminiferen der tertiaren Mergel des Whangaroa Hafnes (Prov. Auckland), Raglan. Mit 4 Tafeln, xxi-xxiv (159-304) Pal. Voy. " Novara," 1864. Stoliczka, Dr. Ferdinand. Fossil Bryozen aus dem tertiaren Grunsandsteine der Orakei - Bay bei Auckland. Mit 4 Tafeln, xvii-xx (87-158) Pal. Voy. " Novara," 1864. Tate, Ralph. On New Species of BeJemnites and Salenia from the Middle Tertiaries of South Australia. Q.J. Geol. Soc, vol. xxxiii, p. 257, No. 130 ; 1877. [Belemnites {Graphularia) senescens, n.s., fig. 1 (wood-cut). Also found in Oamaru and Kakanui beds. See Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 1881, p. xxix.] Tenison- Woods, Rev. J. E. Palaeontology of New Zealand, pt. iv [parts i, ii, and iii were never pub- lished] : Corals and Bryozoa of the Neozoic Period in New Zealand. Wellington, 1880. Pp. preface, i-v, 1-32. [3 plates (not numbered), 32 figs. This describes only the specimens exhibited in the N.Z. Court of the Sydney Exhibition.] Thomson, J. Allan. Fossils fiom Kakanui. [Three new species.] Trans. N.Z. Inst., xl, 98, pi. xiv. Traill, Charles. On the Tertiary Series of Oamaru and Moeraki. Trans. N.Z. Inst., ii, 166, linger. Dr. Franz. Fossile Pflanzenreste. Mit 5 Tafeln, pp. 1-3. Pal. Voy. '' Novara," Geol. Theil, I Bd., 2 Ab., pp. 1-13. Hamilton. — Present Position of New Zealand Palceontology. ' 63 Vine, G. E., juu. (Hamilton, A.), On the Foraminifera of the Tertiary Beds at Petane, near Napier. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xiii, 393. Waters, Arthur William. On Tertiary Cyclostomatous Bnjozoa from New Zealand. Q.J. Geol. Soc, vol. xliii, 1887, p. 337, pi. xviii. On Tertiary Chilostomatous Bryozoa from New Zealand. Q.J. Geol. Soc, 1887, vol. xliii, p. 40, pis. vi-viii. Woodward, Henry. On a New Fossil Crab from the Tertiary of New Zealand, collected by Dr. Hector (with a note by Dr. Hector). Q.J. Geol. Soc, vol. xxxii, p. 51, pi. vii ; 1875. [Harpactocarcinus tumidus. Rep. N.Z. Geol. Surv., 1873-74, p. 111.] Zittel, Dr. Karl A. Fossile Mollusken und Echinodermen (N.Z.). Mit 10 Tafeln, vi-xv, 15-68, Pal. Voy. " Novara." 1864. Fossile Mollusken und Echinodermen aus Neu-seeland ; nebst Beitragen von Herrn Bergrath Fr. Ritter von Hauer und Prof. E. Suess. 10 Plates. See Geol. Mag., vol. i, p. 73 ; 1864. Zittel, Count M. General Notes from Proc. Imp. Geol. Instit., Vienna, Jan. 20, 1863. On Hochstetter's Collection. See Q.J. Geol. Soc, 1863, vol. xix, pt. ii, p. 20. Art. IX. — Notes on New Zealand Lepidoptera. ' By E. Meyrick, B.A., F.R.S. Communicated by G. V. Hudson, F.E.S. [Read before the Wellington Philosophical Society, 5th May, 1909.] Caradrinid^. Melanchra decorata, Philp. Mr. Philpott has sent me a 5 of this species, with the request that I would describe it, as his description was taken from a faded specimen, and is therefore in some respects defective. 40 mm. Head mixed with whitish, olive-yellowish, pale-greenish, pale- crimson, and dark-fuscous colouring. Palpi ochreous- whitish irrorated with crimson, second joint with a streak of black irroration. Thorax with strong anterior bifid crest, light pinkish-ochreous streaked and on collar barred with blackish and light-greenish. Forewings pale ochreous suffused with light olive-greenish ; veins more or less marked with fine interrupted black lines ; first and second lines double, very indistinct, darker greenish, waved, forming pairs of small blackish spots on costa, second strongly retracted near costa so as to be parallel to costa for some distance ; median line dark 64: Transactions. fuscous, angulated near costa, on costa blackish ; orbicular and reniform finely outlined with black, orbicular rather large, suboval, oblique, reniform large, transverse-oval, pale whitish-rosy ; a broad irregular dark-fuscous streak above fold from base to termen, including a strong black line along fold, edged beneath by an irregular streak of white suffusion from before middle to subterminal line, on which it is bent upwards for a short distance ; subterminal line otherwise faintly indicated, pale, waved, traversing an oblique dark reddish-fuscous suffused streak above middle : cilia pale ochre- ous, suffused with greenish and barred with fuscous. Hindwings rather dark grey, tinged with pinkish, with suffused darker grey discal spot and terminal band : cilia light greyish-ochreous, with a greenish-fuscous shade. A distinct species. I have been asked to express an opinion on the classification adopted by Sir George Hampson in his " British Museum Catalogue " for this family, so far as it relates to New Zealand species. The matter cannot be discussed in detail without entering on a general survey of other famias ; but, speaking generally, I may say that I tee no reason at present to alter my previous views as to the limits and constitution of the New Zealand genera. I should not recommend any student of the group to adopt the generic divi- sions employed by Sir George Hampson imless he finds that he can in practice always clearly distinguish these genera by the structural characters employed, and also finds that these genera appear to him truly natural — that is, such that the species in each genus are more closely allied together through inheritance of common characters than they are to the species of any other genus. I do not myself find this, and am therefore at present unable to adopt his classification, which appears to me to conflict with, geographical distribution, instead of explaining it. Crambid^. Craxnbus thrincodes, n. sp. cf . 28 mm. Head white, with a light ochreous spot behind eye. Labial palpi fuscous, basal joint white. Maxillary palpi white, towards base dark fuscous. Antennae white, beneath brownish-ochreous. Thorax white, pa- tagia suffused with pale ochreous and sprinkled with dark fuscous. Ab- domen whitish-ochreous tinged with yellow. Forewings elongate, very narrow, gradually dilated, costa slightly arched, apex obtuse, termen slightly rounded, oblique ; light ochreous-broAmish, veins sprinkled with dark fuscous ; a broad white costal streak, suffused beneath, enclosing a narrow blackish costal streak from base almost to apex, which is divided into three portions by rather broad interruptions of white before middle and at f (representing origin of first and second lines) ; on lower margin of the white streak are a longitudinal projection at base, and an inwards-oblique pro- jection representing first line, space between and beyond these to near middle suffused with blackish ; beyond this a suffused white streak in disc to I, between which and costal streak is enclosed a round white discal spot at f edged with dark fuscous and centred with a fuscous dot ; second line from costal streak to dorsum before tornus white, sharply dentate, indented near dorsum : cilia light brownish, partially barred with white. Hind- wdngs whitish-ochreous ; a small spot of grey suffusion on costa before apex ; cilia ochreous- whitish. Kaitoke ; one specimen received from Mr. G. V. Hudson. This re- markable and very distinct species is intermediate in character between Meyrick. — Od JSeiv Zealand Lepidoptera. 65- flexuosellus, tuhualis, and cyclopicus, partaking nearly equally of the cha- racters of all three ; it is probably very local. TORTRICID^. Cacoecia acrocausta, Meyr. Additional specimens sent by Mr. A. Philpott show the variation of colouring to be very considerable ; one ^ is very uniformly coloured, fore- wings light brownish, with two or three black scales, costal extremity of central fascia and costal patch indicated by two very small darker spots, hindwings whitish-grey ; three females are whitish-ochreous more or less strongly tinged with yellow, with well-marked small yellow-brown or dark fuscous spots on costa in middle and at |, and sometimes one at |, dorsal extremities of basal patch and central fascia and sometimes intervening, space clouded with brown, hindwings ochreous-whitish. The species is,, however, always recognisable by the form of wing and palpi, the dark patch in apical cilia (least conspicuous in the ^ mentioned above), and stalking of 6 and 7 of hindwings. Phaloniad^. Heterocrossa adreptella, Walk. A ^ sent by Mr. A. Philpott has a streak of blackish suffusion along fold throughout, and another rising from this near base and traversing disc to |. CECOPHORID^, Borkhausenia paratrimma, n. sp. ^ . 15 mm. Head and thorax ferruginous-ochreous. Palpi ochreous irrorated with dark fuscous. Antennae dark grey. Abdomen grey. Fore- wings elongate, rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed, termen very obliquely rounded ; ferruginous-ochreous ; very indistinct oblique fasciae of fuscous irroration before and beyond middle ; some slight fuscous irroration towards apex : cilia ferruginous-ochreous. Hindwings and cilia grey. Invercargill, in December ; two specimens received from Mr. A. Philpott. Allied to B. siderodeta, but certainly distinct, being rather broader-winged ; differs by absence of dark fuscous irroration in forewings, and grey, not dark fuscous, hindwings. Borkhausenia amnopis, n. sp. $ . 16-18 mm. Head whitish-ochreous, sides of face sprinkled with grey. Palpi whitish-ochreous irrorated with dark fuscous, apex of joints- whitish. Antennae dark grey ringed with white, alternate rings wider. Thorax whitish-ochreous irrorated with dark fuscous. Abdomen dark grey,, segmental margins white. Forewings elongate, costa moderately arched, apex round-pointed, termen almost straight, very oblique ; whitish-ochreous, irregularly mixed with whitish and pale ferruginous-ochreous, and irrorated throughout with grey ; a short oblique blackish streak representing plical stigma ; first discal stigma moderate, round, blackish, beyond plical ; second discal larger, round, fuscous or dark fuscous, edged with blacky connected with tornus by a patch of fuscous suffusion ; a curved black irregular subterminal line, indented near costa and sinuate above dorsum, more or less edged with white anteriorly ; some fine blackish irroration towards costa before and beyond middle : cilia whitish-ochreous, more or 3— Trans. 66 Transactions. less sprinkled ^vith dark fuscous, especially on a tornal patch, beneath which is an ochreous-whitish patch. Hindwings grey ; cilia pale grey, with grey subbasal shade. Invercargill, from November to March ; two specimens received from Mr. A. Philpott. Allied to contextella, but somewhat broader- winged, and distinguished by the general grey irroration, black subterminal line, which is placed so that costal extremity is nearer apex, and grey hindwings. Zirosaris, n. g. Head with appressed hairs ; ocelli present ; tongue developed. An- tennae |, in S shortly ciliated (f). basal joint moderate, without pecten. Labial palpi long, recurved, second joint beneath with dense long rough projecting scales throughout, terminal joint shorter than second, slender, acute. Maxillary palpi rudimentary. Thorax with small posterior crest. Posterior tibiae clothed with hairs above. Forewings with tufts of scales on surface ; 2 nearly from angle, 7 and 8 stalked, 7 to apex, 11 from middle. Hindwings 1, elongate-ovate, cilia | ; 3 and 4 connate, 5-7 parallel. Allied to Trachypepla, but with quite different palpi. Zirosaris amorbas, n. sp. ^ . 19 mm. Head and thorax blackish, finely sprinkled with grey- whitish. Palpi blackish, second joint finely sprinkled with whitish, terminal joint with two oblique whitish lines. Antennae blackish, finely dotted with white. Abdomen dark fuscous, segmental margins white. Forewings elon- gate, rather narrow, costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely Totmded ; dark purplish-fuscous mixed with blackish ; basal area, an un- defined spot on middle of costa. and four diminishing spots on costa pos- teriorly finely sprinkled with whitish ; two raised tufts containing a few brownish-ochreous scales transversely placed in disc at about i ; stigmata formed by raised black tufts, plical beneath first discal, second discal trans- verse, edged with white posteriorly, above the two discal stigmata are a few pale brownish-ochreous scales ; a curved posterior line of whitish irroration indistinctly indicated : cilia dark grey with some white points and a blackish- grey shade. Hindwings dark fuscous, towards apex irrorated with blackish ; cilia fuscous, with blackish subbasal shade. Broken Eiver, Canterbury ; one specimen collected by Mr. J. H. Lewis, received through Mr. A. Philpott. Meyrick. — Lepidoptera from the Kennadec Islands. 67 Art. X. — Lepidoptera from the Kermadec Islands. By E. Meyrick, B.A., F.R.S. Communicated by G. V. Hudson, F.E.S. [Read before the Wellington Philosophical Society, Qth October, 1909.] In the following complete list of Lepidoptera taken, those species marked with an asterisk were identified by Mr. Hudson and not seen by me ; of the rest, examples were forwarded to me for identification. I will begin by summarising the geographical relations of this portion of the fauna,, and then give a systematic list of the species. The total number of species is 46. Of this number, 24 are common insects of wide general distribution, which, owing to their numerical abund- ance, powers of flight, and adaptation to food-plants of common occurrence, have found their way to suitable stations throughput a more or less large area of the warmer regions of the globe, though one or two of them may be sometimes transported by man : these 24 may be disregarded. It may be noticed that 14 of these have not yet occurred in New Zealand ; probably some will still be found there as stragglers, but in general the New Zealand climate is too temperate for them or their food-plants. Of the remaining 22 species, 4 occur also in New Zealand and Australia (one of these, Monopis ethelella, being semi-domestic, and recently found also in South Africa), 6 occur in New Zealand only, 1 in Australia only, 3 in othei' Pacific islands, and 8 are at present only known as endemic. Since, however, the Lepidoptera of the Pacific islands are very little known, it is highly likely that some at least of these species will be found here- after amongst other groups of these islands. Of the 8 endemic species, 2 are probably to be regarded as of New Zealand type, 3 of Pacific, and 3 of Australian, but it is quite possible that the 3 last may prove also to have Pacific representatives. In the present state of our knowledge I should think that the above facts indicated that the islands have always been considerably isolated, and have received their lepidopterous fauna by the accidental immigration, across a wide stretch of sea, of specimens carried by strong winds. In the following list of species the number of specimens taken is men- tioned in each case ; the full geographical distribution of each species is given ; and the food-plant of the larva is mentioned whenever known, as it must always be taken into account as a factor in distribution : — Arctiad^. * Nyctemera annulata, Boisd. 12 specimens. New Zealand. Larva on Senecio. * Utetheisa pulchella, L. 10 specimens. Europe, Asia, Africa, Australia, Pacific islands. New Zealand. Larva on grasses, &c. Caradrinid.^. Leucania loreyi, Dup. 3 specimens. Southern Europe, southern Asia, Africa, Australia, Fiji. 3*— Trans. 68 Transactions. * Leucania unipuncta, Hw. 7 specimens. North and South America, Europe, Asia, Australia, New 'Zealand. Larva on grasses. Tiracola plagiata, Walk. 5 specimens. Central America, India, Malay Islands, Australia, Pacific islands. Larva on Emilia. * Heliothis armigera, Hb. 5 specimens. North and South America, Europe, Asia, Africa, Aus- tralia, Pacific islands. New Zealand. Larva on many vegetables and other plants. * Agrotis ypsilon, Rott. 2 specimens. North and South America. Europe, Asia, Africa, Australia, New Zealand. Larva on many plants. Caradrina reclusa, Walk. 11 specimens. India, Malay Islands, New Guinea, Fiji. Spodoptera littoralis, Boisd. 18 specimens. Southern Europe, Asia, Africa, Australia, Pacific islands. Xarva on Lantana. Eriopus Maillardi, Gn. 8 specimens. Africa, southern Asia, New Guinea, Pacific islands. Perigea capensis, Gn. 14 specimens. Africa, Asia, Australia, Pacific islands. Larva on Acanthaceo'. Plusiad.e. Hydrillodes surata, n. sp. ^ c ce ce i - ce -a ce © ce 43 EH o o p o t>0 bC © cS s ce Eh ce +i ^ . j^ ce" ^~ cS -d © ^ bO P ^ Eh © P? p © o bC © -3 ce ce -^ bD bC ce p P ^ c3 ce ^_ ^ Ph 1 ~ ce ^ — ce 'S EH \A a p P © EH H bC P © tf bc P ce r-l P . ce- -^ I c3 p H © © ce ce -d bC - c8 . O © ce _ ® P p bc P ce P5 © © o ."S bit) © EH ce bD P" © bC P ee ;-< _ P-O - 4> K ce P3 - ce bC P - c8 ^ '-5 ce •rH M 5 « rP h ^ P - — c8 ^ Pi 6 tH '3d cS 1 ^ P3 DowNES. — Early History of Rangitikei. 81 Suiidon and Awa-huri usually called Mount Stewart), in the bush ; but again he disturbed them, and they flew on to Tauraata-patiti. Next they alighted in the bush called Te Rakau-hou, near Mount Stewart. Ma- tangi went into the bush, but found that the birds did not stay ; and, as the trees were young, he gave the name above mentioned. Again they alighted in the bush, where he slept with his face to the ground ; there- fore he called that place Te Whaka-moe-takapu (near Kaka-riki), (railway- bridge near Greatford). Still following the birds, he arrived at a new country, and, taking a pole, he took a leap with it, calling the place Toko- rangi (a hill between Halcombe and the river on the clif?s above the One- puhi Pa). Still following them,, he reached a stream where he recited larakias ; therefore he called the stream Wai-tapu (near Rata, one of the boundaries of the Manawa-tu Block). Again he followed the birds, and caught the sound of them, and so called the place Paroro-rangi. There are two ranges meeting at an angle — one is Paroro-rangi ; on the other he stood and blew his horn, calling it Puto-rino (between Hunterville and the Rangi-tikei River). Still following the birds, he reached the upper Rangi- tikei, and, seeing that they had taken flight inland, he called the spot Tiro- hanga ; but the place is now called Te Papa-o-Hauiti (Rata). He followed them to the top of the ridge, where he halted and stamped on the ground, and so called the place Tapuae (a trig, shown on most maps). Again he went on, and, seeing them high up in the air above him, he called the place 0-tama-kapua. Then he went along the river and again blew a blast on his horn, and there he called the place Puta-tara. Still on up the river he went till he came to a place where he grounded his stafi, and called it Te Tokotoko-o-Matangi. Then he climbed the range and reached the top, calling it Whaka-ara-waru. From this place he watched the birds cross the river, and saw them alight ; therefore he called the place Rangi-tauria. He was now almost exhausted, and gave up the chase ; but the birds were also tired, and could not fly any further : so he and his children (for his children had followed him all the way) caught and killed them, and there they stayed and settled, and his children are still living at Rangi-tauria to this day. " If you ask me," continued the old man who gave the narrative, '' whether I have been there and seen them, I answer Yes. I have seen the place, and have seen his children. They have been changed into * spirits of the brook ' — i.e., taniwhas — because they disobeyed the voice of their father when he told them to bring some water. I have myself seen the posts of his house, for they are still standing (450 years since that house was built). I have seen his children with my own eyes. If we all went up to them it would make no difference. Many attempts have been made to secure them with ropes, but in vain — they can release themselves at once by their magic powers. Their names are Hine-te-iwaiwa and Horo- puta, her brother, and they are still at that place, for there Ma-tangi left them." The lake which Ma-tangi's children still inhabit is near 0-kaha- rau, and is called 0-toea. His house was built at Whiti-anga, near the lake, and it was there that our friend saw the totara posts. It was Ma- tangi who brought to this land the atua Kahu-kura, which came from Hawaiki in the Takitumu canoe. This atua was first taken to Te Awa- rua, but in the time of Te Ngahoa it was removed to Owhioi. All inquiries regarding the shape and power of this atua have yielded but little informa- tion beyond the fact that it was very large, and shone like fire, something after the shape of a comet, and had power of flight or movement. (Other 82 Transactionii. accounts affirm that Kahu-kura was lost at the Huka Falls when Tama- tea's canoe went over.) After Ma-tangi's children left him he was returning to his old home, accompanied by his dog. He travelled down the Rangi- tikei River, but had the misfortune to lose his dog ; and, as its name M^as Ranga-tira, he went about calling " Ranga-tira, Ranga-tira " ; so that place was ever afterwards known as Ranga-tira (a well-known block between the Pou-rewa and Rangi-tikei Rivers). Many of Ma-tangi's descendants, intermarried with Ngati Hau-iti. Table 3. Ma-tangi Tapairu Hitamia-aro I . Te Au-te-peao Forgotten Rangi-tua-uira I Tiimokai Tuhi I Hapainga-te-Rangi I Tangaio Hiiie-hua,noa (f.) = Te Wai-hoho (m.) Matangi 2nd Riia-anga I Whaka-urua Putai Te Kiri-kai-ngaere Taongi Potaka Utiku-Potaka chilcU'en I grandchildren. [Note. — One of Utiku Potaka's grandchildren is named after one of the taniwhas — namely, Hine-te-iwaiwa.] Chapter II. The history of the next period is almost a blank. The early history of the Ngati Apa proper, as far as their traditions give us any enlighten- ment, extends back some twelve generations, when the founders of the tribe came into the district under the following circumstances : — Apa-hapai-taketake, a son of Ruatea, who came in the Kura-haupo canoe, was an ancestor of the Ngati Apa, and to him this somewhat ill-fated tribe can trace the beginning of their misfortunes, as they trace their names. He seems to have coveted a pet moa [he mokai) belonging to Ngati Tu-whare-toa, and, not being able to restrain his desires, he stole the bird and made off with it ; but, unfortunately for him, in this adventure he fell over a cliff and received an injury that resulted in permanent lameness ; DowNES. — Early History of Rangitikei. 83 lience his companions, with fine humour, ever after denominated him Apa- koki (Hop-and-go-one). Being a man of energy, he managed to get oft' with the bird in spite of his accident ; and, if tradition speaks truly, he and his friends obtained a fine meal. When Ngati Tu-whare-toa discovered the theft, they naturally felt aggrieved, and soon started out seeking utu for the stolen moa. They returned home well satisfied, bringing with them Hine-moatu, the wife of Apa-koki. This roused the ire of Apa-koki, and in great wrath he seized the kumaias of Kawerau ; whereupon Ngati Tu- whare-toa, in equal wrath, came down on Ngati Apa under the chief Awa- tope, and drove them from their home at Puta-uaki, near the Awa-o-te- atua (Mount Edgecumbe, in the Bay of Plenty) ; and so they fled, and came to Manga-nui, on the upper Rangi-ta-iki ; but Awa-tope still pursued, and forced them south till they came to Roto-a-ira, where they settled. The following table shows Awa-tope as a descendant from Kahu- gunu : ; — Tamatea Table 4. Kahu-nganu Whaene Toroa (Capi Taka Rua-ihonga Hou-rangi 1 Tahuna-a-te-ra Uira-roa Awa-nui-a-rangi Rongo-tangi-awa 1 Rongo-tangi-awa Ira-peke ! These are the Ngati Awa of Whaka-tane. Awa-tope. Seventeen generations more to the people living in the Bay of Plenty at the present time. They had not been established at Roto-a-ira very long before trouble arose owing to a dog being killed. The animal's name was Te Rangi-a- kopu-takere, and it belonged to a man named Ripo-a-rangi, of Ngati Tu- whare-toa. The man who brought this trouble on the Ngati Apa people not only killed the dog, but he roasted and ate it when in the bush by him- self. As he was suspected, a woman smelt his breath while he was asleep, and, detecting the dog-smell, quickly reported her discovery to the owner. In revenge for the death of his favourite, Ripo-a-rangi gathered his family and came down upon the Ngati Apa, taking the pas Tauwhare-papa-a- uma and Motu-roa. After these pas were taken, peace was made, which lasted till a man named Ma-tangi killed his wife Hine-mihi in a fit of jealousy because of Miromiro, who had been paying attention to her. As her relatives belonged to Ngati Tu-whare-toa, the latter besieged a pa belonging to Ngati Apa called Rangi-te-taia. Tu-te-tawhoa, the leader of the Ngati Tu-whare-toa, and his party approached the pa on one side, while he sent another party to the opposite side ; but when Wai-keri and Rakei-poho, of the besieging forces, entered the pa they found it empty, the Ngati Apa having evacuated during the night. The pursuit was fol- lowed up, and the chief Ma-tangi killed, as well as a great number of his people, while many were taken prisoners. Those of the latter who were 84 Transactions. spared were taken to Inland Patea, where they were kindly treated. One of the prisoners taken on that occasion was Te Rehu, Ma-tangi's son. Afterwards when he gxew up he escaped and went to seek help from the Ngati Tama to avenge his father's death. They responded, and the war- party so raised went to Taiiranga Taupo (about twelve miles from Toka- anu, on the Toka-anu - Taupo Road), and there attacked the Ngati Tu- whare-toa at the Horo-tanukti Pa. They seem to have been repulsed, one of their chief men.. Te Iwi-kinakia, being killed and eaten. The attackers now became the attacked, for as they returned home they were followed up by Ngati Tu-whare-toa, who killed Tuma-kau-rangi. of the Ngati Tama Tribe, and Haere-te-kura (Hau-iti's son), of Ngati Hau-iti. at Rangi-po. Such a defeat required to be wiped out with blood, so another party Avas organized to avenge those deaths. Tama-kai-tangi and his brother Hika- kainga, also Hau-iti, accompanied that war-party, and they obtained what they sought, for they captured the pa Hawera-roa, and then went on to Kapo-a-rangi, where they killed Rakei-atu, but they spared Ripo-rangi, who was captured by Hika-kainga. The war-party then went on to Taupo, where they Avere attacked by the Ngati Tu-whare-toa ; but peace was made when it was knoAvn that Ripo-rangi had been spared in the previous fight ; so that war-party then returned to their homes. In the meantime the Ngati Apa people had rapidly been extending themselves throughout this new country. From the time they arrived at Roto-a-ira they had been sending companies south, so that when the main body migrated they had settled pas and extensive cultivation in many of the inland districts, as well as right down the Rangi-tikei River to its mouth. It was soon after Ngati Apa were settled in this new country that Hau- iti (the ancestor of the Ngati Hau-iti Tribe) left his fighting-pa. Ara-o- tawhaki, and started for Taupo to avenge the death of his son Haere-te- kura, who had been killed in battle by the Ngati Tu-whare-toa people, as related. He left his pas 0-tau-eru and Rongo-motumotu at Ranga-tira in charge of his younger brother Ka-ama ; but Ngati Apa took advantage of Hau-iti's absence, killed and ate Ka-ama, seized Rongo-motumotu (on the Rangi-tikei River, near Rata), as well as several other pas in the vicinity. A messenger was hurriedly sent to Hau-iti. who returned with all possible haste and pursued Ngati Apa, who took refuge in Ta-pora-pora, a pa belonging to Hau-iti. Driven out of this place, they fled to Te Ara- o-tawhaki, evacuated by Hau-iti when he left for Taupo. After the fall of this pa they retreated to Puapua-tanaki, one of the pas which they had taken from Hau-iti, and here they found a secure retreat. After this Hau- iti was killed by Pukeko, a Ngati Apa man, at a place which still bears his name, Te Papa-o-Hau-iti (Rata) ; and his descendants sought to avenge his death by attacking a pa called Oti-haupu, on the south-east of the Rangi-tikei River. They were successful in this venture, for a great num- ber of th« Ngati Apa people were killed, but a few, among whom were Hatea and Rangi-whiowhio, were spared, ^^^len the Ngati Hau-iti had taken this pa, they assaulted the Wharewhare-riki and Po-takataka pas (on the 0-tama-kapua Block), both of which were taken. The Ngati Ha^i- iti were then satisfied, and returned home. The large force that attacked these pas was ga+hered from Inland Patea, 0-tara. 0-tau-eru. and the upper Rangi-tikei, and the fighting took place in the time of \ATiare-pu- rakau, contemporary with Tama-te-raka and Iro-kino, and was in revenge for the death of Hau-iti. DowNES. — Earhj History of Rangitikei. 85 6D 'S - o.- p s -g- eg O o 3 ° ce -*? — S — "^ - c E- ^ c3 O C -3- o — u C n W e3 bC S . ee 3 35 '3 I -a s> '5d B c3 3 a ;sj M a> ■*- -*^ ►-) (D .9 offi 3 -i ce Oi o J3 ee 3 ■" ce to 3 ce ;-i 3 H EH o c3 c o . ce iz; .3 ' o ce 3 E- 3 0 ^ e3 0 00 * 3 ^ ' ■ Pi 86 Transactiotu Chapter III. Anotlier dispute took place in the upper Rangi-tikei district about the time of Whare-pu-rakau (see Table 2), when the Ngati Wahine Tribe came from Here-taunga (Hastings). They came, a great army, with boasting and pride, but they left with defeat and disaster, for they were opposed by Tamapo and the sons of Tu-ka-roua at Whiri-nga-otau, and there they left their pride as food for their adversaries. Those who escaped the battle hid in a cave called Ana-roa at Atu-pae, where they also were cut off by hunger and exposure. As soon as their friends became aware of the fate of the taua, they determined on revenge, and raised a second party to send over to conquer the victors ; but again their intentions were brought to nought. It seems that a lady n^yned Punaki-ao (see Table 2), from the upper Rangi-tikei, was taken as a wife by Taraia (her own husband being away at Whanga-nui at the time), and the two fled away to Here-taunga, and dwelt there at Puke-hamoamoa. After a time Tutu-mohuta, who was Puna- ki-ao's father, left his home at Awa-rua and went to visit Taraia and his daughter. As soon as he arrived, Taraia asked him if he had met a war- party on his journey, and, as he replied in the negative, Taraia advised him to return immediately, telling him of the intention of the Ngati Tama- wahine to take Patea. Without loss of time Tutu-mohuta returned to Te Awa-rua, but found he was just too late, for the fires were still burn- ing where the war-party had cooked the father of Whiti-kaupeka, who belonged to Ngati Hau-iti ; but the enemy themselves had gone. The chiefs of the Here-taunga party were Rua-te-km-i, Tawhao, and Rangi- tau-ira ; and the manner of their attack was as follows : Coming upon Whiti-kaupeka's party suddenly, they feigned hunger, and asked Whiti for his dog as food, and when this was denied them they killed the dog. After it was cooked they offered some to Whiti, who, wishing to prevent trouble, took it ; but while he was eating they suddenly set upon him and killed him. As soon as Tutu-mohuta found out which direction the war- party had taken, he and his wife followed them up, and came upon them at Manga-weka. The war-party tried to detain them until the morning, intending to kill them during the night ; but they escaped unobserved, and reached 0-hinga-iti, where Tumehau and Tumore, with a large party, had gathered to resist the invaders. Immediately on their arrival a meeting was held to decide on the best course of action, and while they were gathered the war-party came upon them unexpectedly, being in the pursuit of Tutu- mohuta. They fought there at 0-hinga-iti, the inland tribes combining to resist the invaders ; with the result that Ngati Wahine were defeated, and their leaders Rua-te-kuri and Tawhao slain ; but Rangi-tau-ira and Tu- purupiu-u escaped. But again misfortune dogged their steps, for, having reached Manga-o-hunu on their way back to Here-taunga, they were over- taken by a severe snowstorm, so they took shelter in the cave 0-huake (on the Rangi-po Plains) ; but, as the cold continued, they, and their fol- lowers also, perished through hunger, cold, and exposure. In this fight the invaders killed Tamapo, who had previously resisted them ; but other- wise they had but little success, while their own party was practically exterminated. After this fight Ngati Tama, Ngati Whiti, and Ngati Hau-iti lived together as neighbours on the west side of Moa-whango. Soon after this affair Tahuna, a Ngati Apa chief, and his party travelled from Whanga-nui to Rangi-tikei to visit Whare-pu-rakau. All went well DowNES. — Early History oj Rangitikei. 87 till one day Whare-pu-rakau returned from a hunting expedition in the bush and found his son Kangi-pa-whatiri covered with blood, and upon inquiry he learnt that Tahuna's child had beaten his son. He therefore killed Tahuna's child, and the father, in fear for his own life, fled back to Whanga-nui, where he collected a war-party about eight hundred strong and travelled back to Tawhiti, on the Rangi-tikei River, where Whare-pu- rakau had gathered Ngati Tama, Ngati Whiti, and Ngati Ohuao to resist the inevitable attack. For a time Tahuna and his party camped on the river-bed, subsisting on Whare-pu-rakau's kumaras, which they stole at night; but, as soon as Whare-pu-rakau's people discovered the position Tahuna had taken up, they resorted to stratagem, and threw a great quantity of wood and rubbish in the river to make Tahuna think a flood was coming, and that they (Whare-pu-rakau's party) would not be able to cross over to the attack. Tahuna's party saw the rubbish, and hurriedly left the river-bed and went inland ; but while so engaged Whare-pu-rakau attacked them. In the fight that followed (known as Waha-kaka-roa) it is related that Whare-pu-rakau had a certain taiaka, but he was struck and disabled by the enemy, consequently was unable to use it. He afterwards made a proverb to the effect that if his weapon had only been long enough he would not have been womided ; hence his uncle took the name of Tu- whaka-uru. When wounded, Whare-pu-rakau discarded his taiaha and took a long spear, and, although wounded, succeeded in killing Tahuna, whose party, seeing their leader fall, gave way and fled. They were pursued night and day, and it is said their bones may still be seen along that path (excepting perhaps Tahuna's ribs, which were made into a bird-snare, which snare is still in a matai-tree somewhere at Moa-whango). This may be so, but we pakehas doubt if a snare would last for twa hundred years exposed to all weathers ; yet it is asserted that some of Whare- pu-rakau's spears are still to be seen on Mr. Batley's farm at Moa-whango. They are imbedded in a large and hollow cabbage-tree, where they were hidden, the tree eventually growing round them and gripping them as part of the tree itself. It is also related that Whare-pu-rakau was a very athletic man, and, near his place on the upper Rangi-tikei, he on several occasions saved himself from pursuit by clearing at a jump a narrow part of the river where the cliffs nearly meet. No other man would venture this hazardous feat ; so he could defy his enemies, and often did so. He lost his life by drowning in the Rangi-tikei River. As his party were crossing a dangerous ford, his wife got into difficulties, and in going back to assist he himself lost his life, though his wife was saved. Again Whanga-nui started on the war-path against Ngati Tama, whom they found living on the land between Moa-whango and Hau-tapu. A battle was fought in w^hich Whanga-nui was defeated, Nuko and Tuahungia being slain. The invaders fled, and were pursued by Ngati Tama as far as Wai-paruparu. After this invasion the inhabitants of the Potaka Pa (just above the Awa-ua Pa) heard that they were about to be attacked by the Ngati Apa and other tribes. At this time there were no Nga^i Tama in the pa — they were all away at Taupo ; while most of the Ngati Whiti and Ngati Upoko-iri were away at Here-taunga. • Before they could obtain assistance the taua came down on them. Te Kahu-o-te-rangi, of the Ngati Apa, and Nga-makako, of the Tu-heke-rangi, were the principal chiefs, and their followers immbered eight hundred men, gathered from Whanga-nui, Whanga-ehu, and Turakina. When the taua reached Potaka, they found that the people of this pa (mostly Ngati Hine-manu), although warned of 88 Transacticns. their coming, were quite unprepared, for a number of men, among whom was the chief Whanau, were surprised and killed while gathering matai- berries. Then the pa was surrounded and the siege commenced, but after four days Te Kata managed to slip out of the pa unseen, and escaped through the enemies' ranks to seek assistance. He fled to Here-taunga to bring over the people of the Ngati Hine-manu Tribe, who were living there. He was successful, and the chiefs Tao-rangi. Maka. Toia-iho, and Tu-te-rangi, with their men, hastened back with Te Kata to help their kinsmen. Under cover of darkness they obtained entrance to the pa by ropes being thrown to them ; and next morning, being so strengthened, a sortie was made on the besiegers, who quickly discovered, during the fight that ensued, how the garrison had been strengthened. 80 many of the enemy were killed by this sudden onslaught that they thought discretion the better part of valour, and so decided to sue for peace. Te Kaliu-o-te-rangi called out his desire to Tao-rangi, who agreed to the request, so Te Kahu-o-te-rangi was taken into the pa, where presents of food were made and hakas sung, and so the peace was confirmed. In this fight, which was called Tini-o-te-kotiri (on accomit of the large number taking part in it), the Ngati Apa party killed Tama-kahuri-rangi, of the pa, and his death was afterwards avenged by a party from Te Awa-rua Pa, who travelled as far as Manga-whero taking prisoners, who were killed and eaten. They also journeyed to Turakina, where the Ngati Tu-heke- rangi and the Ngati Wai-riki were severely defeated. But though defeated in this fight they were by no means conquered : the spirit of battle only burned with a fiercer flame, and the shame and ignominy which tarnished their proud name had to be wiped out at all cogt. On reaching Whanga-nui they at once reconstructed, more determined than ever to wipe out their defeats, and this time cautiously divided their forces, one half going to attack Ngati Hine-manu and Ngati Hau-iti on the east side of the Rangi- tikei River, and the other half going to attack Ngati Tama and Ngati Whiti on the western side. This time the fortune of war was with them — Ngati Tama were defeated, and their chief Te Hainga and many others slain. And so the gentle game of " tit for tat " went on. Ngati Tama now sought utu for those deaths, and started from Motu-kawa with vengeance quivering in every nerve of their bodies. Again they were successful at Turakina, where the chief Tap utu and several of his men met their death and " chief's burial." After this victory Ngati Tama returned to the western side of the Rangi-tikei, and when they arrived they fomid new troubles had commenced, and fresh work was in store for them ; for their kinsman Rangi-pa-whitiri (Whare-pu-rakau's son) had just been despatched to the happy hunting- grounds. This chief had two wives, one belonging to the Ngati Kahu-ngunu, and the other, whose name was Hine-iro, was related to the Ngati Tama and the Ngati Whiti tribes. Rangi-pa-whitiri collected food for a feast, and took the food so gathered to the first-mentioned wife as a present to her. Hine-iro was very angry about this, for she considered the food had been gathered on her land, consequently it should not have been given to a stranger ; so she gathered together a war-party of the Rua-kopiri and killed her husband Rangi-pa-wliitivi. When the enraged lady's taua had com- pleted this mission they returned to Whanga-nui. Then Ngati Tama and Ngati ^Vhiti started off to avenge his death under the chiefs Hoko-o-te-rangi and his uncle Te Kiore ; and at Pakaka (Karioi) they killed Tu-rere, and captured his son Tukai-ora. When Tukai-ora was taken prisoner he was loaded with calabashes, which were to hold the flesh DowNES. — Early History of Rangitikei. 89 of the slain after it had been rendered down. But he, watching for an opportunity, threw them off, killed four of his captors, and escaped. From this great warrior descended Pehi Turoa of Whanga-nui, thus : — Table 0. Tukai-ora i Hitana I Pehi Taroa Te Rangi-hopuata 1 Topia Turoa I Kingi Kingi 2, of Whanga-nui. As Hoko-o-te-rangi and his party were returning after their victory they were followed by a Nga Rangi taua from Whanga-nui, who came upon them at Wai-tangi. During the fight that took place Te Kiore saw that hi? party was likely to be worsted, so he called out to Hoko-o-te-rangi, " Escape while you can ; go and live as a chief at Mokai Patea ; I Avill carry on the struggle without you." Hoko-o-te-rangi replied, " I will not liide myself, for I am a chief. As I have sought this quarrel. I will carry it through and fight the enemy." So they continued the fight, and soon botli Te Kiore and Hoko-o-te-rangi were killed, and their party utterly routed. The survivors fled to Mokai Patea. It may be mentioned that Hine-iro and Te Kiore were brother and sister. After Tukai-ora escaped and reached Whanga-nui, word came through, that Ngati Whiti and Ngati Tama had killed Tuhongia and Miki on the west side of the Moa-whango. AVhanga-nui went out. fought, and gained a battle, in retaliation ; but, not satisfied, took out another war-party, and captured a pa called Kiri-weka, Avhere Rangi-wha-rawarawa, Horua, and Kai-toha were taken prisoners. After this, Ngati Apa murdered Te-ihu-tu at the 0-tau-eru Pa (Taupo), which was occupied by Ngati Hau-iti ; and so Ngati Hau-iti came down in full force on the Ngati Apa, whom they met in open field, and. after a severe struggle, defeated. Then they attacked the pa at Kaka-riki, which they took, killing a gi-eat number, and making several prisoners, among whom was Puao. In revenge for this Ngati Apa killed the chief Tu-tohu at Pou- rewa, at a place called Pukiore (Pukiore is west of Makohine Viaduct, near the Pou-rewa), and his death was avenged at the Pa-kihi-roa battle, fought at Tara-ketu (Manawa-tu). This battle was fought at the pa called by this name, and Ngati Apa were defeated. Again they were defeated in a fight where both sides met in open country at upper Tutae-nui. Ngati Hau-iti, not yet satisfied, assaulted the pa of Taumata-maire, in the district of Whaka-tara, w^hich they took, and tlipn returned home. Ngati Apa now sought reprisals at Mokai Patea. where they met Ngati Hau-iti and killed Repa-rangi and Te Pu-o-te-rangi. the former chief belongiiag to Ngati Whiti and also Ngati Tu-whare-toa. On hearing of this, Ngati Hau-iti started in pursuit of the Ngati Apa forces, and overtook them the next day, and in the action that ensued the entire Ngati Apa party was cut off, as they were few in number, while Ngati Hau-iti were strong, having obtained help from the Ngati Whiti, the Ngati Tu-whare-toa, and the Ngati Tu-mokai 90 Transactions. tribes. Flushed with victory, they still pushed on in hope of further success, when they were met and defeated by another taua of Ngati Apa at the battle of Te Taku-o-te-rangi, at a place called Korero-mai-waho (now Great - ford). This defeat was avenged at the battle of One-puhi, where the com- bined forces of Ngati Hau-iti and Ngati Whiti overthrew Ngati Apa, who were not strong enough to resist them at that place, but who followed Ngati Hau-iti on their return journey, and overtook them at Pari-roa, on the O-roua ; but the Ngati Apa force, under the chief Takiao, was defeated, and their leader slain. Some time after this fight at Pari-roa there was another great engagement, at Kai-inanga (a pa near the junction of the Hau-tapu and Rangi-tikei rivers), in which Ngati Apa were victorious, although fighting against the combined tribes ; but before this, and during the interval between the two battles, there came from the north the Tu-whare — Te Rau-paraha expedition under the leadership of Waka Nene, Patu-one, Te Rau-paraha, Tu-whare, and others. They had a few guns in the party, and, as this was the first time these weapons were seen on this coast, the bavoc they \\T.-ought was tremendous. This taua came down somewhere about 1819 or 1820, and it was this journey that gave Te Rau-paraha the idea of migrating to Kapiti, to be near the centre of European trade, which idea he put into practice about 1822, when his whole tribe (the Ngati Toa) removed thither. In order to strengthen his position, he induced the Ngati Rau-kawa to make hehes (some of which we are able to describe) to his newly acquired land. From this time up to about 1825 the great Ngati Toa chief was actively combining business with pleasure in endeavotiring to exterminate the whole of the Mua-upoko Tribe. Then the Ngati Rau- kawa chief Te Whata-nui, who had previously accompanied two or three •of the hehes, intervened, and stayed his hand by taking up his residence at Horo-whenua, where eventually he died. Here he was looked up to as an ally and protector by the Mua-upoko, which indeed he was, for it was certainly he who saved these people from annihilation. Full accounts of these afiairs have been published in " The Life and Times of Rau-paraha,'^ and also in the Jour. Polynesian Soc. in a fine paper by Mr. S. Percy Smith, entitled " Wars of the Northern against the Southern Tribes " ;* therefore little more need be said. Before adding a few brief notes of these wars, some further details of fighting that occurred prior to these events can be given. " After the capture of Kiri-weka," said Major Kemp, in evidence given before the Land Court at Whanga-nui, " my grandparent went with a war-party to a place called Opetaka, on the Rangi-tikei River, and there killed Taka-rere and Jlau-awa, and made prisoners of Ro-onga, Te Maka-taha-hapa, Pu-ronga, and others of the Ngati Wliiti, Ngati Tama, and Ngati Hau-iti tribes. Afterwards took place the expedition of Te Mawai, the ancestor of Mohi Matene. He and his people went to Awa-rua, and, as visitors, stayed a «hort time with the people there, until one day Tara-mai-nuku said to Te Mawai ' Get out yom* weapons.' By these words Te Mawai interpreted trouble, so he got up with his spear in one hand and a pouivhenua in the other, warned his company, and then advanced to the assault-at-arms. In the fray that followed, Te Mawai killed Tara-mai-nuku, and then killed all the people of the pa ; and no payment was ever exacted from the Whanga-nui tribes for their victory. * I am greatly indebted to Mr. Smith tor the use of his notes, also for his many •corrections and suggestions. DowNES. — Early History of Rangitihei. 91 " At Otairi, close to Ohingaiti, on the river-flats, some of Hakaraia's people were killed — namely, Rangi-kau, Kahu-aki, and others. Payment was obtained at Whaka-rau-wai, on the other side of the Rangi-tikei River, where the chiefs Ko-pare, Te Marama, and others were killed. The war- party then crossed the river to the west side of Rangi-tikei, and there Moe- roa "called out, ' Who can reach up to heaven ? ' Te Ope answered, ' I can ' ; and he straightway put in a post as a sign to stop all quarrels (probably meaning that nothing could be gained by incessant fighting, and a better way to reach the desired goal would be to make peace). As a result of this fighting Ngati Tama fled from the district, and some settled at Kai-inanga,. outside of the Rangi-tikei borders ; but before doing so some of them went to Oroua and there killed Pourau. " When they had settled at Kai-inanga, Moe-roa, Avho belonged half to Ngati Apa, and was there before they came, became alarmed, and thought,. ' Perhaps these people will become strong and take my land ' ; so he gathered his people, and fell on the Ngati Tama at Kai-inanga, and killed Rere-mai, Pokai-kaka, and Te Oti, as well as a great number of the people. Tahataha made a prisoner of Hine-iti, whom he saved alive." So ends Kemp's version of the Kai-inanga fight ; but the real cause seems to have been infringement of the sacred law of tapu. A chief named Poto died (Poto's wife Koipoa was Hori Kii\gi's sister), and, in order to have his head properly preserved, a man named Hia-kai cut it ofi and com- menced operations upon it. While so engaged he was strictly tapu, and before this was removed by the tohungas he was accused of having fed himself with his own hands. Being unable to clear himself from the charge, both he and a man named Te Hopu were killed at Otawiri by Ngati Hau-iti. Te Hopu was not under the tapu at the time, but, as he warned Hia-kai, he was in some way mixed up in the quarrel, and had to pay the penalty with his life. As both men were connected with Ngati Apa, this tribe sent Te Ahuru to the pa where the Ngati Hau-iti and Ngati Tama were camped, on the pretext that he was the bearer of huia-feathers for the chief Pou-kaka. But his visit was a mere blind — he went to spy out the weak places of the pa ; and when he returned with his report to the Ngati Apa they attacked in full force, and the battle of Kai-inanga ensued, in which the combined tribes were badly beaten with great slaughter. A fuller and better account of Te Ahuru's visit to the pa was related to me by Whatahoro, who said, — " Te Ahuru's wife was in the pa before the attack, and, as he had previously arranged a call with her, he an-ived at the place in advance of the Ngati Apa force, and when night fell he whistled across the gully for her to gTD to him. As he continued whistling the people of the pa said, ' Listen to the wekas — surely bad weather is approaching ' ; and they thought no more, but turned over and went to sleep. When they were all asleep, Hine-rua, Te Ahuru's wife, quietly went out to meet her husband, and when they met he said to her, ' Tell me which is the weakest part of the pa, and what do the people intend doing to-morrow.' She replied, ' The only unpro- tected part is by way of te paepae {i.e., place of public convenience), which is quite unguarded. And to-morrow the people divide into three parts, one party of men going to dig fern-root, another going to the river to catch eels, and another, of women, going to the bush to gather hinau-berries.' " Then Te Ahuru returned to his people, and showed them all these things ; and on the morrow the Ngati Apa taua went round— first to the party who were down at the river engaged at their eel-spearing, whom they surprised and killed ; then on to the place where the fern-root-digging 92 Transactions. was occupying the attention of the men, who also fell a prey to the taua ; then they attacked the women who were gathering the hinau-berries : and so, when the Ngati Apa entered the pa by way of te paepae, there was no one there but the old and young to defend the place. Consequently Kai- nianga fell, and great was the fall thereof." This greatly weakened them, for just before this fight Ngati Hau-iti had lost a gTeat number of their people owing to a great makutu. the be- witching of the Ngati Hau-iti by the Ngati Apa. It seems the latter had fled for protection to Otara after Tu-whare's fight. The Otara (Ngati Hau-iti) were annoyed with them for staying, and consequently consimiing their provisions, and spoke angrily to them about it ; whereupon the Ngati Apa. in great \\Tath, bewitched them by their sorcerers Tu-mata-whiti and Moko, and then immediately left the district. My informant, Warena Hunia, of Parewa-nui. assures me that this man, Tu-mata-whiti, had an atua which had the wonderful power of shining like fire when consulted if the intended venture was likely to prove successful, otherwise it remained dull and motionless. The result was that many of the Ngati Hau-iti died of the spells laid upon them. So far in this narrative an endeavour has been made to keep the vari- ous events in their proper chronological order, but dates have been avoided, for, although the dates have been assigned by Mr. S. Percy Smith and others to the principal raids and migrations from the north, when reference is made to these raids by Natives there is always a difficulty in knowing which one is meant ; and, as events crowd together between the years 1820 and 1840, there is less chance of giving each its proper place in liistory ; consequently it may be necessary to give a continuation of these notes as supplied by informants in narrative form, rather than cut them up endeavouring to obtain reliable order. The fight at Kai-inanga, and also another at Pare-kaoa, took place ■after WTiata-nui's raid. Kai-inanga was first, then came Pare-kaoa's death at Pou-kawa (near Napier), and Te Ao was killed some time after. Chapter IV. After the battle of Kai-inanga, the Ngati Apa returned to the outward part of Rangi-tikei — that is, the lower valley — but soon removed to Wai- rarapa for fear of an attack by the Ngati Tu-whare-toa ; but from there they were quickly driven back by the Ngati Kahu-ngunu. They re- turned to Rangi-tikei, but on their arrival were met by the Ngati Hau-iti, who had returned to avenge their defeat at Kai-inanga. The Ngati Hau- iti people mustered at Mokai Patea, where they were met by a Ngati Rau- kawa heke (migration) of four hundred men, besides women and children, under the chiefs Te Heuheu-nui, Te Rangi-mone-hurehu, and Te Whaka- rau. This was the second great heke from Taupo, but no particulars are available regarding the first (called Rua-mai-oro). At Patea the following tribes sent men to swell the numbers : Ngati Whiti, Ngati te Upoko-iri, Ngati Tama, and Ngati Tu-whare-toa. Then this great body journeyed •down the river together till they came to Kai-inanga, where they spent some time making canoes to convey their provisions down the Rangi- tikei River. On leaving Kai-inanga some of the party went by land, and others with the canoes. Following the course of the canoes, the first day they came to Pounga, where they camped, next day reaching Otara. " Here," said DowNES. — Early History of Rangitikei. 93 the old niau who gave the narrative, " we found no persons Uving, for the place had been abandoned for fear of witchcraft, by which many had died. We found bodies hung up in trees three and four together, and the sur- vivors had scattered. We ijistituted a search for them, and on the Ranga- tira we captured thirty-one prisoners. We found 0-tama-kapua, Te Weio, and Te Tai-nui, and the principal men caught at these places were Potaka and Te Rangi-tahua. This latter afterwards died l^y witchcraft, just as the others had done before him. " Starting down the river from Otara, we reached Whaka-poka, and camped there, Ngati Hau-iti accompanying us. There we found a small pa, where some of Ngati Hau-iti were dwelling, and cultivating the land. Thence we reached Ma-karaka, and camped there for a time, finding people of the same tribe. Next we reached Te Mahoe, and then Te Pohue, where we camped at the mouth of the Pou-rewa Stream. There we divided, sending scouting parties to Oroua on our one side, and also in the opposite direction. One party came back the same day, bringing four people that th«^y had captured, and next day our two reconnoitring parties returned bringing two more." According to another account, the day after these two prisoners were taken, a strong divi ion of the heke struck the main body of Ngati Apa between the Rangi-tikei and Turakina Rivers. Here a battle was fought, in which the Ngati Rau-kawa were victorious, many of the Ngati Apa being killed, and their chief leader Ta-whiro captured. Then, at the feast in honour of the victory, all the dead bodies were brought into the camp and piled in a heap. On top of this ghastly pile the unfortunate Ta-whiro was bound, stretched, and then flayed alive by a lady named Pekenga, eventually being killed by Tanguru, who was of the Ngati Hau-iti, Ngati Whiti, and Hine-manu tribes. Then the combined tribes set to work, the ovens were kept at glowing heat, and the Ngati Apa required no further burial. Continuing this narrative the old man said. " After Ta-whiro was killed we left Pou-rewa, passed Parewa-nui, and pushed on to the mouth of the Rangi-tikei River. As a gale was blowing, we hauled up our canoes and marched down the beach, only one canoe venturing out, and reaching Manawa-tu. When we reached this place we camped for the night, and, as the gale was increasing, we hauled up the one canoe that had reached us, and left it on the beach. Then wo continued our march along the beach to Kapiti, where we saw Te Rau-paraha and Te Pehi. We stayed there about two months, while our leading men went oi\ to Poneke to bring up Taiaha, of the Ngati Ira, and his people ; and while they were away we captured several prisoners at Horo-whenua, among whom were Te Kowhai, Hunia's mother's brother, and a woman named Whaka-haunga, ■of the Mua-upoko. After some time we commenced our return journey to Taupo, by way of the Rangi-tikei. We came to Parewa-nui on that river, and there baked karaka-berries. Next day we commenced to eat the berries, and made ourselves very ill, like drunken men. We found no inhabitants there : if there had been any at the pa we should have killed them. " Leaving Parewa-nui, we reached the moulh of the Ranga-taua, and camped there. There died that night the daughter of Te Heuheu and a Tu-whare-toa chief named Te Poka. We believe that they were bewitched by the Ngati Apa." [As a matter of fact, they both died of wounds in- flicted during a skirmish with a stray band of Ngati Apa. Huru-hia was 94 Transactions. the lady's name, and she was famed for her extreme beauty. A great tangi was held over her remains, at which Te Heuheu caused her head to be pre- served, he himself calcining her brains, and strewing the ashes over the land, which he declared to be for ever ta-pu.y^ " Leaving the Ranga-taua we marched to Wai-tuna, and halted there while the heads of our dead were properly preserved." [Wai-tuna was a pa about two miles above the Onepuhi Bridge over the Rangi-tikei River.} " Some of oiu' party who were going overland captured prisoners at Oroua. We were travelling in such a manner as to catch anybody in the neighbour- hood. Here at Wai-tuna our party from Manawa-tu joined us, bringing in one prisoner. Here we again divided into parties, some going up the Turakina Valley and the others remaining near the Rangi-tikei. The first-mentioned party took several prisoners, but we took none. " From Wai-tuna we went on to Ma-karaka (at Kaka-riki), and from thence to Whaka-poka ; from there on to Te Kiekie (Makohine), and from there to Otara. At this place we found Te Waha and Te Rangi- tahua, who had returned and resumed residence there, for the priest had exorcised the spot. Then we went on to Kawatau (a river on the east side of the Rangi-tikei, above Manga- weka), where we stayed for some time, as we buried the bodies of Te Poka and Heuheu's daughter there. From thence we proceeded to Kai-inanga, where we left our canoes, and continued on our way to Taupo." This journey, as described by our Maori friend, was called by him the " Heke Kariri Tahi " (migration of one cartridge), from the circumstance of their having veiy little ammunition. According to Travers, Whata-nui accompanied this hehe for the purpose of conferring with Te Rau-paraha ; but, finding that chief absent, he returned to Taupo almost immediately to bring down his people. From the manner in which these strong armed bodies of men roamed over the Turakina, Rangi-tikei, and Manawa-tu districts, killing and making slaves of all the unfortunate Ngati Apa they met, one can form an idea of the state of the country at that time. We have notes of two later Ngati Rau-kawa hekes, one of which came down before the fight known as Hao-whenua, and the other immediately after ; but, as the first of these mentions the death of Taka-rangi at Ko- huru-po, that event had better be related first, as well as civil and other troubles related by the Ngati Apa themselves. Now, there was a battle fought at Tara-kite (near Rata), called Tawa- para, and after this Rangi-whaka-pou was murdered by Ika-whaka-ariki^ both of Ngati Apa. To revenge that murder, the Kauae, in conjunction with Ngati Kahu-ngunu people, destroyed the whole hapu of Ika-whaka- ariki who were living at Huaki-tae-ore, across the Rangi-tikei, and at Rua- puta-uaki and 0-weta-ra, down by the river (near Bull's). When that war-party of the Ngati Kahu-ngunu came down to smite Ika-whaka-ariki, that chief fled to Whanga-nui, where he remained for some years, and when he thought he could return in safety he did so, and again took up his residence in his pa (below Bull's) ; but members of the Ngati Kahu-ngunu Tribe were still on the scene, and the Kauae people soon * In Travers's " Life of Te Rati-paraha " this lady's name is given as Reremai. bat his informant was apparently in error, for Reremai was one of the victims of the Kai-inanga fight. DowNES. — Earhj History of Rangilikei. 95 learned where Ika-whaka-ariki was hiding, and also his friend Orehu. So a raid was organized, and Ika-whaka-ariki captured without much trouble. When brought face to face with his captors he sang a song, and otherwise .shewed his bravery ; but this availed him but little, for very soon he had to go the way of all flesh, and trod the dim and distant road to Hawaiki. It was about this time that Rangi-iki-iki, after the death of his wife Kara, went away to Oroua, and Rangi-tuhaha went to reside at Te Wha- iiu-rongo (near Halcombe). The next affair that happened was the bewitching by Rangi-ts-muri, which caused the death of a great number of Rangi-whaka-po's people, also many of the Ika-whaka-ariki and Kauae. They were all living at Paewa, and very often went to the mouth of the Rangi-tikei River fishing, when they would send large supplies of food to their own places, and also to Rangi-iki-iki (at Oroua). Rangi-te-muri noticed this, and set about bewitching the track which they had to pass over. " It happened this way," said my informant, when telling of the event : " This man Rangi-te-muri lived on the flat in front of the present Parewa- nui Schoolhouse, and the old track lay between the two swamps, where the road runs at present. Now, Rangi-te-muri looked out daily and saw the people passing and repassing with their loads of eels and fish, and, although they passed his door, they never gave him a present or left any of the fish hanging at his place. Then said Rangi-te-muri to himself, " I'll fix them." And fix them he did, for he bewitched the track, and next time the fishermen passed that way (and they had to go that track, for there was no other) they travelled over it for the last time, and they received the punishment which was always meted out to those who touched bewitched things, and went to join their gTeat ancestress, Hine- nui-te-po. When Te Kai-whaka-taha saw so many of his people falling under this potent spell, in fear of his life he fled across the river, where he fell into the hands of a party of Ngati Kahu-ngunu who were on their way to make war with Ngati Apa. They quickly captured him, and, as he was a man of great avoirdupois, they made game by exhibiting him round, on account of his immense size and fatness. He was then duly killed and eaten, and the spot where the feast took place was named, in honour of the event, Tapu-iko-koneke — meaning ** the fat thighs of the quail." After this, Rangi-tane came into the Rangi-tikei district, accompanied by Ngati Tauira. They went to Wai - tata - pia (now the homestead paddocks on Mr. Dalrymple's run at Parewa-nui), a pa to the west of Rae-tihi (a sand -ridge on the same farm), and there they fought with Nga- riki and Tupa-taua. They were victorious, and, after having slain the chief Te Umu-o-te-hau, they went on to Te Awa-mate Pa seeking further quarrels. Nga-riki, after the loss of their chief, fled up the river. Then Hori Kingi sent two chiefs across the river, with full instructions to fetch ■some foha tuna (extra fine eels — i.e., the chiefs) home with them from Puke-puke Pa (a fortified pa on one of the lakes lying between the mouth of the Rangi-tikei River and Foxton, known to local residents as Humpy's Lake), held by Ngati Apa ; but warning was sent, and the two chiefs Rangi-hau-tu and Ao-kehu went out with a party and waylaid Rangi- tane, who were one hundred strong, and cut off almost the whole party, as out of that strong taua Te Weta was the only man who escaped. This 96 Transactions. battle was known by the name of Tu-raki-awatea, and was fought on the site of the Turakina Railway-station. The Tu-raki-awatea Pa stood on the other side of the main road, near the Turakina Bridge. The old pa on the opposite side of the river was known as Kopiro. Flushed with victory, the Ngati Apa followed up another party of Rangi-tane to Papa-rata (Oroua Downs), and annihilated them there. These losses naturally aroused the riri of the Rangi-tane, who obtained aid from the Ngati Kahu-ngunu, Nga Pakapaka, and Nga Mutu-ahi, from Dannevirke, and came against Pukepuke, but were again repulsed. Then they resorted to stratagem, and made it appear as though they had retired ; but not so — they were simply hiding. Th^^n some of the Ngati Apa women and children went in a canoe over the river on to the flat to suck flax-blossoms , and before they discovered their perilous position they were captured. In this way Oko-rewa, Te Hakeke's mother, was taken, as well as others ; but before Rangi-tane got away with their prisoners, one of the women managed to call out to Rangi-hau-tu to follow, as his wife was a captive. He did so, but did not come up to the retreating iaua till they came to the Manawa-tu, where, instead of fighting, a peace was patched up, and Rangi-hau-tu was returning home in full confidence with the women, when he was set upon by his escort of Rangi-tane men, and cruelly murdered by Taka-wai. His body was left on a ridge called Te Ruahine (a sand- ridge lying between the fertile and waste lands on the southern side of the Rangi-tikei River), but the women and children got back to the Puke- puke Pa in safety. ' A Waiata composed on the Occasion of Rangi-hatj-tu's Death, sung by a Rangi- tane Woman of the Pakapaka Hapu (mo te Matenga o tc Rangi-hau-tw 1 patxia e Taka-wai me ona taina ki te Ruahine Manuka). Me whakawai hoki e puanga akohti te patu tonu ai, Ka rau-ai to ringa mo nga ringa kino Kai te Ruahine mo Tanitia* tena kei roto mo te rangi Whititua,* Tena kei roto mo te Rangi-tapu-ihi,* Tena kei roto mo taku voranihu kai Pukepuke, ]\Io te rorotuna ki Kai-kokopu. I me kata atu au e hika i kouci i. — / waiaiangia mat mo te Hakeke i te whawhai ki kahutara. " So died the great chief Rangi-hau-tu (storm-wind standing in the heavens) by treachery foul and dark. The proud canoe was broken up, and his people were left stranded, with the raging sea all around them, but they were not engulfed "' — for Ao-kehu quickly sent messengers to Whanga-nui and Manga -whero, telUng them what had happened, and seeking aid, which was readily given; and the combined forces travelled to Manawa-tu, where they defeated Rangi-tane at the Hara- keke Pa with great slaughter. (The site of the Harakeke Pa was the place now known as the Sugarloaf Hill, below the Manawa-tu Railway- bridge.) When this pa was first surrounded, Avord was hurriedly sent to Te Ahuru-o-te-rangi, who was then on a visit to the South Island. As soon as he received the message, he crossed over the Rau-kawa Strait with his war-party in canoes ; but by the time he aiTived the pa had been captured, and many of its people killed and eaten. Te Ahuru-o-te-rangi then * Three Ngati Apa men killed previously. Trans. N.Z. Inst.. Vol. XLII. Pl. IX. MAP ILLUSTRATING FAELY HISTORY OF RAXOITIKEI. Downks. Face p. yii. Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLII. Pl. X. MOAN A ffai RotoHayi MAP OF LOWER WHANGAEHU AND TURAKINA VALLEYS.—Downes. Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLIL Pl. XL '^'■ >-^i Q ef3 a, Q Q r.--^ ' __«i,„. 03 z • . o Q i h-5 P o W O REPRODUCTION OF AN OLD PLAN OF KAI-K t fl\ f «■- •. lO DowNES. — Earhj History of Rangitikei. 97 gathered all his people and attacked the Waipu Pa (on the Turakina Lake, the Maori name of which was Otiti : it lies on Mr. Lethbridge's property, about three hundred yards from the railway-station), where the Ngati Apa were exj)ecting and awaiting the inevitable attack ; but the pa was a strong one and its people many, consequently it withstood the siege for a long time, and eventually Te Kahu-te-rangi, who was related to Te Ahuru-o-te-rangi, came to Waipu and made peace, after which the various hapus in the pa retm-ned to their own homes. So ended the trouble in this quarter for a time; but only for a very short time, for Ngati Apa next joined forces with Nga Rauru (Wai-totara Tribe), and, for some real or fancied injury in connection with Rangi-hau-tu's murder, they suc- cessfully attacked Pihaia, a pa on the sandhills between Putiki and the sea, on the Whanga-nui River. In payment, Whanga-nui travelled to Whanga-ehu, where they captured a large pa named 0-hake-to, near the beach at that place, and here they killed O-taRe-hoke and others. Smart- ing under the defeat, a woman of the Ngati Wairiki went to Hawke's Bay to get help to revenge her people. When she reached Wai-rarapa she col- lected forces and returned, and her reinforcements joined with the men of Rangi-tikei, Turakina, and Whanga-ehu, and came on to the pa Tuke- a-maui, at Pari-kino, on the Whanga-nui River, which they besieged. The top end of the pa was defended by Manumanu's descendants, and the middle by Ma-ruru. The pa was surrounded and eventually taken, but the part which the Manumanu people were defending was not attacked. Sam Woon, a well-known Whanga-ehu Native, has in his possession a mere pounamu taken by Ngati Apa at the fall of this pa. Seeldng further details regarding this fight at Tuke-a-maui, the writer was told the following interesting story by the grandson of one of the chiefs who took part in the attack : — " Some of the Ngati Apa people were badly beaten by Rangi-tane at Pohangina, and among those who were taken was a Ngati Apa chief named Te Ahuru." [Te Ahuru was the man who, with his wife, arranged the attack on the Kai-inanga Pa, as related some few pages back. He was afterwards killed at Kapiti, when the combined tribes made their unsuccessful attack on Te Rau-paraha at that place. (An account of this attack has been published in the Jour. Polynesian Soc, so will not be further referred to here.) Details relating to the death of Te Ahuru's daughter will be related later on.] " However, in their eagerness to make this man a prisoner, they allowed some of his men to escape, who immediately fled away to Rangi-tikei, where they raised a party to seek revenge. " Now, Rangi-tane, having captured Te Ahuru and others, kept them for a few days, and then set them to work to carry stones for the umus in ■which they were to be cooked. After enough stones had been gathered, they made the vmfortunate men gather firewood for the ovens, then the leaves, and, last of all, they forced them to dig out the umus, and when all was ready the conquerors lined up for the haka which was to celebrate the victory ; but, in the middle of the song, down came Ngati Apa — the party that the recent escapees had brought along. They smote left and right, and before many minutes were over the ovens were steaming, but they contained Rangi-tane instead of Ngati Apa. " Te Ahuru was doubtless well pleased at his release, but he desired still further revenge. So he sent messengers to Wai-totara and Patea 4 — Trans. 98 Transactions. asking the Nga Rauru to bring hai and send men. The northern Natives heartily responded, sending two hundred fighting-men, besides many slaves bearing great quantities of the indispensable kai. When they came to the Whanga-nui River, Taka-rangi, the great Whanga-nui chief, who was after- wards killed at Kohuru-po, heard that the Nga Rauru people were in his territory, and he said ' WTiat are these people doing here ? I will not allow them to carry food over me.' So he sent out his men, and after a short skirmish Nga Rauru retired minus their hai. When Ngati Apa heard that Taka-rangi had intercepted those who were coming to give them assistance, they immediately started out, and took a large pa situated on the Kai-toke Lake " [about two miles from Whanga-nui No. 1 Line]. " Whanga-nui, not to be outdone, travelled to Rangi-tikei, where they besieged the pa at Pou-rewa, killed Te Haha-o-te-rangi, and then retired. " Then up arose Te Ahuru and said to his people, ' I hear there is a brave man called Te 0-raunga of the Mua-upoko. I will go to him and see if he will lend a hand to help punish Whanga-nui and Rangi-tane.' So he went to Wai-were, a pa at the south end of Lake Horo-whenua, and laid his views and intentions before Te 0-raunga ; but that careful chief said, ' No, I am afraid I cannot- help you, for this taniwho you wish to destroy has two heads — i.e., Whanga-nui and Rangi-tane. If it had only one I would willingly go. But go on to Pori-rua. Te Huke-o-tungia is there, and he will assist.' So Te Ahuru went to Pori-rua as directed, but Huke-o- tungia said, ' No, I cannot help ; but let us go to Nga-kaka-waha-nui (the loquacious parrots), at Wai-rarapa.' So they went on, and came to the pa " [near Mr. Bidwell's], " and there they found the two kakas famed for their gxeat beaks, Te Whata-horo and Te Kaka-hou, and explained what they came for. After hearing all Te Ahuru and his friend had to say, the two great chiefs replied, ' Yes, we will help you. Go home as fast as you can, gather all your people, and plenty of kai. We will follow in a few days.' So Te Ahuru returned to Rangi-tikei ; but as soon as he had gone, Whata-horo said to his friend, ' Had w^e not better follow at once, before Whanga-nui hears of our approach and has time to gather ? ' So they started off from Wai-rarapa w^ith a great army of over three hundred men of the Rakai-whaka-iri, the Ngati Kahukura-a-whitia, the Hamua, and the Ngati-moe tribes, all branches of the Ngati Kahu-ngunu. " When Te Ahuru left Wai-rarapa he arranged with his own people to have supplies of food ready, and with this purpose in view he came on to Whanga-ehu ; but no sooner had he called his people together than a great war-party was seen approaching from the south. The people were much afraid, and said to Te Ahuru, ' What is the meaning of this ? ' Te Ahuru, although he felt considerable apprehension, replied, ' Perhaps it is our friends from Wai-rarapa and Pori-rua. Let us go forward to meet them.' (The Pori-rua people had also joined, although they had at first refused.) So the two parties met, and the apprehensions of the Ngati Apa were quickly set at rest by the joyful discovery that the taua was led by their Wai- rarapa friends. After the customary feast had been disposed of, a war- dance was executed, during the excitement of which some of the brave fellows advised going on to Whanga-nui that night. Te Ahuru opposed this, for he wished to have time to gather all his available Ngati Apa force. But Tui, the tohunga traveUing with the taua, settled the dispute by saying, ' We will go now, for even at this moment the Whanga-nui people are preparing to resist us, and to-morrow we will meet their party and be victorious.' " DowNES, — Early History of Rangitikei. 99 The Prophecy by which Tui excited the Taua to go on. Tei'M ia te ata taua Takiri ana mai, Kai Tongariro e, ko te mamani, E whakakaka ra i ona rau, Kia riro mai ko Tu-kapua Kai riro mai amx ko Huni-tara Kia whakatauria iho te kohu ka kikimai Ka titiro he ure ngorengore no Pakihi No muri ka whati te piki No tnra kai te awatea, Kiia moea e an ki te po E tu ana Kai-whara-whara Ka nTiniimi kai Ota-aue Kia tangi mai te karoro, aue ! Takii kai he piro tangata E he wai ka kato te wai o Whanga-nui Kai u kei uta ka hiiri Taikoria Ka huri ki Waiwiri Hara-mai ai ona rau E nil, ki au kakari ai e Bum e, Ruru e, kai taraha e i. [Translation. ] Lo ! tlie morn of MTath is dawning. At Tongariro the hundred are being Incited to defeat Tu-kapua and Huru-tara.* Enveloped by the mist they will assemble For the fight. They will look on lis with disdainj Unworthy to fight against ; but they will be Defeated at daylight. At night I dreamt — I beheld Another victory at Kai-whara-whara. f They were also overwhelmed at Ota-aue. J Causing the sea-gull to scream, "Aue ! alas ! Oh ! my meat is the stench of human corpses." Held back is the wave of Whanga-niii Lest it should overflow Taikoria And also flood Waiwiri. § The hundred attacked me in vain. Two to one against me, I defeated them, And glorious was my ^^ctory. So they started off that night, taking the road by the sea-beach, and just as day was breaking they ran right into the Whanga-nui war-party at Kai-whara-whara (the South Spit, Whanga-nui River). Still under the excitement of the recent haka, the invaders made short work of the sur- prised Whanga-nui-ites, and before very long the pair of kakas with great beaks were counting the spoil. They made a pile of the dead men four high, laying them crossways as children cross and recross their hands in play. " How long the row was," said my informant, " I don't know — perhaps a mile, perhaps less — but, at any rate, as soon as the wall was built, Whata- horo and his companion said to Te Ahuru, ' Here is payment for you. Is it enough ? ' and so they gave the whole pile to Ngati Apa as a hakari for them. While the feast was going on, Tui, the tohunga, got up and sang another song, in which he described other places that would be taken, and told the names of the chiefs to be killed. So the party, taking his good * Tu-kapua e Huru-tara — Men of the Wai-rarapa taua. t Kai-whara-whara — South S]>it, Whanganui River, t Ota-aue — A pa on the Awarua Creek below Putiki. § Waiwiri — The lake usually known as Pa-pai-tonga. 4*— Trans. 100 Ti-ansactions. advice, advanced, bent on mischief. They attacked the pa Ota-aue " [on the Awa-rua Creek, about half a mile below Putiki], " where they captured all the inhabitants, and sent them as slaves under escort to Rangi- tikei. Then on again they went, determined to take the large pa at Pari- kino named Tuke-a-maui, which was known to be full of people. It took the war-party several days to effect an entrance, but they eventually dragged down parts of the palisading by tying flax ropes to the middle of short pieces of wood, throwing them over, and then pulling. After this victory the war-party retired, carrying with them many slaves, and satisfied that at least one of the taniwJta's heads had been considerably damaged. The old pa Tuke-a-mavii stood on the rising ground above Kai-tangata, the old name of the pa now known as Pari-kino. Pari-kino Avas a pa on the clifi side of the river, opposite Kai-tangata. " Now for the other head : Flushed with their recent conquests, Te Ahuru now decided to give his friends a skirmish with Rangi-tane ; so he again gathered his Ngati Apa force, and, joining with Wai-rarapa, they marched away, having previously sent out spies, two by two, who were to hunt the district, and let the main body know where the most people had congregated. Soon the scouts returned with their report to Orini (near Tahora-iti), which the taua had now reached, and informed the leaders that all the people in the district had vacated the small pas and fled to Rai-kapua, a strongly fortified pa on the Upper Manawa-tu River, having a high inac- cessible cliff immediately behind it. So the war-party laid siege to this pa, and carried on the operations with such fury that in a very short space an entrance was gained, and the slaughter of the defenders commenced. Alto- gether two hundred poor WTetches were killed, and one hundred taken as slaves ; and again the dead were piled up in a row four deep, with the captives on top. Then said Whata-horo to Ahuru, ' There is your second payment. Divide this pile into two equal parts, and bind the dead on the shoulders of the living.' So he gave half of the captives to the Ngati Apa party and kept haK himself, and the two tribes separated, each forcing their slaves to carry home their dead comrades, who were no doubt destined to gTace the board at the first feast. Thus was the taniwha's second head destroyed. The descendants of the slaves captured on that occasion are still to be found at Pori-rua and Wai-rarapa. ?5 KO TE MATA TENEI A Tui, MATENGA I TAHTTRI AI RaI-KAPTJA. [Tui's Song before the Capture of Rai-kapua.] Takoto paranga he matuku Takoto paranga he matuku Ka whaterotero mai te arero huare ki waho Hora ana te huruhuru o tona ure Te hokinga mai o te Parekura i te koru ra, Aha lia he pane whiti, aha ha he pane taonga, He niho tete mai i runga o te turuturii, A taina a he aha ka nene ka tangi koe e. This waiaia is a vision and a prophecy as to what the result of the assault on Rai-kapua would be. After this, a woman of rank belonging to Ngati Wairiki was killed near Turakina by Ngaiti Whiti, so Tama-te-kura collected people from Whanga- nui and Manga- whero to avenge her death. The party travelled to Rangi- tikei and took a pa called Toko-rangi (Whanga-ehu), where they killed the chief Poa-tawa and a great number of people, and after the usual celebra- tions returned home. After this Tawhero-haki was killed in retaliation ; DowNES. — Early History of Rangitikei. 101 consequently Pehi Turoa, tlie great \Vlianga-nui chief, went to Manumanu's relatives and said, " We must have payment for this man's death." So they gathered a force, and went to seek revenge at Muri-motu, where they killed Tama-te-kura, Te Kahu, Toetoe, and others belonging to Ngati Tu- whare-toa. They afterwards had another fight at Tiki-rere, where more people of this same tribe were killed. And so the quarrel went on ; but, as the complicated law of utu entailed fighting among various tribes outside the Rangi-tikei district, these quarrels need not be followed further. After this, more ciAdl trouble arose owing to one of the Kauae people named Te Hina beating and otherwise ill-treating his wife. She objected to this, and fled across the river to her people to complain. They were angry with Te Hina for this, and to square matters they took from the woman a famous tiki belonging to her husband ; and when she afterward returned without the tiki, he bethought him of ancient grievances (although up to this time Kauae and Maero had lived together as neighbours), and remembered the annihilation of his people by Rangi-te-muri ; so he gathered some of his people, made a raid, and captured Maero, Tau-iri, Te Hanea, Mokomoko, and Pauhu, as well as many others. He also recovered his tiki and other property, and, to properly punish these people for taking his wife's part, or else taking his tiki, he made a gxeat fire and scorched his prisoners over it, in much the same maimer as eels are treated for fattening. (It was an old-time custom with the Maoris on this coast, when on an eel- fishing expedition, to gather together all the small and skinny eels caught, and then light a fire of fern down by the water's edge. Then the contents of the hinaki were emptied into the middle of the fire, and it was supposed that by this persuasive treatment the unfortunate eels that managed to crawl through and reach the water Avould eventually gTow large and fat ; and who would doubt it ? This custom was called Tuniitunu ki te ahi.) After the burning, Te Hina had his prisoners liberated and sent them away, and, as they were his wife's relatives, he acted kindly, and did not kill any of them except Pauhu ; but they resented his kind treatment, and immediately commenced to make plans for avenging their insult. First they commenced going to Oroua, but eventually decided to go to Awa-mate. Soon after settling there they received a visit from a chief named Tama- whi-rangi, of Ngariki, who was connected with Maero, but who was also related to Te Hina. Him they took and killed as a first blow in revenge for their burning. When Te Hina heard how his relative had been received at Awa-mate, he left his pa at Tu-nuku, above Kara-riki, and hastened with a war-party to revenge that death ; but he was himself killed, and his party driven home. When Wai-tene heard that Te Hina had been killed, he sought assistance to punish Maero, and was aided by the Mua- upoko, Ngati Kahu-ngunu, Nga-wai-riki, and other hapus of Ngati Apa. This large force attacked Te Awa-mate, which was an island in a lake, but did not take it, not having canoes. (The Awa-mate Lake is a long, aiarrow body of water, curved round something after the shape of a horse-shoe, lying on Mr. Dalrymple's property at Parewa-nui. When the writer first saw it, many years ago, the island referred to had a peculiar appearance, owing to a number of trees standing with their roots upwards — the remnants of ancient fortifications, called puwhara, upon which platforms were built. The same thing was noticed at other places when we were children, but not to the same extent ; but these, like many other objects of which we then took but little notice, have long since disappeared.) 102 Transactions. Finding they were unable to take the ish^nd, the war-party retreated, but almost immediately returned to the attack, and on this occasion they killed Kakaho, the daughter of Te Ahuru, and others ; but again they were unsuccessful in taking the pa, and so again they retired. " The murder of this poor girl," said my informant, " was a very dis- creditable act " ; and while he gave the follownng details, the old man's eyes filled with tears. Before Te Ahuru went to fight Te Rau-paraha at Kapiti he had a pre- sentiment that he would be killed at that battle, for in a vision (dream) he had seen his own head fixed on the top of a pole ; so he gave to his daughter his mere pounamu called Te Rito-harakeke (young blade of the flax), with the instructions that she was never to part with it, and also that she was to wear it night and day, but in svich a manner that the cord which held it round her neck was to be kept concealed beneath her mat. When the poor girl was captured at Awa-mate, her captors formed a ring round her. and she was ordered to sit down in the enclosed space ; but she refused, and said, " Why should I sit down to be killed ? Allow me to stand and sing my death-song, after which I will be ready." Then she asked Te Kahawai to give her his mat so that her body might be covered after she was dead, and Te Kahawai without a moment's thought complied with her request and laid down his mahiti (dog-skin mat) on the ground before her. WTiile she was singing Te Kahawai noticed the tears trickling down her cheeks, and when the tangi was finished he said to her, " WTiy were you crying just now?" Kakaho replied, "Do you ask me why I was crying? If you were a woman, as I am, you would know very well why I was crying." Continuing, she said, " I, like you, am going to be a fish of the sea, for I am a woman of much blood ; and may this thought carry you to death, for you are not a man of your word." (Some reference to the fact that the kahawai fish, when caught, bleeds more freely than an}" other fish known to the Maori.) Then one of the party took a tokotol'o, and, giving it to anoth.n' chief, he said, " Kill her with this." Kakaho overheard the order, and immediately cried out, " Let me not die by such a mean weapon. If die I must, kill me with this." And as she spoke she drew from her bosom the mere Te Rito- harakeke, and held it aloft. The man who had the tokotoko seized the mere, calling out, " Yes, it is a good weapon, and a good girl," at the same time striking her a blow that laid her low for ever. Then it was noticed that her body was tafu, being protected by the mahiti, which by this time was wet with blood welling from the death- wound ; consequently she was not eaten, but buried as befitted a chief's daughter. As soon as it was discovered that the girl was dead, Te Kahawai turned to Paihure, the man who had killed her, and said, " Why did you kill her in defiance of my protection ? " and, receiving no satisfactory answer, he took the mere, and Paihure also fell to the ground, a dead man. After the siege, Maero and Tau-iri were so worried by the appearance of the Ngati Apa almost daily, and also by the shortage of their food-supply, that they determined to evacuate the pa and go to Ao-rangi. So they quietly left Te Awa-mate and went to Oroua ; but the Ngati Apa people followed them up and killed several, but the chief person killed was a woman named Hiango, and she was killed by Wai-tene. After this the Maero people resolved to scatter ; so Hura, Rihi-mona, and Rene-hura went to Horo-whenua for safety, the others all going to different places. DowNES. — Early History of Rangitikei. 103 Chapter V. Now, when Te Hakcke grew up he desired to obtain further revenge for the death of his father Rangi-hau-tu ; so he went up the Rangi-tikei River and conferred with some of the chiefs there, with the result that a war-party of the Tupa-taua and Nga-riki hapus journeyed to Manawa-tu, where they surrounded the Pahutu Pa (near the bridge at Palmerston North), at which place Rangi-hau-tu's murderers were living. The invaders were fairly successful in this little tribute to the dead chief's memory, for two of the chief culprits (brothers to Taka-wai, the real murderer) suffered for their relationship, and their spirits fled to the Rerenga Wairua (spirits' leaping-place), and Te Hakeke himself had the satisfaction of killing the man who had held his father down while he was being murdered. How- ever, justice was not always meted out to the ill-doers in those days, as now, for the real cause of all the trouble, Taka-wai, escaped, and so the party had to return to their pas with the lust for blood in their throats only partially satisfied. Table 7. -Showing the Ancestor Kauae, from whom the Subtribe take their Name. Kauae-muri-ranga-whenua I Horo-uta I Tu patu-nui I Ihenga-ariki Tutahi-ore-hua Rata rua I I Rangitikei Kauae-i-ma Te Aokehu IE • Waka-iti Rute Tao-reia Te Kura Tutahi Koukou-te-rangi = Kawa Te Ota-o-te-rangi Oko-rewa = Te Rangi-hautu Te Apa-atua I I Kaewa = Te Hakeke Takerei. Kawana Hunia 1 Wirihana Hunia I children I grandchildren. it will be remembered that after Te Hiango was killed, Rihi-mona, Hura, and others went to Horo-whenua for safety, and after a time the Mua-upoko people, with whom they dwelt, thought that Hura's \^Tongs should be more fully avenged, so they came with Rihi-mona back to Lower Rangi-tikei to make war on Ngati Apa. They arrived, and halted just 104 Transactions. below Parewa-nui, and sent out scouts to reconnoitre. The only person the scouts discovered was Kaewa (Te Hakeke's wife), whom they found with a companion gathering tutu-berries. She was uncertain whether she would be killed or not, but the scouts contented themselves by stating their object and asking for Hakeke, who was away at Turakina mustering a war-party to fight Eangi-tane. Leaving Kaewa unhurt, the scouts con- tinued their search, and soon after found Ngoki, Kaewa's sister, who was surprised and killed at 0-taka-po, close to where the township of Bull's now stands. As soon as Hakeke retvirned from Turakina, he discovered what had taken place, and made all haste to follow up the retreating war- party, and fell in with them accidentally at Wha-rangi (Manawa-tu), where they were busy in the swamps catching eels. Although thus engaged, they were working " with one eye open," for they judged by the flight of some seagulls that they might be surprised by a pursuing party ; so Tu-ranga-pito was ready with a long-handled tomahawk, and Hakaraia was also near to bear the brunt of the attack, and these two sought to engage the enemy while the rest of the Mua-upoko drew together. Then Hakeke remembered that these people whom he had come out against were his own connections,* so he sought a truce, and to do so ran up and threw his dog-skin mat over Rihi-mona. Tu-ranga-pito was angay at thus being baulked of the excite- ment of a fight, so he tried to make trouble, and cried out, " Who is that tupapaJcu (dead body) you have there ? " apparently endeavouring to excite them by reference to the late murder. But Hakeke seems to have been a man of peace, for, although Ngoki was Hakeke's sister-in-law, she was also a connection (whaea) of Tu-ranga-pito's. Notwithstanding Hakeke's command, Waitene (Ngoki's brother) still endeavoured to kill Hura and Rihi-mona, but was checked by the others. Eventually the Mua-upoko people crossed the Mikihi Stream, but while they were crossing some one called out " Ko Ngoki tonu " ; but it was too late to cause fiu'ther trouble, for by that time Mua-upoko were on the other side of the Manawa-tu. Hura and Rihi-mona never returned to Rangi-tikei. After these things Pouhu was killed by some of the Nga Riki and Tupa- taua people. Pouhu, it will be remembered, was one of those who suffered scorching at the hands of Te Hina, but who recovered from his wounds. He was one of the Maero hapu, and he was killed by Tahataha and Maru- maru in revenge for the death of Te Hina, who was killed in assaulting Te Awa-mate pa, and also in revenge for Tama-whi-rangi, the visitor who was killed at the same place. It may be mentioned that this tribe, the Nga Riki, was a hapu toa, Hakeke and all the other leading chiefs of Ngati Apa being comaected with it. As utu for Pouhu's death, Hori-te-hania and his companions killed one of the Rangaranga-tu people at Oroua. He thought first of all that he would kill Te Haena. who was an old man of Nga Riki living at Totara-tae-apa (Sandon), but he did not carry out that idea, as he was afraid of Te Hakeke ; so he went on to Oroua, where he killed Pokana, of the Rangaranga-tu hapu, but spared his sister, who was con- nected with him by marriage. This murder was, even according to Maori ethics, a very discreditable transaction {he hanohi i pania hi te toto). The next item was that the Ngati Apa sought revenge for this, and went to Hakupu-rua (Oroua), where they killed, of the Ngati Tauira and Ngati Maero, the following persons : Mokomoko, Rereopa, Te Eangi-ta-koru, and Tara-wehi, who was a daughter of Hura, and also her brother Tahu-potiki ; * Kaewa, Te Hakeke's wife, was a Mua-upoko woman. DowNES. — Early History of Rangitikei. 105 besides, there were a number of women taken prisoners, but none of them of any great name. Te Waitene wanted to kill Hura's tAvo children in revenge for his sister Ngoki ; but Rangi-te-ika, of the Nga Wairiki, would not consent to this ; so they were spared, and sparing their lives saved further trouble on that occasion. But rest was not yet. Ngati Macro, Ngati Tauira, and Rangi-tane combined to attack Ngati Apa, so they came to Te Puru, near Kaka-riki, on the Rangi-tikei River, where they met their foe ; but they also met defeat and disaster, for at that siege two of their leaders — namely, Umupo and Rongo-mai-tai — -were killed ; but Kakapa, of Tauira, and Ropiha Piriha, who were both captiu'ed, were spared. The leaders of the victorious Ngati Apa were Hura and Rihi-mona, who had come up from Horo-whenua on a visit, but who afterwards returned to their people the Mua-upoko. It was about this time that Te Rau-paraha settled for the second time on Kapiti (Te Rau-paraha actually settled on Kapiti in 1824, but he came ■down the second time from Kawhia in 1821), and when he was established there he fought against Rangi-tane and afterwards against Ngati Apa. Then others of the Taranaki, Ngati Awa, and Ngati Toa tribes shifted down to Kapiti, so as to get out of the road of the Wai-kato and Ngati Mania-poto tauas. Some of these hehes went by the sea-shore, others travelled inland searching for food, so all the hapus along the coast stayed in their various places, but for a short time ejideavouring to evade these migrating parties. Rangi-tane and Ngati Kahu-ngunu now sought revenge for the death of Rongo-mai-tai ; so, when Te Hakeke found that they were on the way to Turakina, he decided to gather all the available Ngati Apa together and meet the enemy there. With this pixrpose in view he hurried to Turakina ; but before he reached that place he fell in with a taua from \Mianga-nui, who were travelling by canoe to Kapiti, but who had landed on account of bad weather. They caught him, and carried him on to one of their canoes, where they held him down, endeavouring to kill him by cutting his throat with a shark's-tooth knife ; but he strove with his great strength, made a gigantic effort, and threw them aside as little children, and so broke clean away from them ; and then, when at some little distance, he called back to his pursuers, " I am Hakeke, the great Hakeke. You cannot capture me." They could not, although they tried ; and Te Hakeke ran back to Rangi-tikei. The Rangi-tane party went on to Turakina without knowing anything of this, and, as the Ngati Apa there had not received Te Hakeke's warning, they w^e quite unprepared. When the taua consisting of the Ngati Kahu- ngunu, Rangi-tane, and Mua-upoko hapus, under the chiefs Te Wheta, Te Aweawe, and Hori Kangi, in all 340 persons, were travelling down the coast to the attack, they were discovered by Te Wai-tene, who immediately warned his people. Only a small party of defenders could be raised at a moment's notice, biit these few were angry and desperate men, and so, nothing daunted, Te Wai-tene the brave and his six companions of the Nga Riki attacked that great combined army ; but, although brave and strong, these seven were but as a few grains of sand before the whirlwind, and soon Wai-tene and his brother Te Hokinga were speeding to meet their ancestors on the dim shores of the spirit-land. But Hori-te-mohi and his elder brother escaped — all the armies of the world were not strong enough to take them.* This affair is known to the Maori as the Turaki-awatea * The spear with which Wai-tene was killed is now in the hands of Wirihana Hunia, of Otaki. 106 Transoctio7is. fight, and it took place at Te Kopiri, near the railway-station, Turakina. After this, peace was made. Te Rangi-te-ika conferred with Mua-upoko and Rangi-tane, and they returned home ; but on their way, when near Te Ara-tau-mahi (Bull's), their good resolutions melted away. The oppor- tunity to kill some one could not be resisted. Was not the excitement of the fight the very spice and essence of expectance ? So they killed Hatoa, of the Ngati Apa, at that place. The hue and cry was quickly raised, Ngati Apa followed them up, and at the Manawa-tu River they came upon them. There a skirmish took place, with the result that Pa-anga, of' the Rangi-tane, and others were killed, though Te Weta, whom they were anxious to take, escaped up the river, though badly wounded by a spear-thrust in the thigh. (This was the same man who escaped on a previous occasion when attacked by Rangi-hau-tu and Ao-kehu.) Ngati Apa then returned home satisfied, having avenged both their late defeat at Turakina and the murder at Te Ara-tau-mahi ( Bull" s) . Chapter VI. It seems to have been about this time that the battle of Manga-toetoe took place, in Hawke's Bay, between the Manumanu people and Ngati Kahu-ngunu, at Manga-toetoe, where Rewharewha and other chiefs of Ngati Kahu-ngunu fell, some thirty in all ; and again they were defeated at Pou-taka, where the Ngati Apa and Koiri people killed Tua-whitu. For payment Ngati Kahu-ngunu obtained help from the Ngati Apa and Ngati Maru tribes, who assembled at Here-taunga under the command of Tangi- te-rm'u, Roro, Rangi-nui-kapo, and Te Rei. The combined forces then travelled to Mokai Patea, where they found Pokai-tara, of Ngati Whiti, living at Whiringa-o-tau ; so they killed him, and then crossed the Rangi-tikei River, where they killed Te Rahui, who belonged to the people living on that side of the river. When Pehi Turoa heard that the Ngati Kahu-ngunu were in the Rangi-tikei district, he wished to assist them, so he and Kaeaea (usually known as Taringa Kuri), of Ngati Tama, raised a party and went to help. As soon as Ngati Wai-riki heard of this great army advancing, they sent messengers to Rangi-tikei, Whanga- ehu, Turakina, Manga-whero, and 0-takapo, and raised a force to check the advance of the combined tribes, who had now joined. They met the enemy at the place where the town of Marton now stands, and, after a challenge to single combat had been given, the chiefs Kapia, of Ngati Wai-riki, and Rangi-nui, of Ngati Kahu-ngunu, met, and after a hand-to-hand conflict Rangi-nui was killed. Upon seeing the fall of their chief leader, the Ngati Kahu-ngunu lost heart and fled. In this battle, which was called Taku- te-rangi, the Ngati Kahu-ngunu numbered 1,600 men (probably gxeatly exaggerated, for our friend is speaking a la Maori), while their victorious opponents mustered only about 340. After this the taua reconstructed, and went on to Here-taunga, whence they had come, still determined on mischief. When they arrived at Maka- roro (head-waters of Wai-pawa River) they found the Ngati Upoko-iri and and Ngati Hine-manu living there. So they attacked the pa and defeated its inmates, killing twenty-two of them. Some of the survivors from Pona- pona fled across the Wai-pawa River, where they rallied, and in turn defeated their enemy at Wai-pohue, Pou-kawa, near Wai-pawa (Jour. Polynesian Soc, vol. ix, p. 74), and killed Rangi-maona-ariki, one of the chiefs of Tangi-te- ruru's war-party. After this defeat Tangi-te-ruru hastily returned home. DowNES. — Earlij History of Rangitikei. 107 The next item in the chain of events was another heke, which the narrator affirms took place before the battle known as Hao-whcnua, which was fought at Pakakutu, near Otaki, in 1833 or early in 1834:. The description of the journey was obtained from one of those who took part in it, as also was the previous one recorded. So the story may be given for the most part in our friend's own words. " Wai-kato came down, a great migTation of eight hundred strong. We came by way of Taupo, and joined the Turakina River at its head-waters, and were two days travelling down-stream. Then we struck over to the Rangi-tikei, and at Wai-tuna, on the farther side of the river, we caught Makere-rua, Moekau, and others of the Ngati Apa. Before this, when travelling from the Turakina Valley to Pou-rewa, at the mouth of the Manga- raupi, we found other people of the same tribe, whom we caught, and carried along with us to Kapiti. They were Tai-hapara and Mohi. Further on, at the Whaka-moe-takapau bush, we captured Tumata-whiti and others. They were busy preserving birds when we surprised and captured them. This man Tumata-whiti was a sorcerer. His own wife said he was an aki-taraiti " [probably tliis word means " firelight " : ahi = fire, taraiti = Maori mode of pronouncing " light "]. " So we killed him, and took the woman along with us. At Kiwitea we took Te Kiore prisoner ; but Kaka- raia, Pouri, and others escaped. Afterwards, when we reached Kapiti, we released Kiore, and sent him back to assemble the hapu for the purpose of making an alliance with them. At Kai-kokopu " [one of the numerous lagoons lying on the sand between the lower Rangi-tikei and Foxton districts, about a mile from the sea, now known to sportsmen as Hunia's Lake] " Te Kiore found Te Hakeke, who acquiesced in the proposal. Te Kiore then came down the Rangi-tikei to Parew^a-nui and other places. The tribes first met at Kai-kokopu, where the Ngati Rau-kawa chiefs met Te Hakeke, and the alliance was made. " Soon after we commenced our joiirney down the Turakina Valley we came upon a hunting-party capturing and preserving birds. Of these we took ten prisoners, one of the principal captives being Amiria, the wife of Hirea. Also, at Manga-raupi, by the Pourewa Stream — that is, between the Tutae-nui and Pou-rewa streams — we took six more of the Ngati Apa, who were also preserving birds when we came upon them. " We came out on to the river-beach Kokako-tahi, and travelled along the seaside to Otaki, from which place we sent a messenger back to Hakeke, who came and joined us, and after that came the fight at Hao-whenua. Immediately after that fight we returned to Wai-kawa, fifteen miles from Otaki, and we stayed there for some time. WTaile we were living there we heard that Hakeke had concentrated the Ngati Apa at Parewa-nui, so we went along to that place and found a pa built, where a great number of the Ngati Apa were residing with Hakeke. We were then four hundred strong. Nepia's pa was on the other side of the Rangi-tikei, opposite to Parewa-nui. The Ngati Rau-kawa went into it and occupied it bv force. This would be about the year 1830 " [1833]. We went straight on from Parewa-nui to Tu-rangi-wai-kani, on the other side of the Manuka bush inland " [an old pa on the flat below the Bull's racecourse]. " We went there for food, as the plantations of the Ngati Apa were very extensive. Tu-rangi-wai-kani was then a very large settle- ment, about the same size as Putiki of the present day (1875). We stayed there for fully a month, the prisoners we had taken staying with us. Some of them we had returned to their tribes previous to Hao-whenua. 108 Transactions. " Coining up the river from there, we came to Te Ana and Te Karaka^ at both of which places the Ngati Apa were hving in force. From there we went up to Te Pohue, and stayed there for two years and a half. There were three settlements between these places, full of Ngati Apa, for they were a very numerous people in those days. The reason why we stayed so long at Te Pohue was that we had takeii a great liking to the land in conse- quence of the abundance of kakas. A tvhakatavhi arose from this — namely. ' Noku tenei whenua ko rangatiro,' ; meaning, ' This my land is the chief of lands.' After we left Te Pohue we proceeded home." This may have been the migration known as the Heke Mai-raro, or " migTation from below," the north point being always referred to as down- ward. Another war is known as the Heke Whiri-nui, called by this name owing to the fact that the whiri or plaited collars of their mats were made very large for the journey. This is the name given by Travers, in the ' Life of Te Rau-paraha,' to the heke previously described, but called by the Maori narrator the Heke Kariri-tahi ; and the Kariri-tahi migTation is described by him (Travers) as having come down later, under Tara-toa ; but we are in- clined to think the account given by our dark friend is the correct one, though it is difiicult at tliis date to be certain, for after Te Rau-paraha was firmly established in his newly acquired land these hekes were constantly occur- ring, both to help him and also to participate in his newly acquired wealth. Regarding; the battle of Hao-whenua. to which some reference has been made, it appears that one of Te Rau-paraha's sons, named Tupoa, was killed by Ngati Parere, a hapu of Mua-upoko. He was discovered lighting a fixe (probably figurative language) at Kereru, so was waylaid and slain. Knowing full well the storm that this action would bring about their ears, Mua-upoko. prepared for battle. Invitations were sent out to Rangi- tane, Ngati Apa, Whanga-nui, and Nga Rauru, all of whom responded and sent their contingents ; and all the old people, women, and children of the Mua-upoko were sent to the pa at Papai-tonga for safety. The battle was fought at Otaki, at the rear of the present hotel, about half a mile from the mouth of the river ; Ngati Toa, in combination with Ngati Awa, Ngati Rau-kawa, and Ngati Tama, being victorious. It is said that seven hrmdred men were killed in this fight, and after it was over Te Rau-paraha attacked Papai-touga, where he killed a hmidred more. When Te Rau-paraha reached Waikanae he noticed a black cloud hanging over Kapiti; and, seeing in this sign an omen of further success, he again attacked the combined tribes at Horo-whenua, where he seems to have had but indifferent success, for he was driven to Kapiti by Mua-upoko, Ngati Apa, Rangi-tane, and Pehi Turoa, of Whanga-nui, with his three hundred men. Between Hao-whenua and the next heke, which we are able to describe, occuiTed the death of Taka-rangi at Kohuru-po. An account has appeared in the Jour. Polynesian Soc. ; but, as we have additional notes, we wiU proceed to describe the events that led up to that battle and other affairs ; so we will retrace our steps to the time of Kawana Hunia's birth. Kawana Hunia, Hakeke's son, was born at Wai-tapu, a pa far up the Bangi-tikei River, and when he had gTOwn out of childhood his father took him to Oroua, and placed him in the care of Hamiora. who arranged to look after him. He did this with the idea of creating a friendship, and to pre- vent his people of the Ngati Apa molesting Ngati Tauira and Maero, who Bad ceased to reside at Te Awa-mate and that neighbourhood, and had taken up their abode at Oroua, on account of the strained relationship which had for a long time existed between these hapus. DowNES. — Early History of Rangitikei. 109 There Avas a song, a sort of lullaby, composed by two old men named Te Kowa-knra and Taku-te-rangi about tlie event, a translation of which we have endea 70m'ed to render into rhyme : — Kaati e tama te noho i to wliare, E puta ki walio ra ka haere taua, Nga parae ka tokoto ki waho o Whaka-ari* He Ilia mai koe kowai to ingoa, Mau e ki atu, ko te Raro-o-te-rangi, Kai ki mai te wareware. Ka pau te whakanoa c te tini e te mano, Nakii ia nei ua te Kahue-pepe.f te Roa-wai-rerewaJ Kai wiiea o Tupuna hei whakawehi mai i muri ano Whaka-tati-potiki,§ Nana tokotoko te rangi runga nei, Ka pnta koe ki te whaiao ki te aomarama Hikaka te haere ki mnga Taikoria,|| Pukana o karu, ki roto Mana\va-tu, Kei o mattia e tu mai ra i te one o te riri ka ngaro te tangata, Aronui te haere ki roto o Horo-whenua, Kia Powhiri mai koia e whaea, E rail a te waka kia paua to rangi, Te ran o te huia e noa te tinana tera to piki te hokio runga, Nga manu hunahuna, kaore i kitea, E te tini e te mano Kia takaro koe nga takutai e takato i waho Wai-wiri,^ I roto o Wai-kawa** Ka eke koe ki runga o Puke-hou,** Ka whakamau e tama ki waho Rau-kawaf f Ko nga nioana ra e whakawhana noa ra o Tipuna i te kakau o te hoe Ngaro rawa tu ki Hawaiki. [Tbanslatiox.] Ai'ise, my son, and leave thy home ; O'er Whaka-ari's plains let 's roam. If common folk inquire of thee Regarding name and ancestry. Then proudly thou shalt make reply, " The Rib of Heaven abovo am I, S])rung from line of warriors bold, Descended from ancestor old, Name known in mythology, Whaka-tau-potiki." He upraised to the sky Up from earth the heaven high, Thereby making all things bright. For thee creating world of light. Hasten, hasten, let us wend, And Mount Taikovia ascend ; There wi'athful gaze on Manawa-tu Where thy sires with courage true Bravely fought ; and, sad to tell. Upon its sands there many fell : Ah ! for their fall to payment gain Let not their spirits call in vain. To Horo-whenua, far awa5\ Let us go without delay. * Wliaka-ari — The Saudou district. + Kahui-pepe — The family of the Pepe (Pepe-mua, Pepe-ioto, &c.), who were actow in the drama of Apa-kura in far Hawaiki. t Roa-wai-rerewa — All tall men, like the offspring of Wai-rerewa, also connected with Apa-kura. § Whaka-tau-potiki — Apa-kura's son. li Taikoria — -A hill at Carnarvon, overlooking Manawa-tu. 11 Wai-wiri — The lake usually known as Pa-pai-toiiga. Pa-pai-tonga is the island in the lake. ** Wai-kawa and Puke-hou — Both at Otaki. tt Rau-kawa — Cook Strait. See Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xxv, p. 427. 110 Transactions. There grand the greeting it will be Of thy female ancestry When their ohief again they see. All the tribe, with joy elate. The war-canoe will decorate. The hokio feather thou must wear Because it is extremely rare ; The huia 's common everywhere. On the joj'ful meeting-day You must your dignity display In fitting action, fitting speech. On Wai-Mari's adjacent beach, Near Wai-kawa. Ascend thou Puke-hou, Beyond Rau-kawa gaze o'er depths below. On it thy ancestors, in days gone by, Their paddles grasped and made their wakas fly ; But they departed, to return no more, Unto Hawaiki's dim and distant shore. After making this arrangement, Te Hakeke did what he could to carry it out, so he abandoned his place up the Rangi-tikei River, and built two pas at Oroua. Then, determined on peace, he went to Manawa-tu, and sought an interview with his old enemies ; and so successful was he that a chief of Rangi-tane composed a well-known song to the effect that these two great tribes, the Ngati Apa and Rangi-tane, had now met together for the first time in peace. The song commences, — Kaua te Hakeke e ra konei mai, titaha tonu atti ma te hori Ki waho ra i, kai peka mai ki konei kai kamua Hoki koe e taku hokowhitu e taku ma te rau e i. [Translation.] Let not Te Hakeke come near ; Let him keep away, lest he be destroyed By my hokowhitu (140) and my two hundred. 0 ! (This was probably the conference of chiefs referred to in the heke lately narrated.) After leaving his pa at Oroua, Te Hakeke went to Kai-kokopu, near the sea, while Macro, Rangi-waho, and Nga-potiki hapus took up their abode at Pukepuke. The chief did not stay long at Kai-kokopu, but returned to Oroua ; but soon again he left that place, on hearing that Nepia Tara-toa and Nga Maunga, of Ngati Rau-kawa, were occupying Pae-roa, and under- scrubbing bush there with a view to settlement, and that they were also using the Awa-mate eel-weirs. So he abandoned Oroua, and gathered together some of the scattered hapus of Ngati Apa, and again came to Pare- wa-nui, accompanied by the Kauae, Ngati Apa, and Ngati Tau-ira people, where they took up the clearings made by Ngati Rau-kawa, who had moved across the river to Piri-rau and Tara-toa as soon as they heard that Te Hakeke was on his way thither. As soon as Ngati Apa were once more settled at Parewa-nui, Ta-whito, the father of Paipai, of Whanga-nui (and grandfather of Hori Kerei, now living), came to Hakeke asking for aid. Hakeke responded, and sent messengers to Ngati Kauwhata and Ngati Upoko-iri, both of which tribes sent their men to aid in avenging Ta-whito's people, the Rangi Waho Tribe, some of whose men had been cut off by the Nga Raurus. So this tribe was duly attacked and defeated, but not downcast, for they came round inland seeking idu, and travelled to Poko- wharo, where they found it in the person of Wai-ina, the wife of Rawiri- te-mana-o-Tawhaki. DowNES. — Early History of Rangitikei. Ill 111 the meantime Pehi Turoa came down to Whanga-ehu to cultivate Ngati Apa's land there, and Te Hakeke asked assistance from Ngati Rau- kawa to drive him off. They consented, and the combined war-party went to Whanga-ehu by way of a road called Pehipehi, which went along close below the Poko-wharo Block, and so they arrived at Mata-tero, where they set fire to the houses of Pehi Turoa, destroyed all his seed, and then retired to Kau-anga-roa, expecting an attack ; but, as they were unmolested, they returned to Rangi-tikei. As Pehi Turoa had gone back to Whanga-nui after leaving his seed-kumaras at Whanga-ehu, he did not return immedi- ately, although he had received word as to his loss by the hands of the Ngati Apa. But, while the other party killed Wai-ina, the Ngati Apa people naturallv thought that Pehi Turoa had done this ; so they built a pa, called Kohuru-po, a little below Mata-tero, on the ^\^lang•a-nl^i side of the Wha- nga-ehu River, and there they waited for the expected attack with a strong garrison of Ngati Apa, Nga-riki, and Tupa-taua, under the command of Tu-ranga-pito. They had not long to wait. A large party of Ngati Rongo- mai-tawhiri, Nga Pae-rangi, and other Whanga-nui tribes, under the leader- ship of Taka-rangi and Tauria, travelled to Whanga-ehu, where they com- menced a night attack. They fought all night, and in the early morning Whanga-nui's great chief Taka-rangi was killed. When the Whanga-nui people saw their leader had fallen they lost heart and fled, though up to this time they had been getting the best of it. Other chiefs of the Ngati Apa taking part in the fight were Aperahama Tipae, Hakaraia, and Rangi- pouri. After the victory Tu-ranga-pito climbed on the palisading of the pa, and sang the following song : — Kahei koutou i haere mai ki te liri I haere mai koutou ki te patiti ahi Hei whakr.hoki riri. ta turikutia i Ngati Rougo-niai-tawhiri e Wliai roroa i te riri e, Whaka rongo ma ra, Tenei te hanga kiro kei a au anake Hua noa i a wai. he mea purotu koe, No raaua nei hoki tahi hiki ra Nana ra i waiwaha, He waka pakaru kino ki te akau raia ra, i. [Translation. ] You came not hither to battle — You came to enjoy the fire ; But, being weary, You coukl not stem the battle's tide. You should not follow up warfare. For you are only fit To sit around a fire And feel its glowing heat. Hearken unto me And look upon my face. For I am grieved at this man's death. I thought within myself He would remain with me As my beloved friend ; He taught me all my ways ; But now He is but as a pioud canoe Tossed ashore by restless waves. This translation gives but a feeble idea of the grim satire of the original, which was yelled and shouted at the top of the voice as a defiant battle-cry. 112 Transactions. Table 8. Hihi-mua I Rangi-tua-waru = Hine-kehn Teura I Kato-poua = Te Kiri Taka-rangi (killed at Kohuiu-iio) Rora-awhe-uru (f.) — Mete Kingi I I Mete Kingi Taka-rangi Mete Kingi (age about 65). After this victory Te Hakeke expected that, with the death of such a prominent man, there would be a strong combination against Ngati Apa, so he assembled all the branches of the tribe at Paewa, and aU the rest of the country was deserted. Whanga-nui expected from these preparations that there would be a great war-party from Ngati Eau-kawa, who were by this time firm friends with Ngati Apa, and were living at Poutu, just across the river from Paewa. So Hori Kingi Te Ana-ua sent his' brother Te Mawai to Hakeke to make peace — or, rather, to prevent a war ; for the influence of Europeans was now being felt, and the Natives saw how their constant internal troubles were thimiing their ranks. So peace was made at Paewa, and the Whanga-nui messengers returned home. After the victory at Kohuru-po the death of Ao-kehu occurred. Once more the war-cloud gathered, when Rangi-tane came to Whanga-ehu and Turakina to kill the people of those places, and when they thought they had killed all the people they went away. Tawai-whea, a great chief of Ngati Kahu-ngunu, was the chief man of that party. Now, when Te Ao-kehu heard that all the people of Whanga-ehu and Turakina had been killed, he pursued Rangi-tane, and overtook and killed them all on the sea-beach. Koko-pirangi also met that war-part v at 0-takapo (a well-known station between Bull's and Turakina), and again defeated them. (Here an effort was made to impress upon the narrator the fact that it must have been the ghosts of that war-party that Koko- pirangi met, as they were hua mate ; but he failed to see it.) These war- parties came straight to Turakina and Whanga-ehu from Here-taunga. Then Rangi-haeata, or Mokau, as he was sometimes called, of Ngati Toa, Te Ratu, and others came down on the Rangi-waho and Macro people who were living at the Awa-mate Pa, and defeated them there, and then came on to Waipu. Here Te Ao-kehu, who was Hakeke's gxand-uncle, fell in with them as he was travelhng from Rangi-tikei to Whanga-nui. When the Wai-riki people heard the guns of the invaders they rushed to Rangi-tikei, leaving Te Ao-kehu and a few others to fight, and so by evening Te Ao-kehu and all his people had been killed. When word was brought in that Te Ao-kehu had been killed, the whole of the hapus went to Oroua and to different places of the Rangi-tikei River, with the exception of one party who went up the Turakina to their pa Puke- ahua, where they Uved with the Ngati Tupa-taua. Ngati Toa followed the fugitives, and some of the old men were caught at Oroua. Whare-peta and Hira were both caught there, as well as others whose names are for- gotten. DowNES. — Early History of Rangitikei. 113 After tliis a war-party from Wai-kato came down under Te Horita, of Ngati Wha-naunga,* but in the meantime the Ngati Apa who had scattered before the Ngati Toa guns had come back to their own places. They fought Wai-kato at the Te Ara Pa, where for a time Ngati Apa had some measure of success, but in the end they were worsted. After Hao-whenua and Kohuru-po, came another hekc from Taupo, the last of which we have any details. The journey was described by the same native that narrated the " Kariri-tahi " journey, and is as follows : " After we returned from Kapiti we remained a long time at Taupo, and then came down again after Hao-whenua. We came down by the Mokai Patea road, mustering live hundred strong. At Mokai Patea a few of the Ngati Tama met us, and came on with us to Kawa-tau. We travelled overland this time, and did not canoe down the river, but travelled the track by the river, calling at Te Pounga, Otara and Mako-hine, Te Pohue, and Te Ana. Near here we found the whole of the Ngati Apa living in two separate fighting- pas, put up in defence of Whanga-nui. We had heard of the death of Taka- rangi at Whanga-ehu, and found they had thrown these pas up in conse- quence of an expected attack. Theja- principal chiefs with them were Marumaru, Tahataha, Tu-ranga-pito, and Aperahania Tipae. All the Ngati Apa chiefs were there with the exception of Hakeke. Leaving Te Ana, we pushed on to the mouth of the Kangi-tikei. Here we found Ngati Mania- poto returning from Hao-whenua. Ngati Tu-whare-toa and Whanga-nui had been -wdth them, but they parted at the mouth of the Rangi-tikei, the latter travelUng along the coast on their way home, while Ngati Mania-poto returned by way of the Rangi-tikei River, with the intention of attacking Ngati Hau-iti and Ngati Hine-manu on their way, because the latter tribes had neglected the Maori custom of sending presents of birds and food to Te Heuheu when he had passed through them on a former occasion " [apparently as a kind of tribute to his supreme position]. " These people had in consequence fled into the bush, and Ngati Mania-poto searched the neighbourhood for them, but in vain. From the Rangi-tikei River we pushed on, passed the Manawa-tu, and reached Otaki, The main body did not remain there long, and the rest stayed for about a year and a half, when they also retimied by way of Manawa-tu, struck the river at Te Ana, and so returned home. This journey was called ' Hou hou rongo ki Hao- whenua ' — that is, ' The peacemaking of Hao-whenua,' and took place about five years before Te Kuiti-tanga." (Kuiti-tanga, 1839, took place the day before the arrival of the " Tory," and is described in Wakefield's " Adventures in New Zealand.") " And now, after all this fighting and feasting, there came yet another army, few in number but mighty in power, armed not with guns, but books ; and soon the last fight was fought, the last banquet finished, our captives were liberated and returned to their homes at Parewa-nui and Rangi-tikei, and we also sent those home whom we had captured." (There is a song existing that refers to the retm-ning captives. Hura is mentioned in it, and he is connected with Pukepuke : " Katahi te huhure ka tiketike.") Parewa-nui became the assembhng-place of all the people, and Te Hakeke was the first teacher appointed there. But with the desire for knowledge came also the desire for guns. So Ngati Apa went on a visit to their distant relatives the Kiki-rongo, to try to obtain these coveted weapons ; and while * Te Horita-te-Ta,niwha, of Ngati Wha-naunga, came from Coromandel, which was his home. 114 Transactions. there some of the Ngati Apa people plundered food from the Ngati Kahu- ngmiu, who resented it, and retaliated by firing on the Ngati Apa. There- upon a fight ensued, but neither side gained ground, so peace wag made. But troubles were not yet quite over on all sides. There was a skirmish at Kiwitea known as Oiroa, where a yoxmg chieftainess of this name was taken prisoner, two persons being killed on the Ngati Hau-iti side. Then Ngati Hine-manu and Ng^iti Upoko-iri came from Ka-iri-take, on the Oroua. As soon as Ngati Apa heard of this, they defied them and threatened them with death ; but, through the mediation of many chiefs present at a meeting held to arrange the expedition, no fighting took place, and peace was made ■ — this time a lasting peace. Only one other murder took place to mar the union that has since existed, and this was the killing of a chief named Te Ngangi ; but this was not revenged, and the chieftainess Ruta was given as a pledge of peace to Kawana Hunia of Ngati Apa (Hakeke's son). And now the gospel of peace and goodwill to man was proclaimed, accepted, and carried out — yes, lived for many a year with far more interest and zeal than in many a so-called Christian country. List of Hapus (Sub-Tribes) of the Ngati Apa Tribe between the Whanga-ehu and Eangi-tikei Rivers. (Kindly supplied by A. McDonell, Esq.. of Lower Rangitikei. ) 1. Ngati Kauae. 11. Nga Riki. 2. Ngati Rangiwaho. 12. Ngati Tika. 3. Ngati Tauira. 13. Ngati Ratua. 4. Ngati Apu. 14. Ngati Tu-moe-tere. 5. Ngati Tai. 15. Ngati Tamatea. 6. Ngati Tupua. 16. Kiri-wlieke. 7. Nga Potiki. 17. Ngati Kahu-wai-rua 8. Ngati Tupa-taua. 18. Ngati Tamaea. 9. Tama-kuia. 19. Ngati Rangi-pokini. 10. Ngati Rakei. 20. Rangi-puhi. Art. XII. — The Waterloo of the Waikato, fought in 1830, and its Effects on the After-enacted Land Laws of that Part of the North Island. By W. Welch, F.R.G.S. [Read before the Manaioatu Philosophical Society, 29th April, 1909.] The Battle of Taumatawiwi, fought in 1830, may well be termed the Waterloo of the Waikato. A few words will explain the importance of the battle. The Maori tribes north of Auckland, collectively known as Ngapuhi, were the first to obtain firearms in quantity. With the new weapon these tribes overran the North Island, slaughtering and capturing prisoners almost with impunity. Their incursions into the Waikato culminated in the storm and massacre of Matakitaki Pa in 1822. Welch. — Waterloo of the Waikato. 115 Ngapuhi, however, formed no permanent settlements south of Auckland ; they only depopulated the Waikato and Waipa districts. The tribes collectively called Ngatimaru and Ngatipaoa, of the lower Thames and south coast of Hauraki Gulf, were also by this time (1822) becoming well supplied with firearms, and they invaded, with intention of permanent settlement, the almost wholly depopulated great triangle formed on the west and east by the Waipa and Waikato Rivers, and by the Maunga- tautari Mountain and Range in the south. Between the years 1814 and 1822, Ngatihaua, under their politic and warrior chief Te Waharoa, driven from their proper homes on the Waikato, maintained by sheer talent and bravery their tribal individuaUty and inde- pendence in the inland country north of Rotorua and between the Waikato and Thames Rivers. They established friendly relations with the Tauranga PUHCKURA RAnC£_ ^ • CIS* f •<■«■« P80A/gatihaua ;^//„^H, eONaaf//2aua Show allies- WOO Afgai-irang/ ^/ to gullv- crojsable. in places "~ 3000 Ngafimaru G Nffatipaoa '^iles — i",,),; /VIANC/ITAUrARI MT Chasm, 40 'wide. INote. Each I represents approx/maieJy JO Ngatihaua. „ y- »j V " A/gat/rangi. ,, . „ >, „ /y^at/maru or f^gatipaoa. Battle of Taumatawiwi. tribes, collectively known as Ngaiterangi. Through these latter tribes Te Waharoa contrived to obtain a considerable number of firearms, and had greatly distinguished himself on behalf of Ngaiterangi against the Arawa and Rotorua Tribes. Up to this time, however (1830), he had been quite unable to make any attempt to recover the ancestral lands of Ngatihaua in the Waikato ; but now (1830) he learned that the other remnants of Waikato tribes, having obtained firearms through the ports of Manukau, Kawhia, and Mokau, were forming plans to attack the Ngatimaru and Ngatipaoa, who had taken permanent possession of the triangular district above mentioned. Now, it would, according to Maori custom, be very derogatory to the prestige {mana) of Ngatihaua and their chief Te Waharoa if that district was reconquered by any one other than themselves, for, although, supposing the Waikato 116 Transactions. tribes were successful in expelling Ngatimaru and Ngatipaoa, Ngatihaua would certainly be allowed to return to their ancestral possessions, yet they would under such circumstances do so in a subordinate position. Ngatihaua at this time mustered three hundred first-class warriors, ninety per cent, of whom had a firearm of some kind, and they had been disciplined by Te AVaharoa, who for the previous eight years had taught every man of them to look forward to the time when they could burst into the Waikato, and by sheer valour recover their ancestral homes from the numerous enemy in possession. News now came that the Waikato tribes had got together eight hundred well-armed men in the Hunua and Manukau Eanges. These now, under several chiefs, proposed to proceed up the Waikato and Waipa Rivers, while other parties were preparing to join them from the Pirongia Range on the west and Mokau on the south. It was time, therefore, for Ngatihaua to act, or leave to others the recovery of the land. In this emergency Te Waharoa appealed to his friends (Ngaiterangi, of Tauranga) to lend him a thousand men, not to be exposed to imminent risk, but merely to make a show of force. Ngaiterangi consented. Te Waharoa got the thousand show allies, and the sketch on the preceding page will, I hope, illustrate the great battle that ensued while the Waikato war-parties were stiU several days distant. The address of Te Waharoa to his people before leaving the Thames hills was short, and altogether to the point. " Our women* and children,"^ he said, " go with us, for we go to stay. If we cannot conquer, we can die. And our women and children shall be with us in either case. Any of you who have had ' omens ' can remain here and join Ngaiterangi. At dawn of day we march. The women and children will follow. Enough ! You are each as good a man as I, and it is my fixed intention to conquer before the Waikato tribes come up." There were no bad omens, and not a soul of Ngatihaua remained behind. In the afternoon of the follo\\dng day they junctioned with their Ngaiterangi allies, and together they crossed the Waikato River a little above where the Town of Cambridge now stands. The Ngatimaru and Ngatipaoa were formed along the brow of the gully and terrace, their left resting on their strong pa, their right on the perpen- dicular cliff of the Waikato River. Their whole line formed nearly a right angle, but they neglected to occupy the mass of loose rocks in the angle formed by the river-cliff and the steep terrace. These rocks, or mass of separate boulders, lay a few yards from the foot of the terrace. Te Waharoa noticed this, and these rocks became a distinct feature in his dispositions. He first of all disposed his thousand Ngaiterangi allies along the gully, with orders merely to keep up as hot a fire as they could across the gully, but he neither asked nor professed to expect from them any actual charge or hand- to-hand conflict. He, however, placed twenty picked men of his own Ngati- haua on the extreme right of his allies, with orders, on a given signal, to charge across the gully regardless of the number opposed to them, and to incite by their example as many as possible of their allies to follow. He then divided the remaining Ngatihaua into two bodies of 140 men each. The left detachment had no leader, as it was extremely uncertain which of them would reach their destined point of attack ; but every man of this 140 knew the orders — viz., that they were to creep through the fern to the edge of the chasm, and lower themselves by ropes to the bottom. Five women were detailed to creep after the column and let the ropes go when all the Welch. — Waterloo of the Wailato. 117 men had got to the bottom. The men were then, by means of notches cut in the papa cliff, to get at least one man and a rope to the top ; then by means of the ropes they all could get up more speedily, taking cover in the little clump of trees until all were on the upper level ; then at a given signal all were to run at best speed, and in the loosest possible order, to the rocks at the end of the level. There for a moment they were to halt and get together, and then charge with all their might on to the extreme end of the enemy's line. While this operation was in progress, the right-hand 140 Ngatihaua ad- vanced close to the waterfall, and kept up a hot fire on the angle formed by the terrace and the gully. Te ^^^aharoa himself kept a little farther back, on the slope of Pukekura Hill, until he saw the attack from the rocks on the enemy's right taking effect. Then, shouting his battle-cry, he made the signal to his twenty men on the extreme right of his allies, and charged with the whole weight of his 140 men on the angle of the enemy's line, just over the waterfall. At the same moment the twenty Ngatihaua on his ex- trente right charged across the gully, and in the enthusiasm of the moment and the natural love of a Maori for battle many of the Ngaiterangi allies followed them. About forty of the left column of Ngatihaua had fallen in the 500-yards race from the little clump of trees to the rocks, but the remaining hundred now came storming furiously and irresistibly along the enemy's long line. The determined charge of Te Waharoa, with his 140 men, on to the centre of the enemy kept them pretty well employed until the cry arose among the enemy that they were being cut off from their pa and their women by the desperate charge of the Ngatihaua twenty on the extreme right (left) of the enemy. This charge, too, was momentarily increasing in weight by parties of Ngaiterangi crossing the gully. The left column of Ngatihaua from the rocks actually rolled up the enemy's line until the two parties of Ngatihaua met at the angle. Then the united columns, still holding the flank of the enemy, continued the charge, until the cry arose among the enemy that they were being cut off from their pa ; then the fight became a rout. The ten survivors of the right-flank Ngatihaua detachment stood as rocks, back to back, amid the deluge of the retreating enemy, until the last of these got within the pa. Ngatihaua and allies then immediately retired out of " Brown Bess" range — for there were no 1,000-yards rifles in those days. Ngatihaua lost altogether seventy men killed and ninety wounded. The enemy lost 440 killed and about as many wounded. Those slightly wounded escaped to the pa. The enemy, however, had still considerably over two thousand men, and Te Waharoa could not implicitly depend on his allies. The Ngatihaua dead were therefore carefully collected, and the bodies forth- with cremated, in case they might fall into the hands of the enemy. When the wTiter last saw the place, in 1880, a small flagstaff still marked the spot where the bodies were burned. During the night after the battle negotiations were opened — -at- first between Te Waharoa' s Ngaiterangi allies and the enemy in the pa. Next day the matter was referred to Te Waharoa, and that wise and politic chief readily agreed to cease hostilities, provided the Ngatimaru and Ngatipaoa retired at once, " bag and baggage," from Waikato, and returned to their own proper district. This they accordingly did, escorted by Te Waharoa's Ngaiterangi allies and fifty Ngatihaua. 118 Transactions. Te Waharoa, with the remaining 180 Ngatihaua (half of them woimded), and the women and children, took possession of the enemy's pa, and re- mained there to receive the advancing Waikato parties from south-west and south. The reason I have termed this battle the Waterloo of the Waikato is that in our time the Native Land Court has held that all that region was completely conquered and occupied by Ngatimaru and Ngatipaoa, and reconquered by Te Waharoa and Ngatihaua ; consequently, all land titles in that region date from the Battle of Taumatawiwi. [I am much indebted to Mr. A. McDonald, of Palmerston North, for his valuable assistance in getting the facts required for this paper.] Art. XIII. — The Vegetation of the Kermadec Islands. By Reginald B. Oliver. [Read before the Philosophical Institute of Canterhury, dth October. 1909.] I. Introduction. Contents. VI II. Histoi-y of Botanical Investigation. III. Geology. IV. Climate. V. Introduced Animals and Plants. VI. The Plant Formations. 1. Coastal Formations. (a.) Rocks. (b.) Mariscus Slopes, (c.) Ngaio Scrub. (d.) Sand Dunes, (e.) Gravel Flat. 2. Inland Edaphic Formations. (a.) Rocks and Cliffs. (b.) Swamp, (c.) Lakes. 3. Forest Formations. (a.) General Remarks. (b.) Leading Physiognomic Plants and their Life- forms. (c.) Ecology. VII. VIII. IX. X. The Pi;.nt Formations — continned. "3. Forest Formations — continued, (d.) Physiognomy. (L) Dry Forest. (2.) Wet Forest. 4. Young Formations. (a.) Landslip. (b.) Tutu Scrub. (c.) Pohutukawa Forest. 5. Introduced Formations. (a.) Ageratum Meadow. (b.) Buffalo-grass Meadow. (c.) Beard-grass Meadow. Geographical Distribution. {(I.) The Species. {b.) The Subtropical Islands Pro- vince, (c.) The Formations. (d.) Dispersal. List of Indigenous Pteridophytes and Spermophytes. List of Introduced Plants. Bibliography. I. Introduction. In an area such as the south-western Pacific, where any one island does not include parts of two biological regions, one might imagine the limits of each region could be easily defined. Yet such is not the case. True, it is gene- rally agreed that the several islands to the south and east of New Zealand — Or.iVER. — Vegetation of the Kermadec Islands. 119 Auckland, Campbell, Macquarie, Antipodes, Bounty, Cliatliams — unques- tionably Ibelong to the New Zealand region, as not only do their natural productions closely resemble those of New Zealand, but the geological struc- ture of some suggests the probability of a former land connection with that country. To the north of New Zealand, however, there are three islands or groups of islands possessing floras and faunas as to whose relationships botanists and zoologists are not agreed. I refer to Lord Howe Island, Norfolk Island, and the Kermadecs. Being all of volcanic origin, they bear no geological evidence of having ever been directly connected with any land-mass. Sunday Island is perhaps an exception, as the pumice tuffs on the north coast include some fragments of hornblende-granite. Nugent I NoQio scrub Buffalo.gra,^ ^ 6^'' Napier I O ® a, Meyer I. Dayrell 1 ,SL_«-'^> ' p' ,t.' ',,♦•.«' \ DENHAM BAY ^/vf V/.^M/'juncn'oni'v -I^^ HERALD ISLETS (P Chanter I & «» /t) Wilson Pi ["iti Knob Parsons Rk X pr Smith BlulV -'. «|»Bpllons'Pk' SCENERY BAY SOUTH BAY [Zng'.t^h miles 'A / Coastal formations. ' ' ', REFEREXCE Wet forest. j M ^ Dry forest.' I^?','') ^ Young formation-.. ,' I ^< ,' ,'l Introduced formations. F^ ~^-- 1 Botanical Map of Sunday Island. Lord Howe Island is included under New South Wales in Mr. Bentham's " Flora AustraUensis," and in Baron von Mueller's " Census of Austrahan Plants " Norfolk Island as well is included in the Australian region. Pro- fessor R. Tate has pointed out (18 ; p. 205) that the floras of Lord Howe and Norfolk Islands are allied to that of New Zealand ; but these islands are not included in the New Zealand area by Mr. Cheeseman in his "Manual of the New Zealand Flora," though he enumerates the plants of the Kermadecs. There is as little agxeement among zoologists as among botanists respecting the region to which these islands belong. Australian zoologists claim them apparently because they are most easily worked from Sydney, but Dr. A. R. Wallace has shown (19 ; p. 453) that their faunas are really alHed to that of New Zealand ; and Messrs. Parker and Haswell (15 ; p. 596) 120 Transactions. follow Wallace in including tliem in the New Zealand region. Mr. W. L. Sclater draws the line between Norfolk and Lord Howe Islands. If the contour of the ocean-floor be taken into account, the three above- mentioned islands fall without the boundaries of the Australian region, for Lord Howe Island is separated from the continent of Australia by an ocean over 4,000 m. deep, but is connected with New Zealand by a sub- marine ridge less than 1,800 m. below the sm-face ; whilst Norfolk Island and the Kermadecs are much nearer to New Zealand than to Australia, and lie on submarine ridges stretching from New Zealand to Polynesia, though deeper than that reaching to Lord Howe Island. As regards the claim of these islands to be included in the Poly- nesian region, although some Polynesian species and genera of plants Teach their southern limit in one or more of them, the proportion is not large enough to warrant the inclusion of the islands in that biological region. The New Zealand biological region may be defined as including all those islands in the south-west Pacific Ocean lying between the parallels of 25° a,nd 60° S. lat. and the meridians of 155° E. and 175° W. long. From a consideration of the distribution of the plants in New Zealand, Dr. Cockayne has divided the two main islands and Stewart Island into provinces, each characterized by certain floristic and ecological features (5 ; p. 313). North of latitude 38° is the northern, south of latitude 42° the southern, while the intermediate parts he calls the central botanical province. The islands to the south of New Zealand form his subantarctic islands botanical pro- vince, while the Chathams and Kermadecs each form a separate province. In the section of this paper dealing with geographical distribution I have endeavoured to show that Lord Howe Island, Norfolk Island, and the Ker- madecs together form a natvu-al division, for which I propose the name ■" subtropical islands province." Situated as the Kermadecs are, midway between New Zealand and the Tonga Group on the southern boundary of the Polynesian region, their fauna and flora are of interest alike to New Zealand biologists and students of geogTaphical distribution. The geological structure of the islands, too, may indicate the route and date certain Polynesian species of plants entered New Zealand. The present islands do not seem to have acted as stepping- stones for the passage of many plants between Tonga and New Zealand, or vice, versa. Hymenophyllimi demissum and Ascarina lucida may be examples of migTants in the first direction, while Melicyfi/s ranuffonts has reached Eua either from Norfolk or Sunday Island. The Kermadecs are the most easterly of the three groups of islands which mark the northern limit of the New Zealand region, and, as they lie far from any land whence they could derive their stock of plants and animals, a knowledge of their flora and fauna will be interesting as showing which organisms are capable of crossing wide stretches ^of ocean. As to the means of making the jom-ney, some remarks are made under the heading " Geographical Distribution." It was my intention to confine myself to a description of the plant covering of the Kermadec Group, and an enumeration of the species found therein ; but the affinity of the flora to that of Lord HoAve and Norfolk Islands appeared to me striking, and not without significance, hence I thought it advisable to preface my account with a statement of what I believe to be the true position of the Kermadec Islands in the New Zealand biological region, which expression in this paper will include Lord Howe Oliver. — Yegetatioa of the Kermadec Islands. 121 Island and Norfolk Island. The floras of these two islands will only be mentioned in so far as they are related to that of the Kermadecs. Before closing this introduction I Avish to express my sincere thanks to those who in one way or another made it possible for this paper to be written : firstly, to those who helped the expedition before leaving New Zealand, and especially to Dr. Hilgendorf, M.A. (then President of the Canterburv Philosophical Institute), Dr. Cockavne, Professor C. Chilton. M.A., D.Sc, and Mr. E. E. Waite. F.L.S. ; to the Councils of the Otago Institute and Canterbury Philosophical Institute for grants of money to help defray expenses ; to the Marine Department for the loan of meteoro- logical instruments ; to Lieutenant Sir Ernest Shackleton for the gift of a boat ; and, finally, to those who so readily gave assistance while I was writing the paper — to Mr. T. F. Cheeseman, F.L.S., who looked over one of the collections of plants made by me in the Kermadecs and named the specimens ; to Mr. J. H. Maiden, of Sydney, who kindly compared some of my specimens with plants from Norfolk Island ; to Dr. Cockayne for many valuable suggestions ; and to Mr. E. Speight, M.A., B.Sc, who gave advice on geological matters. II. History of Botanical Investigation. In 1854 Captain H. M. Denham, in H.M.S. " Herald," made a survey of Sunday Island and the neighbouring seas (17 ; p. 14). He arrived on the 2nd and was occupied till the 24th July, during which time he frequently had to move his vessel on account of the rough M-eather experienced. Messrs. J. Milne and W. MacGillivray, naturalists on board the " Herald," made a small collection of plants on Sunday Island. This was forwarded by Captain Denham to Sir W. Hooker, and was described by Sir Joseph Hooker in the Journal of the Linnean Society for 1857 (10 ; p. 125). The number of species collected was 41, of which 21 were pteridophytes and 20 spermophytes. Four species were described as new — Coprosma petiolata, C. acutijolia, Sccevola gracilis, and Ascarina lanceolata. In the " Handbook of the New Zealand Flora " (1864-66) 40 species of vascular plants are mentioned as occurring in the Kermadecs. Of those recorded in the Journal of the Linnean Society, four are omitted, doubtless unintentionally, while three species are added — namely, Nephrodium molle, Coriaria thywifolia, and Accena Sanguisorbce. These must have crept in by accident, for no one is known to have collected plants on Sunday Island between 1854 and 1864. Two of them do not occur in the Kermadecs ; the third, however, Dryopteris parasitica (= iV". molle), is a common plant on Sunday Island. In 1887 the New Zealand Government despatched the colonial steamer " Stella " to the Kermadec Islands for the purpose of formally annexing the group to the colony. Captain Fairchild left Eussell on the 12th August, and, after a stormy passage to and from the islands, anchored under Cape Maria van Diemen on the 27th August. Landings were effected on Sunday, Macauley, and Curtis Islands. Mr. T. F. Cheeseman, Curator of the Auck- land Museum, accompanied the expedition, and, being interested chiefly in botany, made a large collection of plants on Sunday Island, the result of his investigations being published in vol. xx of the " Transactions of the New Zealand Institute " (1 ; p. 151). In the catalogue he gives of phanerogamic plants and ferns inhabiting the Kermadecs, 115 are enumerated- 122 Transactions. but in seven cases the species could not be determined. Mr. Cheeseman's conclusions are, — (1) The Kermadec Islands have received their plants from two sources : there have been two opposite streams of colonisation — one, much the larger and more important, from NeAv Zealand ; the other, much less conspicuous, from the Polynesian islands. (2.) The nature and com- position of the flora, the relationship to those of New Zealand and Polynesia, and the peculiarities generally, are best explained on the supposition that the islands have been slowly stocked with their plants by chance migrations across the ocean. Since the publication of the above, two other papers dealing with the flora of the Kermadecs have appeared in the " Transactions of the New Zealand Institute " (2 and 7), in which four new species are described. Only one, however, Poa polyphylla, is an addition to the flora, the others being included in Mr. Cheeseman's list. Mr. Cheeseman in his " Manual of the New Zealand Flora " includes the names of 104 species of plants as occurring in the Kermadec Islands. From the list given in vol. xx of the Transactions he omits one as being introduced {Polypogon monspeliensis), and seven others, the omission of three of which {Mariscus ustulatus, Paspalum scrobiculatum, Dichelachne sciurea) is probably due to an oversight. Diplazium japonicum, and three species (including Poa polyphylla) collected by Miss Shakespear, are added. This brings the n^^mber of species recorded to 107, if the three above omis- sions be included. Early in 1907 Mr. W. L. Wallace, of Timaru, and myself made arrange- ments to visit and stay for a year on Sunday Island for the purpose of studying plant and animal life. Subsequently Messrs. T. Iredale, C. E. Warden, and S. R. Oliver joined the expedition. We left Auckland in the New Zealand Government steamer " Hinemoa " on the 28th December, 1907, and landed our provisions, instruments, &c., in Denham Bay on the 31st December. From a camp in Denham Bay and another near Fleetwood Blufi as bases the whole island was explored, while a motor-launch was used to visit the outlying rocks. The " Hinemoa " called again on the 7th November, 1908, but owing to bad weather we were not able to ship our goods until the 11th. We landed on Macauley Island, Curtis Island, and French Rock on the voyage back, and reached Auckland on the 16th November. The Kermadec Islands were chosen as the object of our investigation on account of their being in ce.rt.ain respects a little-known portion of the New Zealand biological region. Our collections included specimens of rocks, plants, and animals ; while meteorological observations were taken daily for a period of nine months. Besides collecting specimens, I paid much attention to the plant formations existing on the islands. Following are some of the results of my investigations. The number of species of plants added to the flora is fourteen : — Trichomanes humile, Dichelachne crinita, Hymenophyllum flahellatum, Heleocharis acuta, Cyathea kerniadecensis, n. sp., Kyllinga brevifoUa, Nephrolepis cordijolia, Carex lucida, Histiopteris incisa, Juncics effusus, Lycopodium voluhile, J. pauciflorus, Danthonia pilosa, Erechthites prenanthoides. Oliver. — Vegetation of the Kermadec Islands. 123 Two species hitherto incorrectly iudentified, owing to the imperfect nature of the specimens, I am now able to name, — Dryopteris glabella (A. Cunn), C. Chr. = Nephrodium decompositum, Hook, f., Jour. Linn. Soc. (Bot.), vol. i, p. 129 (not of R. Br.) ; Veronica hreviracemosa, R. B. Oliver = V. salicifolia, Cheeseman, Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xx, p. 171 (not of Vahl). Five species are transferred to the list of introduced plants*; — Cofdyline terminalis. Ageratum conyzoides, Geranium molle, Sonchus oleraceus ; Aleurites moluccana, and three do not occur in the islands, — ' Agropyrum scahrum, Coprosma Baiteri. Accena Sanguisorbce, Asplenium Shuttleworthianum is here restored to specific rank ; so that the total now stands at 114 species. III. Geology. The Kernndec Islands, four in number, lie in a line extending from Sunday Island, in S. lat. 29° 15', W. long. 177° 59', about S. 22° W. to French Rock, in S. lat. 31° 24', W. long. 178° 51'. They are situated on a sub- merged plateau, part of the submarine ridge connecting New Zealand with Tonga. This plateau, which is surrounded on all sides by water more thv.n 2,700 m. in depth, is now probably rising, as the last movement of which there is any evidence was an uj^heaval of Sunday Island to the extent of about 60 m. Sunday Island, the largest of the group, is distant about 950 km. from Tongatabu, and 1,000 km. from the North or East Capes of New Zealand. Its greatest length is 10-3 km., and its area 29*25 sq. km. ; Moumoukai, the highest point, is 524 m. above sea-level. Sunday Island is composed chiefly of pumiceous and other tuffs. There are a few lava-streams, but these have little effect upon the vegetation other than forming the substratum for certain of the coastal and inland rock formations. The tuffs, being of a more or less 'oose nature, suffer severely from the action of sea and atmosphere. The whole island is of a mountainous character, and the surface has been formed by subaerial denu- dation into a series of narrow spurs separating deep ravines. Towards the coast these spurs usually terminate abruptly in cliffs with a sheer drop to the sea of from 200 m. to 300 m. The crater occupies a large portion of the island. The rim is low and narrow on the north, the lowest point being only 55 m. above sea-level ; elsewhere it is high, averaging over 300 m. From it there branch off three main ridges : one runs north-west from Expedition Hill to Hutchison Bluff, another south-west from Mount Junc- tion to Smith Bluff, and the third south-east from Moumoukai to the east coast. Level ground occurs in Denham Bay, in the crater, and on Low Flat and the adjoining terraces. There is a swamp in Denham Bay, and three lakes in the crater. Except for a gravelly beach in Denham Bay, and a sandy one on the north side of the island, the coast is rocky — sometimes boulder beaches ; more often c\iS.'debris, consisting of large and small angular blocks of lava 124 Transactions. or tuff. Hence the variety of stations afforded for salt-loving plants is limited. Through ther kindness of Captain Bollons I was able to land on all the islands visited on the voyage from Sunday Island to New Zealand. I am therefore able to give some account of the geology and botany of the three islands of the Kermadec Group lying to the south-south-west of Sunday Island. Macauley Island, distant 109 km. from Sunday, is 2 km. long and 3 sq. km. in extent. The highest point, 237 m. above sea-level, is near the western end, and from here the land slopes away gradually to the east- ward, terminating everywhere in cliffs which can be scaled at one place only — the Lava Cascade. The island is composed of beds of pumice overlying lava, and^ covered ^with some vesicular scoria and ash, which forms the soil. Curtis Islands, 35 km. from Macauley, consist of two rocky islets — de- tached portions of a crater in a state of thermal activity. The total area is about 0-6 sq. km., and the highest point 100 m. above sea-level. The crater-floor contains much hot mud and sulphur, while numerous holes filled with boiling watei are dotted about. Apparently the islands are composed of a kind of tuff. In the short time I was there I saw no lava. French Rock is distant 83 km. from Curtis Islands. It is composed entirely of lava rocks, and is about 250 m. in length and 50 m. in height. The geological evidence of the age of the islands is conflicting. As pointed out by Mr. Speight,* the occurrence of fragments of hornblende- granite indicates the presence of a continental area. On the other hand, any land connection with either Tonga or New Zealand must have been very remote, as deep water now entirely surrounds the Kermadec Group. The structure of Sunday Island is that of a tuff cone built up on a base which at the time of the first deposits was submerged. The oldest visible beds, which fortunately contain fossils, are of submarine origin, and do not, I think, date back further than the Pliocene age. The character of the flora, and the small proportion of endemic species of plants, are further evidence of the recent appearance of the present islands above the surface of the sea. That the Kermadec plateau once formed part of a continent extending in a north-and-south direction is probable ; but the fragmentary nature of the productions of the group demands that this land should be submerged before the present islands came into existence (see 1 ; p. 161). IV. Climate. The Kermadec Islands are situated near the southern edge of a belt of calms and variable winds lying between the south-east trades and the region of westerly winds. This belt moves shghtly northward during the southern winter, so that the weather experienced on Sunday Island in 1908 included many westerly gales during the winter months, but for the remainder of the year w^as changeable, with some settled weather in March and April. Generally speaking, the climate is mild and equable, with many rainy days, considerable precipitation, much wind, especially in the winter months, and a constantly humid atmosphere. * " Petrological Notes on Rocks from the Kermadec Islands, and some Geological Evidence of a Former Subtropical Pacific Continent." (See p. 241 of this volume.) Oliver. — Vegetation of the Kennadec Islands. 125 Neither a drougiit nor a hurricane was experienced during my stay- on Sunday Island, though both are known to occur there. On one occa- sion, according to Mrs. T. Bell, who has lived on Sunday Island for the past thirty years, no rain fell for a period of five months ; while hun-icanes have visited the island about nine times since 1878. The effect of a hurri- cane is to be seen in one place in Denham Bay, where every tree in its path is blown down. In the forest generally a leaning tree here and there, and the prostrate habit of the large trees of Metrosideros villosa on the ridges, are the only signs of the efiect of hurricanes. The trees affected are usually leaning in a northerly direction — that is, away from the qiiarter (south- east) whence the hurricanes are said invariably to blow. The temperature during the nine months, February to October, 1908, varied between the extreme limits of 8-7° C. on the 4th August and 29-4° C. on the 1st February, though days hotter than this occurred in January before regular observations were taken. A note in my diary shows a maxi- mum reading of 31-7° C. for the 29th January. The rainfall is distributed fairly evenly^ throughout the year, and for the nine months totalled 1,716 mm. In cloudy and rainy weather a mist continually hangs about the hilltops, hence the upper portion of the island receives a considerable amount of moisture more than the lower-lying ground. As a consequence, the upper forest of Sunday Island is quite different from the lower, though the one imperceptibly passes over to the other at an altitude of 200 m. to 300 m. Calm days are rare, and the wind often blows with great violence. On the 2nd April no horizontal movement of the air was recorded by the anemo- meter ; on the 9th March the instrument registered 1,087 km. On 76 out of 274 days covered by the nine months during wliich read- ings were taken the air was saturated. The driest day was the 3rd Feb- ruary, when the degree of relative humidity was 51. The amount of cloudiness (observations ta-ken at 9 a.m.) averaged 0-6 of the visible sky\ I give two tables showing the weather-conditions at Denham Bay, Sunday Island, for 1908. The observations were taken by Mr. C. E. Warden, but I am entirely responsible for the figures as they appear here corrected and tabulated. Table I shows the weather month by month, while Table II shows the duration of each kind of weather. Table I. Temperature, C°. RainfalL Wind. Relative Month, 1908. Min. Max. Mean. Mm. Days. Km. per Day. Per Cciit» February 20-3 25-9 23-1 198 16 364 81 March 19-0 25-8 22-4 175 14 354 90 April 16-8 24-2 20-5 287 16 209 95 May 15-6 21-4 18-5 172 21 200 96 Jtine 15-0 20-1 17-6 151 21 275 93 Julv 13-3 19-4 16-3 170 27 467 97 August . . 13-3 18-2 15-7 237 19 401 91 Septeniber 12-6 19-2 15-9 100 18 256 84 October . . 14-9 20-9 17-9 226 24 425 89 Means and totals 15-7 21-7 18-7 1,716 176 328 91 126 Transactions. Table II, Direction of Temperature, C°. Bainfall. Wind. Belative Humidity. Per Cent. Wind. Min. Max. Mean. Mm. Days. Km. per „»„ Day. I^*y8- S.E. E. N.E. N. N.W. W. S.W. s. 14-4 17-2 16-3 15-3 16-0 15-0 14-7 15-0 20-6 23-7 21-6 20-7 21-3 22-1 21-0 20-2 17-5 20-4 18-9 18-0 18-6 18-5 17-8 17-6 27 154 597 304 411 100 73 50 14 29 20 15 27 43 17 11 195 249 372 344 404 346 448 356 30 60 26 19 30 63 29 17 87 88 94 93 95 93 88 88 V. Introduced Animals and Plants. The effect of animals and plants introduced intentionally and acci- dentally tlirougli the agency of man is most marked on the vegetation of Sunday and Macauley Islands. It amounts to an alteration of the forest formation on Sunday Island ; and the occifpation of ground cleared of forest or scrub, by meadow formations on both Sunday and Macauley Islands. During the early part of last century Sunday Island was the headquarters of an extensive whaling industry carried on in the south-western Pacific. In order to afford means of suhsistence for possible castaways the whalers liberated goats on Sunday and Macauley Islands, and, to provide the goats with pasture on Macauley Island, burnt the scrub so that grass might grow. The goats increased rapidly in their new home, and did not suffer from the lack of water on the islands, as these animals are satisfied with the moisture taken with the herbage. On Macauley Island they effectually prevented the regrowth of scrub, so that now in all 'places accessible to them no more vegetation is to be found than a close-cropped beard-grass (Polypogon mons- peliensis) meadotv. On Sunday Island, as their numbers increased the goats spread to all parts, and, being expert cliff-climbers, little vegetation was beyond their reach. They wander about through the forest in herds of twenty or more, and eat a wonderful variety of vegetable substances — bark and leaves of trees, seedlings, and ferns — thus thinning the undergrowth considerably. Certain plants once common have been almost exterminated by them, and are now found only on cliffs and other inaccessible places. Conspicuous examples are Homolantlius polyandrus, Veronica breviracemosa, Aspleniwn lucidum, and A. Shuttle worthianum. The seedlings of other species are seldom allowed to grow up, and hence only such plants as begin their existence on Cyathea trunks, and, growing downwards and often strangling their host, take root in the ground, are able to reach maturity. This commonly happens with Nothopanax arboreum, which promises to become very rare or even extinct on Sunday Island ; and often with Metrosideros villosa. Young plants of Cyathea, kermadecensis are greedily eaten, and, though mature plants of this magnificent fern are plentiful, young ones are ex- tremely rare. With Rhopalostylis Baueri a fair number of the seedlings grow up, as goats merely browse on the young palms, which are everywhere abundant. The bark is stripped from the trunks of Pisonia Brunoniana and Notho- panax arboreum as far as goa^s cr.n reach. This operation, however, kills Oliver. — Vegetation of the Kermadec Islands. 127 Homolanthus polyandrus, which ph^nt Mr. Cheeseman in 1887 (1 ; p. 172) recorded as " not uncommon." The species is now almost extinct. In Denham Bay sheep eat down Sccevola gracih's, and in its place Stel- laria media and Cerastium viscosum have become abundant. The invasion of a number of European and other plants has not in itself much altered the physit)gnomy of the plant formations, but where ground has been disturbed introdueed plants are quieker than indigenous species in taking possession. Introduced species do not readily spread far into the forest except in such places where the larger plants have deHberately been cleared away, and here three new and distinct formations have been created. These are the mcadoAVS described below. Ageratum conyzoides was introduced thirty years ago, and is now abundant in several parts of the island. Possibly goats have assisted in spreading this species, which is the only introduced plant taking a prominent part in several of the plant associations. VI. The Plant Formations. All the plant formations on Sunday and Macauley Islands are more or less modified through the depredations of introduced goats, which have not only directly expunged certain plants from the forest, but in so doing have made openings which have been partly filled by introduced species. Hence in places it is difficult to imagine what the original forest was like, especially as it is known that a handsome tree, Homolanthus polyandrus, now absent, was once abundant in many places. The undergrowth perhaps suffers most from the introduction of goats, which search out particular plants whose elimination changes its appearance ; also, by the extermi)ia- tion of Homolanthus polyandrus, and the suppression of young plants of Pisonia Brunoniana, Nothopanax arboreum, and Cyathea Jcermadecensis, the physiognomy of the forest may be entirely altered. In the Kermadec Islands climatic conditions favour the growth of forest ; all other plant formations except meadow occurring there may be classed as edaphic. The meadow formations ow^e their existence to the interference of man, and are gradually being superseded by forest ; the swamp in Denham Bay, also, appears to be drying up, and forest taking its place. The plant formations, then, naturally fall into tw^o groups — the climatic, the character of whose vegetation is governed by atmospheric precipitations, and the edaphic, whose vegetation is chiefly determined by the nature of the soil (16 ; p. 161). In this paper the plant formations of the Kermadecs are arranged according to their possible evolution, and are divided for purposes of description into five groups — (1) coastal, (2) inland edaphic, (3) forest, (4) young, (5) introduced. The climatic formations are included in the third group, while groups (1) and (2) are edaphic. The last two groups may be termed unstable formations. Supposing we go back to early Pliocene times, when the Kermadecs were just appearing above the sea-surface, and try to imagine what the conditions would be. The first plants to gain a footing on the new land would be those able to stand wetting with sea-water, such as are now found among coastal rocks.* Thus the coastal formations would be the first * On Krakatoa the first plants to appear after the destruction of the vegetation in 1883 were chiefly ferns (Treiib.. quoted by Schimi)er, 1(5 ; p. 185). but the island which remained after the eruption was of some considerable area. 128 Transactions. to appear on small oceanic islands, and the order would be the vegetation of rocks, scrub, sand dunes. Examples of islands in this stage are French Rock and Curtis Island. Next, as the land increased in area there would be more gi'ound beyond the reach of salt spray, and stations for land- plants would appear, the order being rocks, perhaps swamp and lake, and finally forest. The destruction of areas of forest by volcanic eruptions or landslips would create new ground where the process of colonising would begin anew, but under entirely different conditions, as the devastated area would be surrounded by forest, which would only be hindered from spread- ing by the barren nature of the soil ; and a new factor so far as the formations here described are concerned is the presence of species of in- troduced plants and animals. On Sunday Island we are able to watch this actually going on, there being two such areas in process of being re- forested. One was caused by a large landslip about four years ago, the other by a volcanic outburst in 1872. The last period in the history of the plant formations began with the advent of man. Hardy cosmopolitan plants were introduced, the original formations cleared, and the ground immediately occupied by the new- comers. 1. Coastal Formations. Only such formations as can be called " coastal " in the narrowest sense cf the term are included in this section. Coastal conditions (see 5 ; p. 316) depend upon the distance sea-spray may be carried inland regularly and in large quantities by air-currents, which along the shore almost invariably blow towards the land. For instance, in Denham Bay, which is on the west side of Sunday Island, easterly winds coming over the top of the high cliffs have the efiect of causing an inrush of air along the beach to com- pensate for the withdrawal of air from near the clifi-face. Other factors maldng coastal conditions are salt in the soil, and the Httle Avater-holding capacity of the substratum, which in the Kermadecs is rocks, sand, or pumice. (a.) Rocks. — Under this heading I will include the vegetation of rocky shores and shingle beaches. All the coast-lines of the Kermadec Islands, with the exception of Denham Bay and Low Flat beaches on Sunday Island, are rocky, and differ but little in their vegetation. As in the winter months gales are frequent, the vegetation is often drenched with salt water, while during hurricanes the waves break over a considerable tract of land all round the coasts. The smallest quantity of soil on a ledge or in a crevice seems sufficient to support vegetation, which must rely for its existence chiefiy on the abundant rainfall, which, besides supplying moisture, washes down earth from the cliffs above. Plants of Asflenium obtusatum were noticed on the roofs of caves, in which position they depend entirely on the percolation of rain-water carrying sediment through rock-crevices. The principal plants composing the coastal rock vegetation are Mes- emhryayithcmum australe, Asplenium ohtusatum, Poa polyphylla, Coprosma petiolata, Samolus repens stricta, Lobelia anceps, Tetragonia expansa, Apinm prostratum, Mariscus ustulatus, Parietaria debilis, and Scirpus nodosus. Coprosma petiolata occurs as a low prostrate shrub closely hugging the cliff. On Dayrell Islet, where the vegetation is much exposed, the plants are stunted and about 1 m. high, with exceedingly dense foliage of small rolled leaves. On Fleetwood Bluff the leaf-blades of a male plant measured 53 X 21: mm., 54 x 26 mm., 51 x 28 mm., were shining, light green, cori- Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLII. Pl. XII. > M o I— I O p &^ O O I— t <: H O > Face p. 138. Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLII. Pl. XIII. c5 -1 O O <1 &3 fa O o o a > Trans. N.Z. Inst. Vol. XLII. Pl. XIV. in Q Z <^ CO Q <; Trans. N.Z. Inst.. Vol. XLII. Pl. XV. VEGETATION OF THE KERMADEC ISLANDS.— Oliver. Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLII. Pl. XVI. ci3 O CO Q cc I— I o Q tri H o o t-H H O Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLII Pl. XVII VEGETATION OF THE KERMADEC ISLANDS —Oliver Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XI.II. Pi.. XVIII. VEGETATION OF THE KER.MAIJEC ISLANDS.— Oliver Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLII. Pl. XIX, O m Q ^; < CO >— ( o Q <^ P? O z o I— < <1 H W O Trans. N.Z. Tnst., Vol. XLII. Pl. XX. VEGETATION OF THE KEKMADEC ISLANDS.— Oliver. Face I). 160. Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XI.II. Vl. XXI. ^^^'^m^^yw^^^w^j^^^^?^. VEGETATION OF THE KEEMADEC ISLANDS.— Oliver. Trans. N.Z. Inst., Vol. XLll. Tl. XXII. ■^iUlAMl^^^m'et/^, VEGETATION OF THE KEEMADEC ISLANDS.— Oliver. Trans. X.Z. Inst.. Vol. XLII. Pl. XXIII. VEGETATION OF THE KERMADEC ISLANDS.— Oliver Oliver. — Vegetation of the Kermadec Islands. 129 aceous, with the margins recurved or more or less rolled. Leaves of young shoot, 70 X 34 mm., 73 x 34 mm. Li exposed places on the east coast of Sunday Island the leaves were usually much rolled, the two parts of the upper surface sometimes touching underneath. Poa polyphylla forms small tussocks of fine, drooping foliage, with abundant small, moderately dense, drooping panicles projecting beyond the foliage. Leaves narrow, 12-20 cm. long, 1-5-2 mm. broad, coriaceous, scabrid on the margins and keel. Culms crowded, length to end of panicle + 35 cm. Samolus repens stricta is a small subshrub with usually few erect branch- ing stems 20-30 cm. high, bearing near their extremities small axillary white or pinkish flower's. Leaves small, 10 mm. long, 3 mm. broad, cori- aceous, obovate, ending in small points. Where a lava cliff forms the coast-line, as at the north end of Denham Bay, the plants occur in crevices or on ledges of the clifE-face. In such situations are found Asplenium obtusatum, Samolus repens stricta, Mesembryanthemum australe, Poa polyphylla, Coprosma petiolata, and Lobelia anceps. On the north coast of Sunday Island, where the cliffs are of a loose material, and fragments are continually falling, a heap of rocks and rubble is formed at the foot. Here occur Asplenium obtusatum, Mesembryan- themum australe, Lobelia anceps, and Samolus repens stricta ; while at Rayner Point Parietaria debilis, Apimn prostratum, Tetragonia expansa, Rhagodia nutans, and Mesembryanthemum australe are most abundant, with a few plants of Calystegia Soldanella and Mariscus ustulatus. On slopes of tuff at the base of Fleetwood Bluff and the Terraces Sccevola gracilis, Ipomosa pes caprcB, and Imperata Cheesemani occur, also Coprosma petiolata and small prostrate shrubs of Myoporum Icetum. The coastal rocks on Meyer Island are particularly bare and exposed. Two or three species of lichen are abundant, and in crevices and lodgment- places for small quantities of soil the following plants are found : Mesem- bryanthemum australe, Scirpus nodosus, Asplenium obtusatum, Coprosma petiolata, Mariscus ustulatus, Tetragonia expansa. Napier Islet is a mere rock rising 60 m. above sea-level. Here and there a crevice contains a little soil, and a few ledges on the western slope support some stunted straggling trees of Metrosideros villosa and Myoporum Icetum. All these little patches of gTound are being continually overturned by burrowing shearwaters and petrels, and consequently are for the most part bare. The winter mutton-bird {(Estrelata neglect a) also occupies a por- tion of the available surface for its nesting-ground. The plants collected were Canavalia obtusifolia, Asplenium obtusatum, Mesembryanthemum australe, Sonchus oleraceus, Rhagodia nutans. Lobelia anceps, Solarium nigrum, Cotula australis, Panicum sanguinale microbachne, and Erigeron canadense. On Dayrell Islet Mariscus ustulatus, Asplenium. obtusatum, Mesemhry- anthemum australe, Samolus repens stricta, Rhagodia nutans, Tetragoma expansa, and a few others occur. The nearest land to French Rock is Curtis Island, distant 83 km. I therefore considered myself extremely fortunate in being able to land on this rock, the most southern member of the Kermadec Group, for half an hour (14th November, 1908) during the voyage back from Sunday Island. It is a mere rock, exposed in all its parts to the winds carrying salt spray, while during a hurricane the waves probably dash right over it. Mesem- bryanthemum australe was abundant near the summit, forming large green patches visible from the ship at some distance, while Asplenium obtusatum 5 — Trans. 130 Transactions. was also fairly common. Three other species were collected — Senecio lantus, a much-branched, erect, glabrous herb 25 cm. tall, with lanceolate, fleshy, lobed leaves, and rather dense many-flowered corymbs ; Deyeuxia Forsteri littoralis, a stunted form with small short panicles ; and Parietaria debilis. (&.) Mariscus Slopes. — Talus slopes at the foot of sea-chfis, and other steep slopes along the coasts, are usually covered with close-growing tussocks of Mariscus ustulatus, among which other plants occur in gxeater or lesser numbers. Next in importance to Mariscus ustulatus are Carex Forsteri insu- laris, Pteris comans, Hypolepis tenuifolia, Scirpus nodosus, and shrubby forms of Myoporum Icetum. Carex Forsteri iyisularis forms small tussocks, i-1 m. high, with crowded, drooping leaves, and many semi-erect slender culms bearing numerous compound spikelets, the upper ones sessile, approximate, the lower on long erect peduncles. Leaves 1 m. long, 1 cm. broad, yellowish-green, cori- aceous, margins and keel scabrid. Talus slopes are composed of debris weathered ofi the clilf-face. The soil is thus of a loose moving nature, and, having a large proportion of stones, is not touched by burrowing birds. Other coastal slopes, however, having no cliff above them, and hence with a more stable soil, composed of the weathered surface of volcanic tuffs, are used by burrowing petrels and sh arwaters for breeding-grounds during the summer months. The soil is thus everywhere being turned over for many months of the year, and in this respect resembles the moving soil of the talus slopes. Hence a similar type of vegetation is found in both stations. Mariscus ustulatus, whose large tussocks cannot be easily rooted up by the birds, is the principal plant, and in many places the sole occupier, of these slopes. Talus slopes in Denham Bay support a dense covering of vegeta- tion + 1 m. high, composed chiefly of Mariscus 'ustulatus, Ageratutn cony- zoides, Pteris comans, Carex Forsteri insularis, and Sicyos australis. Scirpus nodosus grows in tufts along the base of the slopes just above the reach of the waves. The steep slopes of Titi Knob, where not covered by forest, form the breeding-ground of large colonies of black-burrowers {Pufpnus chloro- rhynckus) and short-billed titi {(Estrelata nigripennis). The whole surface not occupied by rock is disturbed every year by these two species of sea- birds. Yet it is densely covered with large tussocks of Mariscus ustulatus, with only here and there, except on rocky gTound and clif?s, a few plants of Hypolepis tenuifolia, Pteris comans, Carex Forsteri insularis, Myoporum IcBtum, and perhaps some others. The vegetation of Curtis Island is best described under the present head- ing. The inner slopes and top of the crater-ridge are covered either with Mariscus ustulatus or Mesembryanthemiim australe, the two plants generally keeping separate, and each occupying a large share of the surface. Large numbers of sea-birds breed on the island. Black-burrowers and short- billed titi burrow wherever the soil is loose enough for them to move, while the masked gannet {Sula cyanops) lays on the surface, trampling down the Mesemhryanthemum about its nest. When the birds leave at the end of the breeding season the vegetation profits by the amount of guano mixed with the soil, hence a rank growth covers the ground wherever the birds are able to breed. Not uncommon among the Mariscus tussocks on the crater-ridge were plants of Lepidimn oleraceum jrondosum. This plant occurred in the form of much-branched, rounded bushes, I m. or more Oliver. — Vegetation of the Kennadec Islands. J 31 high, with the periphery of dense foliage and numerous clusters of racemes of many small white flowers. Leaves 6-8 cm. long, rhomboid-oblong, the distal half deeply serrate. Other plants noticed on the slopes were Scirpus nodosus, Rhagodia nutans, Parietaria debilis, Deyeiixia Forsteri, Solanum nigrum (pubescent form), and Sonchus oleraceus. (c.) Ngaio (Myopurum) Scrub. — Next to forest this is perhaps the most important plant association in the Kermadecs. It is essentially coastal, occupying a belt above high-water mark, from which Metrosideros villosa is absent. It is well developed where there is a space between the cliffs and the water's edge, as on the east coast of Sunday Island. It is found at a height of 25 m. above sea-level on the Terraces, and forms most of the vege- tation of Meyer Island (highest point, 100 m. above sea-level). The original vegetation of Macauley Island was in all probability ngaio scrub, but no trace of it now remains, it having been burnt by whalers during last cen- tury, when goats were liberated for the benefit of castaways. The narra- tive of the discovery of the island by Captain Sever, in 1788, says, " The top of the land was covered with a coarse kind of grass, and the place afiords great plenty of the wild mangrove." The coarse grass is probably Mariscus ustulatus, and the wild mangrove Mijoforum Icetum. In 1887 Mr. Percy Smith observed the charred stumps of some ngaio {Myoporum Icetum), as well as a few living shrubs of the same plant (17 ; p. 26). The principal members of the ngaio scrub are Myoporum Icetum, Pteris comans, Mncropiper excelsum major, Sicyos australis, Mariscus ustulatus, Carex Forsteri insularis, and Canavalia obtusifolia. Myoporum Icetum in the scrub formation is a low, spreading, irregularly branched shrub, with the trunk and branches often more or less horizontal. Foliage usually dense, with the upper surface, through which project numerous dead twigs, sloping towards the sea. Leaves 12-14-5 cm. long, 3-4-5 cm. broad, light green, thick, almost fleshy, often deeply serrate ; pellvicid glands scarcely visible. The ngaio scrub is exposed to constant winds bearing salt spray. The upper surface of the foliage, therefore, slopes gradually upwards from the outer edge of the scrub, where it reaches the ground. The soil is of the driest character, and in several places completely undermined by burrowing shearwaters. On Meyer Island one colony of birds succeeds another, so that the soil never has a rest. On the east coast of Sunday Island a belt of ngaio scrub extends from the rocky shore back for several metres to the base of the cliffs, or, in Coral Bay, to the forest proper, which begins at 10-15 m. from the shingle beach. The effect of the easterly winds on this belt is most pronounced in Coral Bay, The Myoporum forms a close, compact mass, beginning with plants appearing among the rocks and only a few centimetres tall, and gradually getting higher towards the forest, where the adjoining Mrtrosideros trees have the wind-shorn habit of the Myoporum. At 10 m. from the shingle the average height would be about 1-5 m. All twigs appearing above the general level of the foliage are killed by the wind. Intermixed among the Myoporum are Macropiper excelsunt major, Pteris comans, Carex Forsteri insularis, Sicyos australis, and Canavalia obtusifolia. The scrub in Coral Bay extends to the limits of vegetation along the shore, so that no line can be drawn between it and rock vegetation. The western Terrace is covered with ngaio scrub, which increases in height from the top of the sea-cliffs towards the base of the higher cHffs 5*— Trans. 132 Transactio7is. at the back. The soil is completely overturned once a year by black- burro wers {Puffinus chlororhynchus), and this has the efiect of almost killing the vegetation. The plants die down so much that there is hardly a gxeen leaf left, and they have the appearance of being dead. WTien the birds de- part, a fresh rank gTowth of foliage results from the large amount of guano left in the soil. In August a dense growth of young shoots covers the stems of Myoporum IcBtum and Mclicope ternata ; the tops of the trees, however, are quite dead, and never recover. The imdergrowth is a rank mass of Macropiper excelsum major about 1 m. high, and which, judging by the number of dead stems present, appears to have been killed right down to the roots. With it occur a few other plants — Mariscus ustulatus, Pteris comans, Solanum nigrum, Carex Forsteri insularis, Sicyos australis, Hypo- lepis tenuifolia, Ageratum conyzoides. Growing in highly manured gTound vacated by the shearwater above mentioned, Sicyos australis frequently produces abnormal male flowers, in which the petals turn green, and assume more or less the shape and character of young foUage-leaves. The vegetation on Meyer Island takes the form of open ngaio (Myo- porum) scrub up to about 8 m. high, and including some other trees not characteristic of this formation — Metrosideros villosa, Corynocarpus Icevigata, Pisonia Brunoniana, Rapanea kcrmadecensis. Pisonia Bnmoniana branches in an extremely irregular, not to say fantastic, manner. The trunk is stout, gnarled, and divided half a metre or so above the gTound. The stems spread out in all directions, and, branch- ing but few times, bear a rosette of large leaves at the extremity of each twig. Often large branches are dead. The Pisonia appears to have a hard struggle to live on this exposed arid islet. On every possible spot a white- cap noddy {Micranou's leucocapillus) has placed its nest, built of Pisonia and other leaves. Wliether or not the bird plucks leaves from the trees for its nest I cannot say. There are a few small plants of Corynocarpus Icevigata growing in the most sheltered places on Meyer Island. They have erect stems, small, dark, yellowish-gTeen upper leaves and larger lower ones, and, never rising higher than the surrounding ngaio scrub, their uppermost twigs are dead. Asplenium Shuttleworthianum on Meyer Island is a low densely tufted fern. Rhizome stout, brownish-black, forming a mass 15-20 cm. in dia- meter. Fronds crowded, much divided, the pinnae usually overlapping, with short segments, yellowish-green, the tips usually dead. The soil on Meyer Island is the loose, shifting, yellowish, weathered surface of the tuffs of which the island is composed. It is continually being overturned by burrowing species of shearwater. During the summer months the burrows are occupied by Puffinus chlororhynchus, in company with a small petrol [CEstrelata nigripennis), while for the remainder of the year their place is taken by P. assimiUs. It is only in crevices of rocks and other places where the birds are unable to burrow that any small plants occur. Here are found Sicyos australis, Canavalia obtusifolia, Parictaria debilis, Mariscus ustulatus, Solanum, nigrum (pubescent form), Asplenium Shuttleworthianum, and Siegesheckia orientalis. The scrub, owing to the steep rocky nature of the surface, is rather open. The Myoporum itself appears to be as much dead as alive. Looking at it from above, one sees a forest of straggly dead brushwood, among which living branches are struggUng for existence. The constant winds laden Omver. — Vegetation of the Kermadec Islands. 133 with salt spray are too severe, the result being that the upper exposed twigs of all the trees are dead. The top of Dayrell Islet supports a very scanty vegetation. The soil is everywhere undermined by burrowing shearwaters, and is in every way similar to the steep slopes of Meyer Island. There are a few small trees of Metrosideros villosa of a straggly habit, while Myoporum Icetum and Coprosma petiolata form low dense bushes about 1 m. high. (d.) Sand Duties. — The only true sand dunes on Sunday Island form a single line fringing Low Flat Beach on the north coast. They are low, and consist of the fine sand of which the beach is composed, heaped up by wind against the land. They are covered Avith Ipomosa pes caprce, which sends its runners two or three metres on to the beach itself, and its long white roots still further under the beach. Among the Ipomoea are found chiefly^^ Imperata Cheesemani, Scirpus nodosus, Eleusine indica, and Apium prostratum. (e.) Gravel Flat.— A flat extends along the beach in Denham Bay for about 2 km., and has an average width of 75 m. Its outer edge coincides with the limit of storm seas and shifting gravel ; along its inner edge is forest. The vegetation of this flat forms an important plant formation, as in Denham Bay seeds of plants brought by ocean-currents and washed ashore are most likely to find a suitable place for germinating. The principal plants of the gravel flat are Ipomoea pes caprce, Mariscus ustidatus, Scirpus nodosus, Sccevola gracilis, Myoporum Icetum, Ageratum conyzoides, Stellaria media, Euphorbia Peplus, Cynodon Dactylon, Calystegia SoldaneUa, Tetragonia expansa, Deyeuxia Forsteri, Imperata Cheesemani, and Erechthites prenanthoides. Ipomoea pes caprce has long, branched, trailing stems, which lie along the ground, rooting here and there at the nodes. Leaves large, 2-lobed, dark yellowish-green, firm in texture, forming a mass of vegetation cover- ing the ground to a height of 30 cm. Flowers large and conspicuous, pale lilac, produced in abundance. SccBvola gracilis is a procumbent undershrub with long, spreading, hairy branches, and rather dense hairy foliage, covering the ground to a height of about half a metre. Leaves 114 x 39 mm., 110 x 42 mm., 97 x 35 mm., 80 x 25 mm., yellowish-green, firm in texture, covered with short stiff hairs. Flowers small, axillary, white with a yellow centre, produced abmidantly throughout the year. Fruit fleshy, white. Myoporum Icetum occurs on the gravel flat as low shrubs, 1-3 m. tall, with dense light-green foliage, through which project numerous dead twigs. Detached plants only are found, with the foliage on the seaward side reach- ing the ground. The grav(d flat is said to be covered by hurricane seas only, though other heavy seas sometimes break over parts of it, killing some of the vege- tation. In July, 1908, the sea flooded part of the flat, and killed Ipomoea pes caprce, and some of the leaves and twigs of Myoporum Icetum. The soil is gravel, similar to that of which the beach is composed. During westerly weather it is continually drenched with salt spray. From October till April, wideawake terns {Sterna fidiginosa) occupy the front portion of the gravel flat, and keep the vegetation well trampled down, ^\^len they depart, however, the Ipomoea pes caprce grows up tall and rank, covering the ground with dense dark-gTeen foliage to a height of 40-50 cm., and elsewhere a host of weeds, chiefly Stellaria media and Euphorbia Peplus, soon springs up. 134 Transactions. Three plants occupy practically the whole of the flat^ — viz., Mariscus ustulatus, Scirpus nodosus, and Ipomoea pes caprce. Mariscus ustulatus occurs all over the fiat, but more sparingly near the forest, where it is re- placed by Scirpus nodosus and Ageratum. conyzoides. Ipomosa pes caprce grows almost everywhere, mixing with both Mariscus and Scirpus. Its long trailing stems are only driven back by the waves on one side and by the shade of the forest on the other. A few shrubs of Myoporum Icetum occur here and there, while there is an undergrowth among the Mariscus and Ipomoea, chiefly composed of Stellaria media, Euphorbia Peplus, and Cynodon DactyJon. Along the sea -edge, where the gravel takes the nature of a dune, Calystegia Soldanella and Tetragonia expansa occur. There is ev dence that another plant — Sccevola gracilis — now almost entirely killed by introduced sheep and cattle, formerly took an important part in the formation. In an enclosure at the south end of Denham Bay, where these animals are not allowed, the vegetation is dense, about half a metre high, and composed principally of Sccevola gracilis and Scirpus nodosus, with Ipomoea pes caprce growing among them. Here also are found Imperata Cheesemani and Danthonia pilosa. 2. Inland Edaphic Formations. The plant formations occurring in all places on Sunday Island where the nature of the soil inhibits the growth of forest (except the areas occupied by the coastal, young, and introduced formations) are included under this heading, and naturally fall into three groups, which will be described in the order of their probable appearance. Forest, being the only climatic forma- tion, is kept under a separate heading, though true forest possibly existed on Sunday Island before there were any swamps or lakes. (a.) Rocks and Cliffs. — On Sunday Island it may be said with regrrd to chif vegetation that some of the plants now most characteristic of it are those which goats search out and suppress in the forest. This is certainly the case with Asplenium. Shuttleworthianum and Veronica hreviracemosa. Certain plants, however, such as Lagenophora petiolata and Lobelia anceps, are found in nearly all rocky places in the forest. Other species usually occurring in rocky situations are Hydrocotyle nioscJiata, Coprosma petiolata, Carex Forsteri insularis, Sccevola gracilis, Cyclopliorus serpens, Peperomia Endlicheri, Poa polyphylla, Mesembryanthemum australe, and Psilotum tri- quetrum. The rock-vegetation is well developed on the cliffs at the back of the Terraces. These cliffs are of an exceptionally dry character, face north, and are inaccessible to goats. Where there is a crevice or ledge affording the slightest hold for soil, plants will be found. The chief members are Cyclophorus serpens, Lobelia anceps, Asplenium. Shuttleworthianum, Poa polyphylla, Peperomia Endlicheri, and Mesembryanthemum australe. A plant of Coprosma petiolata was also seen. On the cliffs above Denham Bay, now, owing to the presence of inhabit- ants in the bay, practically free from goats, are found Veronica breviracemosa, Coprosma petiolata, Lobelia anceps, Lagenophora Forsteri, and Carex Forsteri insularis, besides Hydrocotyle moschata in damp places. On an open rocky slope Sccevola gracilis covers the ground ; mixed with it is a little Dan- thonia pilosa. A cliff in the crater at the base of Moumoukai contains the following plants : Poa polyphylla, Cyclophorus serpens, Sccevola gracilis, Erechtites I Oliver. — VegcUition of the Kennadec Islands. 135 "prenanthoides, Nephrolepis cordifolia, Adiantum hispidulum, Pellcea jalcata, Ageratum conyznidrs, and dwarf plants of Myoporum IcBtum and Coriaria sarmentosa. This part was included in the area destroyed by a volcanic eruption in 1872. At the foot of the cliffs in Denham Bay steam escapes in several places, killing the vegetation where it issues from the ground. Near by, on the warm ground, is a dense growth of plants ^-1 m. high, consisting chieflv of Nephrolepis exaUata, Polijpodium diver si folium, Paspalum scrohiculatum, Lycopodium cernuum, and Psilotum triquetrum. The Polypodium and Lyco- podium have tall erect fronds, the former measuring up to 105 cm., the latter to 83 cm., in height. On Macauley Island deep ravines, cut through volcanic tuffs by the action of rain-water, support on their precipitous sides a little vegetation. Goats are unable to reach certain parts, and hence possibly a remnant of the original vegetation is found here. These gullies afford shelter from wind, but the porous nature of the ground allows water to percolate freely ; hence the soil is usually particularly dry. The list of plants noticed in these ravines is as follows : Boehmeria dealbata, Carex Forsteri insularis, Asplenium lucidum, A. obtusatufn, Hypolepis tenui folia, Poa polyphylla, Lobelia anceps, Gnaphalium luteo-album, Scirpus nodosus, Mariscus ustu- latus, and Mesembryanihemum australe. (b.) Swamp. — Swamp occurs in Denham Bay and round the Blue Lake in the crater. Typha angustifolia grows along the edges of Tui Lake and the Green Lake, but there is no swamp formation. The swamp in Denham Bay is situated opposite the middle of the bay, between the gravel flat and the high perpendicular cliffs some 300 m. further back. It is somewhat oblong in shape, about 600 m. long and 200 m. broad. The ground round the swamp is composed of pumiceous tuffs and gravel, derived from the cliffs, which no doubt slipped down into the bay when the sea washed their bases. The sea has since retired, being now some 400 m. from the cliffs at this part. Rain-water percolates these tuffs very quickly, but under the swamp is a layer of blue and yellow sandy clay which holds water for a considerable time, thus making possible the existence of a swamp. The surface is everywhere spongy and gives under the feet. In places, more especially after rain, water lies to a depth of 20 cm. The principal swamp-plant is Typha angustifolia. Its height varies. Over the greater part of the swamp it lies between 1 m. and 1-5 m., and here the ground, though springy, will support the weight of a man. In places, however, it is tall, up to 2-6 m., and here one's legs sink in up to the knees or deeper. After the Typha, Juneus effusus is the most important plant. It grows in tufts, 1-5 m. high, and covers large patches in the drier parts of the swamp. Blechnum capense (75 cm. tall), Histiopteris incisa, and Paspalum scrobiculatum occur in small patches in several places. The Ristiopteris forms rather dense patches + 1 m. high, with much decayed vegetable matter underneath. Other swamp-plants noticed were Juneus pmieiflorus near the edge, and Heleocharis acida in water. The character of the vegetation in the Denham Bay swamp appears to be altering, forest-plants taking the place of swamp-plants. In fact, a swamp formation is here in process of being changed into forest. Thirty years ago there was an open sheet of water with Typha angustifolia growing along the edge, from where gradually it spread until now there is no open water. Parts, however, are much wetter than the rest, and here the Typha 136 Transactions. is tallest. In tke greater part of the swamp the following appear to be signs of drying up : Typha angustifolia is of small size ; Juncus effusus is abundant ; various other plants, such as Mariscus ustulatus, Ageratum conyzoides, and Poly podium diver si folium, are appearing ; and, finally, plants of Metrosideros villosa up to 2 m. in height occur in various places, chiefly on the higher ground, where water does not actually lie on the surface. The cause of this change is probably the filling-in of the swamp by material washed into it by rains. The swamp surrounding the Blue Lake is similar to that in Denham Bay, but contains fewer species of plants. Besides Typha angustifolia, Mariscus ustulatus and Paspahim scrobiculatum are the chief plants. This swamp is of recent origin, as the water in the Blue Lake was probably boiling during the eruption of 1872, there being a number of standing dead trees near its shores. (c.) Lakes. — From the edge of the Green Lake the bottom slopes steeply into deep water. In places, however, there is a shelf just submerged, and here Typha angustifolia finds a foothold ; but in all cases there is a space of about a metre between it and the water's edge, this being the distance goats are able to reach when standing in shallow water. Tui Lake is a small sheet of fresh water surrounded by forest, and Ues on the edge of the area afiected by the eruption of 1872. A little Typha angustifolia occurs, and Callitriche Muelleri grows either entirely submerged or on the bank close to the water's edge. ■■to^ 3. Forest Foi'mations. (a.) General Remarks. — Practically the whole of Sunday Island is covered with forest, this being the true climatic plant formation. The proportion of ground occupied by other formations would be insignificant when com- pared to that under forest, which reaches from the water's edge to the tops of the highest hills, were it not for certain disturbing influences which may be termed accidental, and which have led to the existence of the plant forma- tions described below as " young " and " introduced." But cUmate, being a permanent unchanging factor, must in the long-run overcome any tem- porary disturbing influences, and consequently forest will gradually replace the new formations. This process is certainly going on with regard to the young formations, which might appropriately be called young forests ; but the occupation of man, which is responsible for the existence of the introduced formations, may become a permanent factor ever preventing the forest regaining its lost ground. I have already mentioned the change which is apparently taking place in the swamp in Denham Bay ; but this is a slow, natural process consequent on the filling-in of the swamp by material washed into it by rains, and, possibly, the gradual upheaval of the Kermadec Islands plateau. Though small, Sunday Island is hilly in the character of its surface, and a considerable area is over 300 m. above sea-level ; hence the amount of atmospheric precipitation is not the same in all parts, and consequently the character of the forest varies. The soil is everywhere extremely permeable, so that it may be disregarded as a factor determining the distribution of the main types of forest. The more elevated parts of the island undoubtedly receive a much greater amount of moisture than the lower parts. In northerly weather everywhere above an altitude of about 300 m. is enve- loped in clouds, while the lower ground receives moisture only while it is Oliver. — Vegetation of the Kermadec Islands. 137 actually raining, and between showers may even be suffering from the desiccating effect of the wind. The forest, then, may be divided into two main types, determined by the amount of moisture received. To these I apply the terms " dry " and " wet." I might also refer to them as " upper " and " lower " ; but, though the wet forest is confined to the upper parts of the island, its existence as a distinct formation is not due directly to its altitude, but to its abundant supply of moisture. Generally speaking, the wet forest occurs on ground more than 250 m. above sea-level, though no sharp line of demarcation can be drawn between the wet and dry forests, the one passing gradually into the other at an alti- tude varying between 200 m. and 300 m. It differs from dry forest in its much more luxuriant growth, and in the abundance of cryptogamic epi- phytes. (6.) Leading Physiognomic Plants and their Life-forms. — (1.) Trees and shrubs : Metrosideros villosa occurs in two principal forms. Its ordinary state is a lofty forest-tree, 20 m. tall, with an erect, more or less crooked or twisted trunk ^1 m. in diameter at the base, and branching, chiefly in its upper part, in a most irregular manner. Aerial rootlets are usually given out from the lower part of the trunk. These grow downwards, in- creasing in size and branching till they reach the gTound, where they take root, and, still growing larger, act like additional stems. The larger trees on the ridges and in exposed places usually have im- mense prostrate trunks, sending up several branches each the size of a large tree. Aerial roots are given off from the under-side of the trunk until the base of the tree becomes a mass of entangled roots and stems of all sizes. In leaning trees they form supports for the trunk, which thus spreads in the direction in which it is leaning — usually downhill or in a northerly direc- tion— that is, away from the point whence come the hiirricanes.* Corynocarpus Icevigata is a lofty forest-tree, 20 m. tall, with one to three erect stems, branching chiefly about 8-10 m. above the ground. The three trunks of one tree measured 115 cm., 135 cm., and 150 cm. in circumference respectively. Bark dark brown, rather rough, with small lenticels. Foliage dense. Myoporum loetum is a lofty forest-tree, 20 m. tall, with a trunk 2 m. in circumference at the base, branching near the top, and with lax fohage. Bark rough, grey. Leaves serrate, light green, pellucid glands scarcely visible. Usually in the forest Myoporum Icetum is a small tree of the second tier, with an erect stem and lax fohage. Melicytus ramiflorus in dry forest is usually a small tree with an erect branching stem and lax foliage. In wet forest, however, it is a tree of large proportions, consisting of a great many stems spreading from the base, and with the moderately dense fohage borne principally at the top. Bark nearly smooth, and of a light-gTey colour. Rapanea kermadecensis is a small glabrous tree, 6-10 m. tall, with an erect stem bearing numerous horizontal branches. Bark rather smooth, with small lenticels, reddish-grey. Wood extremely hard. Foliage dense. Leaves elliptic-oblong, coriaceous, dark green, margins wavy, more or less rolled; lamina? 42 x 20mm., 45 x 25mm., 60 x 27mm., 70 x 33mm. * Dr. Cockayne is of opihion (Report Bot. Surv. Stewart Island, 1909. p. 10) that Metrosideros lucida has under certam stimuli an hereditary tendency towards a prostrate habit. 138 Transactions. Flowers small, in fascicles on the twigs among and below tlie leaves. Fruit fleshy. Ascarina lanceolata is a tall shrub or small slender tree, with bark of a dark reddish-brown colour, and rather rough, with close lenticels. Foliage dense ; leaves ovate-lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate, deeply serrate, firm in texture, aromatic ; laminae 55 x 18 mm., 62 x 24 mm., 65 x 20 mm., 65 X 22 mm. Flowers unisexual, in compound spikes. Fruit a small drupe, 3 mm. long. Melicope ternata is a small erect tree, 10 m. tall. Bark rather rough, with numerous lenticels, reddish. Leaves trifoliate, in bunches at the end of the twigs ; leaflets large, the central ones 15 cm. long, 7-5 cm. broad, shining, flaccid, or the older ones firm. Coprosnia acutijolia is a small, erect, often slender tree, 7-10 m. tall, and with a trunk sometimes 140 cm. in circumference near the base. Bark quite smooth, grey to greenish. Branches ending in numerous slender twigs bearing moderately dense foliage. Leaves ovate-lanceolate to elliptic- ovate, acuminate, variable in size and shape ; laminae 43 x 18 mm., 63 X 22 mm., 75 x 35 mm. Fruit small orange -red drupes, produced copiously. Macropiper excelsmn major is a small shrub, 2-3 m. tall, with usually several stems springing from the same base. Stems smooth, greenish, terete, with large nodes. Foliage lax. Leaves large, cordate, with 7-13 ribs radiating from the base, flaccid or moderately firm in texture ; laminae 12 X 11 cm. to 16 x 19 cm. (largest leaf measured 17 x 22 cm.). Flowers dioecious ; male spikes 15-23 cm. long, female spikes 8-10 cm. long. Fruit fleshy. (2.) Palms : Rhopalostylis Baueri has a stout, erect, terete, greenish trunk, marked by conspicuous regular rings representing leaf-scars. Base of stem enlarged, bearing densely crowded short roots. Height to flowers 7-10 m. Flowers borne at the base of the leaf-sheaths, several succeeding one another in a season. Leaves pinnate ; length without sheath 3-5 m., longest pinnte 1-1-2 m., forming a crown at the top of the stem spreading at an angle of + 130°. (3.) Tree-ferns : Cyathea kermadecensis has a trunk 15-20 m. tall, the base large, 1-2 m. in diameter, formed of adventitious rootlets and rapidly narrowing into a slender upper part which is comparatively smooth, as the fallen fronds leave clean scars. Cyathea Milnei has a stout erect trunk 4-8 m. tall, slightly thickened by adventitious rootlets at- the base. Fronds after withering hang down the stem for a considerable time, hence there is always a cluster of dead fronds round the top. When they do fall they break of? short, leaving the broken stipes attached to the trunk, which consequently is rough and untidy. (4.) Small ferns : Pteris comnns forms tufts about 2 m. tall, containing many dead stipes besides the hving fronds. Nephrolepis exaltata has a short erect rhizome from which fronds and roots spring crossing one another. Height 1-2 m. A frond measured — stipe, 100 cm.; frond, 113 cm.; total length, 213 cm.; longest pinna, 175 X 17 mm. Pinnae easily broken, so that perfect specimens are rare. Nephrolepis cordi folia is a low fern with a tufted rhizome bearing 6-10 live and many dead fronds, and numerous roots, forming a tangled mat. Fronds linear, 50-60 cm. long, 5-6 cm. broad, with the pinnae usually broken near their tips. Oliver. — Vegetation of the Kermadec Islands. 139 Polystichum aristatum has a long creeping rhizome bearing at short intervals erect, hard, dark-green, deltoid fronds, 1 m. tall. Dryopteris setigera is a tall fern, 1-2 m. high, with a short tufted rhizome and few, light-green, delicate, compound, deltoid fronds. Diplazium japonicum is a low tufted fern, about \ m. tall, with few light-green, delicate, pinnate fronds. Blechnum capense varies very much in its size and habit. It may be a tall fern with erect fronds 2-2-5 m. high, or a low fern, | m. tall, with broadly ovate or nearly orbicular spreading fronds. (c.) Ecology. — (1.) Ecological factors : First in importance of factors determining both the existence and character of the forest is climate. An abundant supply of rain spread throughout the year produces a forest formation whose physiognomy alters in accordance with the amount of moisture received. A full account of the climate has already been given. The annual rainfall, amounting to over 1.700 mm. for nine months, and high average degree of relative humidity, with a temperature never falling below 8°C., and averaging more than 18° C, is ample to produce hygro- phytic vegetation (16 ; p. 168), while the desiccating effect of the constant ■winds is to a certain extent counterbalanced by the moisture-laden atmo- sphere. The winds are most felt near the sea-shore and at the top of sea-cliffs, where the vegetation is shorn down to a certain height, above which nothing but dead twigs project. The general effect of the warm and humid climate on the vegetation is to promote a luxuriant growth. This is exemplified in the case of New Zealand plants extending to the Kermadecs. Macropiper excelsum and MeUcope tcrnata are each represented by varieties characterized by larger leaves. Corynocarpus Icevigata and Myoporum IcBtuni, small trees in New Zealand, are on Sunday Island lofty forest-trees 20 m. tall. The habit of two plants — Calystegia SoldaneUa and Ipomcea palmata — of flowering but not fruiting (according to my observation) is perhaps occasioned by the climate. Some mosses rarely bear fruiting capsules. A number of plants flower immediately after fruiting. In the case of Rapanea kermadecensis both flowers and ripe fruit ai'e sometimes seen on the same twig. Besides this species, Coprosma petiolnta, C. acutijolia, Macropiper excelsum major. Ascarina lanceolata, and MeUcope ternata flower during the winter months. The slight fall in temperature, rather than interfering with, seems to favour the development of the reproductive organs (see 16 ; p. 48). In the list of indigenous plants I have recorded the measurements of large specimens of several plants. The most noticeable effect of winds is to limit the general level of the vegetation in exposed places. Myoporum Icehim, which is the principal plant in the coastal scrub, adapts itself precisely so as to offer least resistance to the prevailing Avinds. Its slanting flat top is maintained by the constant wi)ids, which, laden with salt spray, kill every twig above a certain level,